Date post: | 03-Jan-2016 |
Category: |
Documents |
Upload: | adan-gonzalez-rodriguez |
View: | 127 times |
Download: | 3 times |
SERVICE MANUAL
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
SHARP CORPORATIONThis document has been published to be usedfor after sales service only.The contents are subject to change without notice.
NOTE FOR SERVICING
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7] TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
[14] TOOL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
CONTENTS
CODE: 00ZMXM264/S2E
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MX-M264U/M264NMX-M314U/M314NMX-M354U/M354NMODEL
1 Å2012.10.18
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii6. Note for handling the drum unit, the developing unit . . . iii7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii8. Relation between model names and names
in the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE1. System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12. Option list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
[2] SPECIFICATIONS1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12. Copy functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63. Printer function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74. FAX function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75. Image send function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96. Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117. Dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23. Developer/Drum life end definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45. Environmental conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12. Internal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23. Automatic document feeder and document glass . . . . 4-34. I/F connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56. RSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67. Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88. Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89. Solenoid/Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-910. Drive motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-911. Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1012. Fan/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1013. PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1114. Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
[6] SIMULATION1. General and purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12. Starting the simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
[7] TROUBLESHOOTING1. Error code and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12. JAM and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-233. Image send communication report code . . . . . . . . . . 7-244. Dial tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9] MAINTENANCE1. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12. Other related items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY1. Process unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22. Developing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75. Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96. Side door unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-157. 1st paper exit unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-168. Laser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-189. Power unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1810. PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1911. Ozone filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2012. Transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2013. Operation section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2114. RSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING1. HDD/SD card memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB,
HDD and the SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33. HDD/SD card SIM format operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12. Details and operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12. Power line diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-83. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-114. Signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
[14] TOOL LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
1
Symbols in this manualThe lists of symbols used in this manual are shown below.The meaning of each symbol described in the table must be understood for proper servicing.
1. Symbols used for notes and cautions
2. Symbols used in the work contents
Symbol MeaningCAUTION Indicates a general
caution item.
HIGH TEMP Be careful of a high temperature in the fusing section.
HIGH VOLTAGE Be careful of an electric shock where a high voltage is applied such as the high voltage PWB, the main charger, and the process section.
DANGER Indicates danger.
HANDLE WITH CARE
Indicates a part which requires special care for handling such as the HDD, and the LSU.
INHIBIT Indicates inhibit.
NOELECTROSTATIC CHARGE
Be careful to keep away from static electricity. (PWB's and electric parts)
NO DUST, FINGER PRINT, DIRT, SCRATCH
Be careful not to touch directly, such as the optical section, the photoconductor, and the DV roller. Also be careful not to scratch.
NO SCRATCH
NO LIGHT Be careful not to expose to light, such as the photoconductor, and the test chart.
NO SOLVENT Be careful not to use a solvent in cleaning, etc.
NO DISASSEMLE Do not disassemble. Not serviceable. Example CCD unit.
OK/GOOD Indicates a correct procedure or result in an adjustment, etc.
NO GOOD Indicates a wrong procedure or result in an adjustment, etc.
NOTE Indicates a note.
IMPORTANT Indicates an important item.
REFER Indicates a reference page, etc.
NEW Indicates a new technology, a new method, or a new item.
EXAMPLE Indicates a description using an example.
Symbol Meaning (Work content)Adhesion Indicates that a seal, etc.
is attached.
Adjustment Indicates an adjustment.
Measure a dimension or a size.
Indicates that a dimension or a length is measured.
Apply grease Indicates that grease is to be applied.
Apply conductive grease
Indicates conductive grease is applied
Cleaning (Dry)
Indicates clean with a dry cloth.
Cleaning (Wet)
Indicates clean with a cloth dampened with water.
Cleaning (Alcohol)
Indicates clean with alcohol.
Cleaning (Blower)
Indicates cleaning is done with a blower/brush.
Symbol Meaning
3. Symbols used for kinds of parts
4. Symbols used for additional descriptions
Cleaning (Vacuum)
Indicates that cleaning is performed with a vacuum cleaner.
Cleaning (Brush)
Indicates that cleaning is performed with a brush.
Oil Indicates that oil is applied to lubricate.
Apply powder. Indicates that setting power is applied to the photoconductor drum, the transfer belt, etc.
Replace Indicates that a part is replaced.
Check Indicates that a check (replacement, adjustment, cleaning) is performed.
Cut Indicates that cutting is performed.
Loosen Indicates that a screw is loosened.
Connect Indicates that a connector is connected.
Disconnect Indicates that a connector is disconnected.
Remove a harness.
Indicates that a harness is unsecured.
Attach a harness. Indicates that a harness is secured.
Remove a clamp.
Attach a clamp.
Release a hook. Indicates that a hook is released.
Fix a hook. Indicates that a hook is fixed.
Disengage the pawl.
Symbol Meaning (Work content)Engage the pawl.
Screw lock Indicates that a screw is secured with adhesive.
Unlock
Turn OFF the power.
Disconnect the power plug.
Symbol Meaning (Kinds of parts)Maintenance part
Indicates a part which is replaced in a maintenanceprocedure.
Consumable part
Indicates a consumable part such as a photoconductor, developer, a transfer belt, etc.
Waste part Indicates a waste part which is consumed butexcluded from the above consumable parts. (A roller, a seal, etc.)
Unit part Indicates a part which is designated as a unit.
Included part Indicates a part which is included in the package
Symbol MeaningView from the top
Indicates from which angle the drawing is viewed.
View from the bottom
View from the front
View from the back
Symbol Meaning (Work content)
MX-M264U NOTE FOR SERVICING - i
MX-M264UNOTE FOR SERVICING* About a main unit illustration, it may differ from a target model.
1. Precautions for servicing• When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, the
network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, exceptwhen performing the communication test, etc.It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
• There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Useextreme care when servicing.It may cause a burn.
• There is a high voltage section inside the machine which maycause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
• Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflectivematerial such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
• When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not tosqueeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and otherdriving sections.
• Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled.Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch insidethe machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or an injury.
• When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink exces-sively. Do not get them in the eyes.If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away withwater immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
• The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to dam-age fingers when servicing.
• Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, tonermay ignite and burn you.
• When replacing a lithium battery on a PWB, only use the speci-fied replacement battery.If a battery of different specification is used, it may cause amachine malfunction or breakdown.
• When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to it,be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.It may otherwise cause a machine breakdown or malfunction.
2. Warning for servicing• Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electricshock.It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
• If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormalsmell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
• Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakageoccurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may result.To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,grounding must be made.
• When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the fol-lowing points.
Gas tubeLightning conductorA water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as agrounding object by the authorities.Grounding wire for telephone line
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.• Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not stress, forc-ibly bend, or pull the power cord.It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
• Keep the power cable away from a heat source.Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
• Do not place liquids or foreign metallic objects inside themachine.It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
• Do not touch the power cord, insert the phone jack, operate themachine, or perform service on the machine with wet or oilyhands.It may cause an electric shock.
3. Note for installing siteDo not install the machine at the following sites.• Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature,
low humidity, place under an extreme change in temperatureand humidity.Paper may get damp and form condensation inside the machine,causing paper jam or copy dirt.For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specificationsdescribed later.
• Place of extreme vibrationsIt may cause a breakdown.
• Poorly ventilated placeAn electrostatic type copier will produce ozone.The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so asnot to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of such amachine may produce an ozone smell. Install the machine in awell ventilated place.
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
(200V series only)
MX-M264U NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii
• Place of direct sunlight.Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or mayundergo qualitative change.It may cause a breakdown or output quality problems.
• Place which is full of organic gases such as ammoniumThe organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machinemay undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such asammonium.Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier and blueprint machine may result in poor quality output.
• Place of much dustWhen dust or contaminants enters the machine, it may cause abreakdown or poor quality output.
• Place near a wallThe machine will require ventilation.If ventilation is not proper, poor output or machine failure mayresult.
• Unstable or irregular surfaceIf the machine is dropped or tips over, it may cause injury ormachine malfunction.Use an optional desk or an exclusive-use desk.When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and lockthe casters.
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure toobserve the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-age by static electricity.• When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or an
anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.
• When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag (case),use an earth band as shown below:• Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the machine.
• When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform theprocedure on an anti-static mat.
11-13/16"(30cm)
11-13/16"(30cm)
17-23/32"(45cm)
MX-M264U NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSUWhen repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the followingitems.• When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect the
power plug from the power outlet.• When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures
described in this Service Manual.• When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all
the parts including the cover installed and perform the operationcheck.
• Do not modify the LSU.• When visually checking the inside of the machine for the opera-
tion check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the eyes.If the above precaution is neglected or the LSU is modified, onessafety may be at risk.
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the developing unit
When handling the OPC drum unit, and the developing unit, strictlyobserve the following items.If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in thecopy and print image quality.Drum unit• Avoid working at a place with strong lights.• Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights for
a long time.• When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it with
light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 sheetsof paper to cover it.)
• Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreignmaterial on the OPC drum surface.
Developing unit• Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the developing unit.Fusing unit• Be careful not to "leave" fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the fusing roller.If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in thecopy and print image quality.
7. Screw tightening torqueThe screws used in this machine are largely classified into threetypes.These types are classified according to the shape of the screwgrooves and use positions.The table below shows the types of the screws and the tighteningtorques depending on the use position.When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to thetable.However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than speci-fied on this table, or under special circumstances, the details aredescribed on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on suchan exception.
CAUTION: Especially for the screw fixing positions where there isan electrode or a current flows, use enough care totighten securely to avoid loosening.
Screw kinds and tightening torquesNormal screws, set screws (including step screws)
Tapping screws (for iron)
Tapping screw (for plastic)
8. Relation between model names and names in the manual
Screw diameter
Material to be fixed
Tightening torque (N m)
Tightening torque
(kgf cm)
Tightening torque (lbft)
M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
Screw diameter
Material to be fixed
Tightening torque (N m)
Tightening torque
(kgf cm)
Tightening torque (lbft)
M3 Steel plate (Plate thickness 0.8mm or above)
1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
M4 Steel plate (Plate thickness 0.8mm or above)
1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
M3 Steel plate (Plate thickness
less than 0.8mm)
0.6 - 0.8 6 - 8 0.4 - 0.6
M4 Steel plate (Plate thickness
less than 0.8mm)
1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
Screw diameter
Material to be fixed
Tightening torque (N m)
Tightening torque
(kgf cm)
Tightening torque (lbft)
M3 Plastic resin 0.6 - 0.8 6 - 8 0.4 - 0.6M4 Plastic resin 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
Model name Name in the manualMX-M264U/MX-M264N 26cpm machineMX-M314U/MX-M314N 31cpm machineMX-M354U/MX-M354N 35cpm machine
MX-M264U PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1
MX-M264U[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
1. System configuration
MX-M264N/M314N/M354NMX-M264U/M314U/M354U
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONALSYSTEM
MX-FN23FINISHER
MX-TR11JOB SEPARATOR
MX-TE10EXIT TRAY UNIT
MX-PK11PS3 EXPANSION KIT
MX-PF10BARCODE FONT KIT
MX-PB15PRINTER EXPANSION KIT
MX-FX11FACSIMILE EXPANSIONKIT
AR-SU1STAMP UNIT
MX-FR37UDATA SECURITY KIT
MX-FWX1INTERNET FAX EXPANSIONKIT
MX-NSX1NETWORK SCANNEREXPANSION KIT
MX-HD12HARD DISK EXPANSION KIT
MX-US50SHARPDESK 50 LICENSEKIT
MX-UN1HASharp OSA Network ScannerTool 100 License Kit
MX-KB14KEYBOARD
MX-USX1SHARPDESK 1 LICENSEKIT
MX-USX5SHARPDESK 5 LICENSEKIT
MX-US10SHARPDESK 10 LICENSEKIT
MX-USA0SHARPDESK 100 LICENSEKIT
MX-AMX1APPLICATIONINTEGRATION MODULE
MX-AMX2APPLICATIONCOMMUNICATION MODULE
MX-AMX3EXTERNAL ACCOUNTMODULE
MX-SCX1STAPLE CARTRIDGE
AR-SV1STAMP CARTRIDGE
MX-UN01ASharp OSA Network ScannerTool 1 License Kit
MX-UN50ASharp OSA Network ScannerTool 50 License Kit
MX-UN10ASharp OSA Network ScannerTool 10 License Kit
MX-UN05ASharp OSA Network ScannerTool 5 License Kit
MX-RP15REVERSING SINGLE PASSFEEDER
MX-VR11DOCUMENT COVER
MX-DE17500 SHEET PAPERDRAWER
MX-DE182x500 SHEET PAPERDRAWER
MX-DS17HIGH STAND
MX-DS16LOW STAND
MX-M264U PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2
2. Option list
STD: Standard equipmentOPT: Installable option*1: The FINISHER is required.*2: Cannot be installed the EXIT TRAY UNIT and the FINISHER concurrently.*3: Cannot be installed the JOB SEPARATOR concurrently.*4: PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is required.*5: HARD DISK EXPANSION KIT is required.*6: APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE is required.
Model name NameMX-M264UMX-M314UMX-M354U
MX-M264NMX-M314NMX-M354N
Remarks
Document feed system MX-RP15 REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER OPT STDMX-VR11 DOCUMENT COVER OPT ---
Paper feed system MX-DE17 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPTMX-DE18 2x500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPTMX-DS16 LOW STAND OPT OPTMX-DS17 HIGH STAND OPT OPT
Paper exit system MX-TE10 EXIT TRAY UNIT OPT OPT *1MX-TR11 JOB SEPARATOR OPT OPT *2MX-FN23 FINISHER OPT OPT *3
Printer expansion MX-PB15 PRINTER EXPANSION KIT OPT STDMX-PK11 PS3 EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT *4MX-PF10 BARCODE FONT KIT OPT OPT *4
Image send expansion MX-NSX1 NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT OPT STDMX-FX11 FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT OPT OPTMX-FWX1 INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT *5AR-SU1 STAMP UNIT OPT OPT
Authentication/Security MX-FR37U DATA SECURITY KIT OPT OPT *5Application/Solution MX-USX1 SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-USX5 SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT OPT OPTMX-US10 SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT OPT OPTMX-US50 SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT OPT OPTMX-USA0 SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT OPT OPTMX-UN01A Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 1 License Kit OPT OPT *6MX-UN05A Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 5 License Kit OPT OPT *6MX-UN10A Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 10 License Kit OPT OPT *6MX-UN50A Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 50 License Kit OPT OPT *6MX-UN1HA Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 100 License Kit OPT OPT *6MX-AMX1 APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE OPT OPT *5MX-AMX2 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE OPT OPT *5MX-AMX3 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE OPT OPT *5
Service MX-SCX1 STAPLE CARTRIDGE OPT OPTAR-SV1 STAMP CARTRIDGE OPT OPT
Other MX-HD12 HARD DISK EXPANSION KIT OPT OPTMX-KB14 KEYBOARD OPT OPT
MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1
MX-M264U[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic specificationsA. Engine Specification
B. Engine speed (ppm)Tray 1 - 4
Manual paper feed
C. Printable area
D. Engine resolution
*1: Resolustion: 600dpi (default)*2: The dither and error diffusion methods using 8bit input will be
performed.
E. Scanner section(1) Resolution/Gradation
(2) Document table
F. Document feeder
Photo conductor OPC (Diameter: 30mm)Recording Electronic photo (Laser)Development Dry-type dual-component magnetic
brush developmentCharging Charged saw-tooth methodTransfer Transfer rollerSeparation Separation claw methodCleaning Counter bladeFusing Heat rollerWaste toner disposal Toner cartridge collectionToner supply during operation N/AOuter color Pastel white (Natural wave pattern)
Paper size 26cpm machine
31cpm machine
35cpm machine
A3 15 17 2011" x 17" 14 17 198K 16 19 21B4, 8.5" x 13" 16 20 22 8.5" x 14" 16 20 22A4, B5, 8.5" x 11", 5.5" x 8.5", 16K, A5 (B5 cannot be applied to the 2-stage paper feed tray.)
26 31 35
A4R, 16KR, 8.5" x 11"R, 18 24 27B5R 21 24 30
Paper size 26cpm machine
31cpm machine
35cpm machine
A3 14 17 1811" x 17" 14 16 178K 15 18 19B4 16 19 208.5" x 13" 17 20 228.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 13.4" 16 19 218.5" x 14" 16 19 20A4, B5, 8.5" x 11", 5.5" x 8.5", 16K, A5 23 27 29A4R, 8.5" x 11"R, 19 22 24B5R 21 24 26A6R 23 27 29Extra 14 16 17Custom 14 16 17
A3 Wide N/A 16K 187 x 262mmA3 289 x 412mm 12 x 18 N/AB4 242 x 356mm 11" x 17" 271 x 424mmA4 202 x 289mm 8.5" x 14" 208 x 348mmB5 168 x 249mm 8.5" x 13" 208 x 322mmA5 140 x 202mm Executive 183 x 259mmA6R 92 x 140mm 8.5" x 11" 208 x 271mm8K 262 x 382mm 5.5" x 8.5" 132 x 208mm8.5" x 13.5" 212 x 336mm 8.5" x 13.4" 212 x 333mmCustom Min.: 96mm x 141mm; Max.: 297mm x 432mm
Max. range AB system: 416 x 293mm (When the resolution is 600dpi: 9826dot x 6920dot)
Inch system: 428 x 275mm (When the resolution is 600dpi: 10110dot x 6496dot)
Void Area / Image Loss
Top: 4mm or lessBottom: 4mm or less FR total: 6mm or less
Resolution*1 Copy Writing600 x 600dpi
Print Writing600 x 600dpi1,200 x 600dpi (PCL/PS)
Gradation *2 (256 levels)
Copy Writing600 x 600dpi x 1bit
Print WritingSharp Advanced Printing Language:
600 x 600dpi x 1bitPCL:
600 x 600dpi x 1bit1,200 x 600dpi x 1bit
PS:600 x 600dpi x 1bit1,200 x 600dpi x 1bit
Scanning Resolution (dpi)
MonochromePlaten 600 x 600dpi
600 x 400dpi600 x 300dpi (default)
RSPF 600 x 600dpi600 x 400dpi (default)
Exposure lamp White LEDReading gradation 10bitOutput gradation BW: 1bit
Grayscale: 8bit Full Color: each color RGB 8bit
Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed)Scanning area 297 x 432mmOriginal standard position
Left rear reference
Detection YesDetection size Automatic detection (Detection types can be
changed in the system settings)Dehumidifying heater (Scanner section)
Supplied as a service parts
Type RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder)Scan speed Monochrome
(A4/8.5" x 11")Color (A4/8.5" x 11")
Copy Single: 50-sheet/min. (600 x 400dpi, 4bit) 36-sheet/min. (600 x 600dpi, 4bit) Double: 20-page/min. (600 x 400dpi, 4bit) 17-page/min. (600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
NA
FAX Single: 50-sheet/min. (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) Double: 20-page/min. (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
NA
Internet FAX Single: 50-sheet/min. (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) Double: 20-page/min. (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
NA
MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 2
G. Paper feed section(1) Basic specifications
(2) Extra paper capacity
Scanner Single: 50-sheet/min. (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) Double: 20-page/min. (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Single: 50-sheet/min. (200 x 200dpi, 8bit) Double: 20-page/min. (200 x 200dpi, 8bit)
Original setup direction
Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard)
Original standard position
Center standard (Rear one-side standard for random feeding)
Original transport method
Sheet-through method
Original size Standard sizeInch-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4Inch-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4Inch-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11",
8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4AB-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5AB-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5AB-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KRAB-4: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5AB-5: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5Long paper
1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)Internet Fax 600 x 600 dpi: Max. 800 mm.When scan 400 dpi or more, long paper is not available.
Mix paper feed (Same series, same width paper)
Enabled
Random feeding (feeding of different types / different widths)
Enabled Only the following combinations of 2 size types are allowed: A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5; B5 and A5; and 11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS available. 2-sided scanning is disabled during random feeding.
Original copy weight
Single: Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2)Plain paper: 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)* Thin paper mode (39 pages/minute
(A4, 8.5" x 11", 600 x 400dpi) / 26 pages/minute (A4, 8.5" x 11", 600 x 600dpi) is set up for the thin paper.
Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 105 g/m2)Max. loading capacity of documents
Max. 100 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max. height: 1/2 inch, 13mm or less
Un-acceptable originals for feeding.
Transparency, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or breakage, pasted paper, cutout document, document printed with ink ribbon, documents with perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated document by punch unit is allowed.)
Detection YesPaper detection size
Auto detectionInch-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4Inch-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4Inch-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11",
8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4AB-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5AB-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5AB-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KRAB-4: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5AB-5: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5Paper feeding direction
Right hand feeding
Finish stamp Option
Reliability MCBJ/MCBF: Same as the main unitLife Same as the main unitPower Source Provided from the main unitDimensions W 580 x D 465 x H 155 mm, W 22-54/64 x D 18-20/
64 x H 6-7/64 in.Weight Approx. 7.3kg, Approx. 16.1 lbsOuter color Warm gray/ Pastel white (2 toned color)Optional detection Auto detection supportedInstallation / Maintenance
Should be installed by the service technician easily
Packaged items Glass cleaner (must be storable in the RSPF)
Type Standard 2-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed tray
Full option 4-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed tray
Dehumidifying heater
N/A
Tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Multi Bypass Tray
Paper capacity
Standard paper (80g/m2)
500 sheets 500 sheets 100 sheets
Paper size Refer to “Size of paper which can be fed”.Paper size detection No
(Guide adjustment and size input)Yes
Paper type setting Refer to “Size of paper which can be fed”.Changing of paper size
Switched by the user Switched by the user (Guide
adjustment)Universal handle Yes ---Default paper size setting
Inch system
8.5" x 11" ---
AB system
A4 ---
Detection of remaining paper
N/A (Only paper availability is detected)
Paper size display window
Yes ---
Paper type Paper feed tray Manual feed trayEnvelope NA AB system: 10 sheets
Inch system: 5 sheetsTransparency NA 40 sheetsHeavy paper NA 30 sheets (Max. 200g/m2)Tab paper NA 30 sheets (Target)Others NA 1 sheet
MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 3
(3) Size of paper which can be fed
*1: Supported envelop types:Monarch/Com-10/DL/C5/Custom* Custom envelope size is configurable by Sim setting (default: hidden)
*2: Custom size
Long size paper from the bypass tray: max. 1,200mm is configurable by Sim.*3: Supported label paper: SF-4A3F*4: Supported tab paper:
A4 tab width: 12 - 20mm8.5" x 11" tab width: 6.1 - 17mm
*5: Need to set from Sim
Paper Feeding SectionBypass
TrayStandard Tray Optional TrayTray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4
Paper Size 12 x 18 (A3W) — — — — —11" x 17" Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes8.5" x 14" (216 x 356) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes8.5" x 13.5" (216 x 343) Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5
8.5" x 13.4" (216 x 340) Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5
8.5" x 13" (216 x 330) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes8.5" x 11" Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes8.5" x 11"R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes7.25 x 10.5R — — — — Yes5.5" x 8.5" Yes — — — Yes5.5" x 8.5"R — — — — YesA3 Yes Yes Yes Yes YesB4 Yes Yes Yes Yes YesA4 Yes Yes Yes Yes YesA4R Yes Yes Yes Yes YesB5 Yes — Yes Yes YesB5R Yes Yes Yes Yes YesA5R — — — — YesA5 Yes — — — YesB6R — — — — Yes8K Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes16K Yes — Yes Yes Yes16KR Yes Yes Yes Yes YesA6R — — — — YesEnvelope*1 — — — — YesCustom*2 — — — — Yes
Paper Type Thin paper 13 - 16 lb bond (56 - 59g/m2) Yes Yes Yes Yes YesPlain paper 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes Yes YesColor paper Yes Yes Yes Yes YesLetter head Yes Yes Yes Yes YesPre-printed Yes Yes Yes Yes YesPre-punched Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 200g/m2) — — — — Yes110 lb index - 140 lb index (201 - 256g/m2) — — — — —
Envelope 75-90g/m2 — — — — YesTransparency — — — — YesLabel*3 — — — — YesTab paper*4 — — — — YesUser settings 1-7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
AB system (mm) Inch system (inch)Min. Max. Min. Max.
Bypass tray X 140 432 5-1/2 17Y 100 297 5-1/2 11-5/8
MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 4
H. Paper exit section(1) Exit Capacity
(2) Shifter
(3) Size of paper which can be discharged
Output Location Center Job Separator Right Side (Option)Output Method Face downOutput Capacity 500 sheets (80g/m2) Upper tray: 100 sheets (80g/m2)
Lower tray: 500 sheets (80g/m2)100 sheets (80g/m2)
Output paper size / weight Refer to “Size of paper which can be discharged”.Shifting function Yes NoOutput paper detection Yes NoExit tray full detection No Yes
Type ShifterPaper size Non-offset (Normal output) Refer to “Size of paper which can be discharged”.
Offset mode Refer to “Size of paper which can be discharged”.Paper weight All usable paperProductivity* When A4/8.5" x 11" is used
Non-offset (Normal output) Same speed as the main unit (no speed loss)Offset mode Same speed as the main unit (no speed loss)
Offset range 30mmRange of error* When the recommended paper of
A4/8.5" x 11" is used
Horizontal direction Vertical direction Between jobsNon-offset Not drop from the tray — —Offset mode Within 50 mm Within 10mm 10mm or more
Duplex
Output SectionCenter Tray
Right Exit TrayExit Tray Job
Separator Offset
Paper Size 12 x 18 (A3W) — — — — —11" x 17" Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes8.5" x 14" (216 x 356) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes8.5" x 13.5" (216 x 343) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes8.5" x 13.4" (216 x 340) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes8.5" x 13" (216 x 330) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes8.5" x 11" Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes8.5" x 11"R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes7.25 x 10.5R — Yes Yes Yes —5.5" x 8.5" — Yes Yes Yes —5.5" x 8.5"R — — — — —A3 Yes Yes Yes Yes YesB4 Yes Yes Yes Yes YesA4 Yes Yes Yes Yes YesA4R Yes Yes Yes Yes YesB5 Yes Yes Yes Yes YesB5R Yes Yes Yes Yes YesA5R — Yes — Yes —A5 Yes Yes Yes Yes —B6R — Yes — — —8K Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes16K Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes16KR Yes Yes Yes Yes YesA6R — Yes Yes Yes —Envelope*1 — Yes Yes — —Extra — Yes Yes — —Custom*2 Yes Yes Yes — Yes
MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 5
*1: Supported Envelop types:Monarch/Com-10/DL /C5/CustomCustom envelope size is supported by Sim. Not displayed at the default setting.
*2: Custom size
Long size paper (bypass tray only): support up to 1,200mm by Sim* Long size paper ejection is from center tray/inner finisher
*3: Comply to “Paper type setting”*4: Can be input but array is not supported*5: Can be input and stapled but array is not supported*6: Array of heavy paper more than 130g/m2 is not supported*7: Heavy paper can be stapled only in case of using as front and back cover page with other normal paper
Paper Type Thin paper 13-16 lb bond (55 - 59g/m2) — Yes Yes Yes YesPlain paper 16-28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes Yes YesColor paper Yes Yes Yes Yes YesLetter head Yes Yes Yes Yes YesPre-printed Yes Yes Yes Yes YesPre-punched Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 200g/m2)
— Yes Yes Yes —
110 lb index -140 lb index (201 - 256g/m2)
— — — — —
Envelope 75 - 90g/m2 — Yes Yes — —Transparency — Yes Yes — —Label — Yes Yes — —Tab paper — Yes Yes — —User settings 1 - 7 Yes*3 Yes Yes Yes Yes
AB System (mm) Inch System (inch)Min. Max. Min. Max.
Bypass tray X 140 432 5-1/2 17Y 100 297 5-1/2 11-5/8
Duplex X 182 432 8-1/2 17Y 182 297 7-1/4 11-5/8
Duplex
Output SectionCenter Tray
Right Exit TrayExit Tray Job
Separator Offset
MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 6
I. Operation panel
J. Controller board
*1: The USB port can be disabled by Sim
K. Memory/Hard disk/SD card memory
*1: Memory expansion is not available*2: HDD capacity depends on the procurement and sourcing status
When an option HDD is installed, the SD card of 4GB isrequired.
L. Warm-up time
* Result may change depending on conditions.*1: Conditions: Leave the machine for 60 sec. after door open,
standard condition, Polygon stops.
2. Copy functionsA. First copy time
* Measuring ConditionsFeed the A4 (8-1/2 x 11) sheet in landscape from tray 1, with thepolygon rotating condition.Value might vary depends on the machine settings/conditions
B. Job Speed
* Defines the copy speed of when the main unit and a documentfeeder are used in combination.
* S to S: copying 1 set of an 11-sheet original in A4 / 8.5" x 11" (not including the first copy)Monochrome: 600 x 400dpi (default)
C. Job EffectivenessBLI Standard (RSPF)
* S to S: 10 pages of A4 / 8.5" x 11" document and 5 copies* S to D: 10 pages of A4 / 8.5" x 11" document and 5 copies* D to D: 10 pages (20 sides) of A4 / 8.5" x 11" document and
5 copies
Size 7 inchForm Dot matrix LCD, Touch panelDisplay dot number 800 x 480 dots (WVGA)Color YesLCD drive display area (W x D) 152.4 x 91.44LCD backlight LED backlightLCD contrast adjust YesAngle/position adjustment No tilting mechanism
CPU ARM11: 600MHzARM9: 400MHz/during 1W energy save mode: 75MHz
InterfaceIEEE1284 Parallel
No
Ethernet 1portInterface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T Support Protocol
TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, EtherTalk
USB 2.0 (high speed) (host)*1
2port (Simultaneous use of the front/rear ports is enable.)
USB 2.0 (high speed) (device)
1port
USB-HUB (host) Internal: 4port• For Front USB Port• For Rear USB Port• Reserved• For the retractable keyboard
USB certification NoACRE expansion I/F
No
Ir-Simple I/F NoVideo I/F NoSerial I/F (For coin-operated machines/PCI)
1port (The port is on the electric board. D-Sub cable is provided as a service part.)
Memory See the section “Memory/Hard disk/SD card memory”.Windows Premium Logo certification
No
WHQL certification
Yes
SD cardICU (Reus) PWB
HDD*2Memory*1
8GB 2GB OPT (160GB)
Memory area (SD card)
Boot/Program areaFAX data storage area
Without HDD With HDD512MB 1GB
Warm-up time 20sec. or lessPre heat YesJam recovery time*1 10sec. or less
Engine 26cpm machine
31cpm machine
35cpm machine
Platen 4.7 sec. 4.3 sec. 4.0 sec.RSPF 7.5 sec. 6.9 sec. 6.5 sec.
Engine 26cpm machine
31cpm machine
35cpm machine
S to S 26cpm (100%) 31cpm (100%) 35cpm (100%)
Engine 26cpm machine
31cpm machine
35cpm machine
S to S 25cpm (96.2%) 28cpm (90.3%) 33cpm (94.3%)S to D 21cpm (80.8%) 23cpm (74.2%) 24cpm (68.6%)D to D 20cpm (76.9%) 22cpm (71.0%) 23cpm (65.7%)
MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 7
3. Printer functionA. Printer driver supported OS
B. PDL emulation/Font
4. FAX functionA. Transmission method
B. Number of Support Line
C. Transmission Mode
D. Image Quality/Image Process
E. Record Size
* If the document length exceeds A3 size, it is divided and printed. * For printing the list, A5R and 8.5" x 5.5"R cannot be used.
OSCustom
PCL6 SPDL2
Custom PCL5e Custom PS PPD
Sharp Advanced Printing
Language
PC-FAX TWAIN
Windows 98 / Me No No No No No No NoNT 4.0 SP5 or later No No No No No No No2000 No No No No No No NoXP CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROMXP x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROMServer 2003 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROMServer 2003 x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROMVista CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROMVista x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROMServer 2008 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROMServer 2008 x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROMWindows 7 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROMWindows 7 x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Mac 9.0-9.2.2 No No No No No No NoX 10.2.8 No No No No No No NoX 10.3.9 No No No No No No NoX 10.4.11 No No No CD-ROM No No NoX 10.5 - 10.5.8 No No No CD-ROM No Web NoX 10.6 - 10.6.8 No No No CD-ROM No Web NoX 10.7 - 10.7.2 No No No CD-ROM No Web No
PDL (Command) Installed font Option fontPCL6 compatibility N model: STD
U model: OPT European outline font = 80 stylesLine printer font (BMP) = 1 style
Barcode font = 28 styles
Postscript3 compatibility OPT - European outline font = 136 styles
Transmission time Less than 3 sec (Super G3)Less than 7 sec (G3 ECM)
Compression/expansion system
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG (Fixed to ECM for MMR or JBIG.)
Modem speed 33.6kbps 2.4kbps automatic fallbackResolution 8 x 3.85 line/mm, 8 x 7.7 line/mm,
8.15.4 line/mm, 16 x 15.4 line/mm (Standard memory is used for transmit/receive.)
Intercommunication G3/Super G3: Standard (V.34, V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter)
Communication line General telephone line (PSTN), ISDN (When TA is installed.) Private Branch Exchange (PBX)
ECM Yes
Standard 1 lineExpansion Not provided
RSPF/OC transmission switching
Yes (Switching during the reading is not feasible)
Half tone reproduction Equivalent to 256 levels (Valid only when monochrome document is scanned.)
Exposure adjustment Auto / Manual (5 steps)FAX quality selection Standard (8 x 3.85 lines/mm (203.2 x 97.8dpi))
Fine (8 x 7.7 lines/mm (203.2 x 195.6dpi))Super Fine (8 x 15.4 lines/mm (203.2 x 391dpi))Ultra Fine (16 x 15.4 lines/mm (406.4 x 391dpi))Half-tone (Combination with normal character is invalid.)
Max. record width 293mmRecord size (AB series)
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R(Inch series)11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 8.5 x 5.5R
MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 8
F. Dial
* LDAP: Lightweight Directory Access protocol
G. Memory for Transmit/Receive
H. Function
Manual dialing To be entered by 10-key, # key, * keyRe-dialing The previous 8 items (max.) can be saved, and
one of them can be selected.One-touch call is available.
One-touch dialing 1000 items including the group dialing items Group dialing 1000 items including the one-touch dialing
itemsProgram dialing Max. 48 itemsChain dialing Max. 64 digits including one-touch dialing,
10-key dialing, and pause. Dial search Alphabet order search, User index groupsQuick search YesLDAP search YesSub address YesPassword YesMemory box registration Yes
FAX transmission data HDDFAX reception data SD card
Transmit function
Calling function YesRequires the frequency setting for each destination.
PBX function Germany, France onlyMemory transmit Yes (Definable destinations :
94 destinations)On-hook YesQuick online transmit YesDirect transmit YesManual transmit YesAuto re-call mode YesTime indication function YesSequential broadcasting function
Yes
F code interface broadcasting indication function
YesOnly one interface station can be specified.
F code interface broadcasting function
Yes
F code confidential send function
Yes
Polling YesEven with another company machine
Sequential polling function YesEven with another company machine
F-code polling YesBulletin board YesF code bulletin board function
Yes
Auto reduction transmit Yes A3 B4, A3 A4, B4 A4
Rotation transmit YesCounterclockwise rotation of 90 degrees
Duplex transmit YesDocument transmit from OC function
Yes
Long length original transmit Only when RSPF is used.Transmission is enable up to 1000mm.
Mixed documents function Only when RSPF is used.Zoom transmit Yes2 in 1 transmit YesCard shot transmit Only when transmitting from
OC
Transmit function
Thin paper scan function Available except for duplex scan
Edge erase transmit function YesOnly for the fixed sizes
Job build Yes999 sheets or memory full
Page division transmit YesCover NoIndex NoTransmit message adding function
No
Receive function
Auto receive YesManual receive Yes DRD call function Distinctive Ring Detection
North America: Standard, Pattern 1 – 5Australia/New Zealand/Hong Kong: ON/OFF (TEL/FAX)
Memory receive YesTransfer function Yes
Number of registration: 1 item
Specified receive function Yes (Number of registration)Rejection numbers: Max.50 items
Receive data print condition function
Yes
Receive data staple setting/Copy number setting
Yes
Rotation receive YesOutput by clockwise rotation of 90 degrees
Divided receive YesDivided print is not made in duplex mode.
Duplex receive YesF-code confidential receive Yes
Special function
Print hold YesDocument Admin YesInbound Routing YesSender registration function YesSender print function YesOn-hook dialing function YesRetransmit function YesPause function Yes
Pause time is 1 – 15 sec.Sound volume setting function
Yes
Tone pulse select function Tone, Pulse, Auto (North America/Taiwan)* For the other destinations,
set with the soft switch.External phone connection YesMemory remaining capacity check function
YesOnly the integral part is displayed.
Back up YesRegistered data read/write function
Yes
Report/List YesDestination check function YesBroadcasting destination display function
Yes
Transmit job change function YesSave-energy function YesLine monitor display function YesFAST Yes
Facsimile Automated Service Technology
Time adjust function YesSummer time ON/OFF
PC-FAX YesColor mode No
MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 9
5. Image send functionA. Mode
B. Image send function (Push send from the main unit)
(1) Support image
(2) Image processing
(3) Specification of Addresses
*1: Except for FTP, Desktop, SMB, USB memory, Broadcast.*2: When disabled, the address registration is not allowed either.
(4) Specification of Multiple Addresses
* Broadcast transmission is allowed. (Monochrome only)
(5) Transmission function
(6) Reception function
Special function
Sender registration function YesNumber of registration: 1 for standard sender name and address. And 18 sender names can be registered.
Default destination setting NoUnauthorized scan prevention function
Yes
Filing-each-page function NoRe-operation function YesUser account function Yes
Max. 200 items additionally to the default
Counter function Yes
FAX FAX to e-mail/FTP
Mode FAXCompression method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Mode FAXOriginal scanning color B/WHalftone reproduction Equivalent of 256 stepsDensity adjustment Auto + 5 steps
Selection of image quality Half tone (Black-white only) ON/OFFResolution (depends on file format/transmission method)
Standard character (203.2 x 97.8dpi)(half tone not allowed)Fine (203.2 x 195.6dpi)Super fine (203.2 x 391dpi)Ultra fine (406.4 x 391dpi)
Mode FAXAddress specification Specification by one-touch/group/
direct address entry. Entry from 10-key. (Fax) Selection from LDAP server
Number of One-touch address key registration
Total (number of key): Maximum 1000
Number of Group (1 key) address registtation
Number of Group (1 key) address registration : maximum 500 Number of Group key registration : 5000 (Total address number included in /1000 key)
Program 48Direct entry of addresses Entry by 10-key, # keyChain dial Yes (pause key)Resend Call up nearest 8 addresses. *1
Destination confirmation YesShortcut for address selection (quick key)
Use the 10-key to call up registered numbers of addresses.
Disable direct entry transmission *2 YesDisable PC- Fax sending Yes
Mode FAXBroadcast Yes (500 destinations) Request of serial transmission Yes
Mode FAXMemory transmission 94 destinations in allOn-hook YesQuick online transmission YesDirect transmission Yes
(Switching: Memory transmission Direct transmission)
Automatically-reduced transmission
Yes
Rotated transmission YesScaled transmission Yes
Enlargement/reduction is allowed only from a fixed size to another. Reduction may be done on the receiver side with Fax/Internet Fax sending.
Recall mode Error Yes Busy Yes
Number/time to be set up through system setup
Long original transmission YesMaximum of 1000mm (single side only/black-white 2 values only)
Confidential transmission (Sharp mode)
No
Relay broadcast transmission (Sharp mode)
No
Large capacity original mode YesScanning of thin paper YesMixed originals feeder Yes (Random + MIX)Default date sender transmission Yes (ON only)Preview NoSide erase Yes
Mode FAXAutomatic reception YesManual reception No
Switching from manual reception to automatic reception. (Allowed only for France and Japan)
Memory reception YesFixed size reduced reception YesSpecified size scaled reception NoRotated reception YesSetting of received data print condition
Equal size print (partition not allowed)Equal size print (partition allowed)Equal or reduced size print
2-sided reception Condition setting through system setting
2-in-1 reception NoAutomatic reduction setting upon receiving A3
Yes
Automatic reduction setting upon receiving letter
Yes (Other than North America and Inch destinations)
Reception from a specific number not allowed, or allowed. (Allow/Reject)
Specified numbers only (50 numbers /20 digits)
External phone connection remote
Yes
Confidential reception (Sharp mode)
No
Received data bypass output YesIndex printing NoTransfer function upon disabling of output.
Yes (1 receiver (of transfer) registration)
Internet Fax/Fax to e-mail (Transfer of Internet Fax/Fax reception data to e-mail, inbound routing)
Yes
MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 10
*1: This function saves all received data in memory and starts output after password entry. (Confidential reception is excluded.) Setting only on the reciver side.
(7) Report/list function
(8) Other Functions
*1: This function means that e-mail address setteing on F coderelay broadcast allowed.
(9) Transmission Method
(10) Record Size
(11) F code communication
(12) Registration-related settings
*1: Since scan/Internet Fax/Fax uses the common address book, the number of addresses allowed for registration is the sum total of all modes.
*2: Quick key is the function to select an address based on the registered number of each address within the book for address selection. Users should be able to select a quick key number.
Exit tray setting YesInsertion of job separator sheet NoStaple function of received data YesAuto wake up print YesReceived data print hold *1 YesColor toner print when black toner runs out.
No
Mode FAXImage sending activity report Yes
Time-specified output Output with memory full * Maximum of 200 times including
both transmission and receptionTransaction report YesAddress/phone number table YesGroup table YesProgram table YesMemory box table (F code) YesCommunication original contents print
Always print/Upon error/no print
List of allowed or rejected reception numbers
Yes
Table of control record for each account
No
Mode FAXTime specification YesPolling reception YesBulletin board transmission Yes
Up to 100 registrations allowed with bulletin board, confidential and relay broadcast all combined. (Free area : 1 registration)Setting of the number of transmission: 1/no limit.
Cover sheet function NoTransmission message NoSender print YesSender selection YesPage number print YesDate print Yes (Date can be expressed
alternatively)Polling protection function YesPage partition transmission YesPage connection NoConfidential (receiver unit) Yes (F code method) Relay broadcast instructions Yes (F code method) Fax to e-mail (F code) *1 YesEdge erase YesCenter erase Yes2 in 1 YesCard shot Yes (Equivalent or enlargement up to
the paper width. The maximum enlargement is not allowed to exceed 400%)
Forward data transmission/reception (Document Admin)
YesData transmission by PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax is allowed, too.
Mode FAX
Mode FAXTransmission time 2 seconds level (super G3/JBIG),
6 seconds level (G3 ECM)Modem speed Automatic fall-back : 33.6kbps 2.4kbps Intercommunication Super G3/G3 Communication line General membership telephone line
(PSTN), independent business line (PBX), F net.(R-key for PBX setting: Germany/France)
ECM Yes
Mode FAXMaximum record width 293mmRecord size A3 – A5/11" x 17" – 5.5" x 8.5"
Mode FAXSub-address Yes (20 digits)Password Yes (20 digits)
Mode FAXOne-touch/group *1E-mailFTPDesktopSMBFAX
1000 destinations Use of LDAP allowed Up to 500 registered addresses for each group dial.Registered name in 18 full-size character (36 half-size characters)One-touch dial receiver number registration: within 64 digits for receiver number + sub-address + passcode (including "/").
Program Registration of addresses (groups), settings (density, image quality) and special functions in one set is allowed. (48 of them)
Number of memory boxes Registration of bulletin board/confidential/relay broadcast is allowed up to 100.Registration name: 18 characters
Number of sender registration 1 (default) with 20 charactersNumber of sender selection registration
Total: 18 registrations (20 characters) (Sender selection: In addition to default, 18 registrations allowed)
Registration of polling approval number
10 numbers/20 digits
Registration of Fax system number (Sharp mode)
No
Registration of Fax polling approval ID number (Sharp mode)
No
Fax relay ID registration (Sharp mode)
No
Quick key (short cut registration) *2 Yes (001 – 1000)Import/export of address book Yes (By storage backup) Black list (for France) No
MX-M264U SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 11
(13) Telephone functions
(14) Sound settings
(15) Others
6. Power consumptionThe full configuration can be operated with the rated power source.
*1: At power-on timing (with condition of dehumidify heater turned OFF)
7. Dimensions and weightMode FAX
On-hook function YesHold NoSetting of pause time Yes (1 – 15 seconds) Telephone transmission during power outage
No (External telephone transmission allowed)
Tone pulse switching Tone, Pulse, Auto (North America/Taiwan)* For the other destinations, set with
the soft switch.
Mode Item FAXOn-hook sound Sound volume setting 1 - 9Sound volume for calling Sound volume setting 1 - 9, NoLine monitor sound Sound volume setting 1 - 9, NoReception sound Sound volume setting 1 - 9, NoTransmission success sound Sound volume setting 1 - 9, NoTransmission and reception error sound
Sound volume setting 1 - 9, No
Sound setting for end of original reading (image send)
Sound volume setting Large/middle/small/no sound
Mode FAXPC-FAX YesFAST Yes (SEC only)Network FAST NoDistinctive ring detection Setting for each destination
Maximum rated power Consumption*1
100 V 200 V1.44 kW 1.84 kW
Energy consumption rate
Not applicable
TEC value (Measured result)
26cpm machine: 1.8 kWh
31cpm machine:2.3 kWh
35cpm machine:2.4 kWh
26cpm machine:1.84 kWh
31cpm machine:2.25 kWh
35cpm machine:2.35 kWh
TEC value (Standard) Tier2
26cpm machine:3.10 kWh (0.1 kwh x 26 + 0.5 kwh)
31cpm machine:4.85 kWh (0.35 kWh x 31 - 6.0 kWh)
35cpm machine:6.25 kWh (0.35 kWh x 35 - 6.0 kWh)
Power consumption is 1W in standby for NW* Condition of
Standing by Network: Connected with TCP/IP protocol only
Yes(Exclude the case of use Fax and Network at once)
–
Moving time to pre-heat mode
1 minutes (default)
Recovery time from pre-heat mode
10 sec.
Moving time to sleep mode
1 minutes (default) 11 minutes (Europe)* Printer mode: 10sec. (default)
Recovery time from sleep mode
20 sec.
Outer dimension (Included operation panel)
W625 x D645 x H652 mmWhen the OC is installed:
W625 x D645 x H686 mmWhen the RSPF is installed:
W625 x D645 x H799 mmFootprint W625 x D645 mmDimension occupied by the machine
W902 x D645 mm(when the bypass tray is extended)
WeightMain Unit (including photoreceptor / not including consumables)
When the RSPF is installed: 51.6 kg (100V type)52.1 kg (200V type)
When the OC is installed: 46.5 kgWhen the RSPF/OC is not installed: 44.9 kg
– 1
MX-M264U[3]CONSUMABLE PARTS1. Supply system tableA. North America, Middle America, South America
B. Brazil
C. Europe/ East Europe/ Russia / Australia/ New Zealand/ Korea
D. Asia affiliates
E. Hong Kong
F. Middle East/Africa/ Israel/ Philippines/ Taiwan/ Agent
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks1 Toner cartridge (black) Toner cartridge x 1 25K MX-312NT Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document2 Developer (black) Developer x 1 26cpm: 75K
31/35cpm: 100KMX-312NV
3 Drum Drum x 1 26cpm: 75K31/35cpm: 100K
MX-312NR
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks1 Toner cartridge (black) Toner cartridge x 1 25K MX-312BT Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document2 Developer (black) Developer x 1 26cpm: 75K
31/35cpm: 100KMX-312NV
3 Drum Drum x 1 26cpm: 75K31/35cpm: 100K
MX-312NR
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks1 Toner cartridge (black) Toner cartridge x 1 25K MX-312GT Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document2 Developer (black) Developer x 1 26cpm: 75K
31/35cpm: 100KMX-312GV
3 Drum Drum x 1 26cpm: 75K31/35cpm: 100K
MX-312GR
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks1 Toner cartridge (black) Toner cartridge x 1 25K MX-312AT Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document2 Developer (black) Developer x 1 26cpm: 75K
31/35cpm: 100KMX-312AV
3 Drum Drum x 1 26cpm: 75K31/35cpm: 100K
MX-312AR
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks1 Toner cartridge (black) Toner cartridge x 1 25K MX-312AT Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document2 Developer (black) Developer x 1 26cpm: 75K
31/35cpm: 100KMX-312AV
3 Drum Drum x 1 26cpm: 75K31/35cpm: 100K
MX-312AR
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks1 Toner cartridge (black) Toner cartridge x 1 25K MX-312FT Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document2 Developer (black) Developer x 1 26cpm: 75K
31/35cpm: 100KMX-312FV
3 Drum Drum x 1 26cpm: 75K31/35cpm: 100K
MX-312FR
1
– 2
2. Maintenance parts listA. North America, Middle America, South America
* The other maintenance parts than the above are supplied as service parts.
B. SEGA/ SUK/ SCA/ SCNZ/ SEA/ SEES/ SEZ/ SEIS/ SEB/ SEN/ SEF/ SMEF/ Russia/ Korea/ Special country
* The other maintenance parts than the above are supplied as service parts.
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks1 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller x 1 150K AR-310UH
Fuser gear x 1Upper heat roller bearing x 2Upper cleaning pad x 1Fusing separation pawl (upper) x 4Thermistor cleaning pad x 2
2 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller x 1 300K MX-311LHFusing separation pawl (lower) x 4Fuser bearing (lower) x 2
3 150K maintenance kit Drum separation pawl unit x 2 150K MX-311KATransfer roller unit x 1DV blabe x 1DV side sheet F x 1DV side sheet R x 1Toner filter unit x 1
4 MC unit MC unit x 10 26cpm: 75K (x 10)31/35cpm: 100K (x 10)
MX-311MC
5 Cleaner blade Cleaner blade x 10 26cpm: 75K (x 10)31/35cpm: 100K (x 10)
MX-311CB
6 Drum frame unit Drum frame unit x 1 26cpm: 225K31/35cpm: 300K
MX-311DU * The life of the toner reception seat attached to the drum frame is 300K, and it can be used up to 3 times. (Supplied as a drum frame unit.)
7 Transfer roller unit Transfer roller unit x 1 150K MX-311TX8 Paper feed roller kit Paper feed roller kit x 1 100K MX-311RT9 Fusing unit Fusing unit (120V heater lamp) x 1 150K MX-311FU10 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x 3 5000 staples x 3 MX-SCX1
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks1 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller x 1 150K AR-310UH
Fuser gear x 1Upper heat roller bearing x 2Upper cleaning pad x 1Fusing separation pawl (upper) x 4Thermistor cleaning pad x 2
2 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller x 1 300K MX-311LHFusing separation pawl (lower) x 4Fuser bearing (lower) x 2
3 150K PM kit Drum separation pawl unit x 2 150K MX-311KATransfer roller unit x 1DV blade x 1DV side sheet F x 1DV side sheet R x 1Toner filter unit x 1
4 MC unit MC unit x 10 26cpm: 75K (x 10)31/35cpm: 100K (x 10)
MX-311MC
5 Cleaner blade Cleaner blade x 10 26cpm: 75K (x 10)31/35cpm: 100K (x 10)
MX-311CB
6 Drum frame unit Drum frame unit x 1 26cpm: 225K31/35cpm: 300K
MX-311DU * The life of the toner reception seat attached to the drum frame is 300K, and it can be used up to 3 times. (Supplied as a drum frame unit.)
7 Transfer roller unit Transfer roller unit x 1 150K MX-311TX8 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x 3 5000 staples x 3 MX-SCX1
1
– 3
C. STCL/ SRH/ SRS/ SRSSC/ SBI/ Agent
* The other maintenance parts than the above are supplied as service parts.
3. Developer/Drum life end definition• When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified level.• When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified level.When either of the above reached the specified level, it is judged as life end.
In an actual case, when correction or warm-up operation is performed as well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates.Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm reaches the specified level, it is judged as life end.To check the drum and developer life, use SIM22-1/SIM22-13.
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks1 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller x 1 150K AR-310UH
Fuser gear x 1Upper heat roller bearing x 2Upper cleaning pad x 1Fusing separation pawl (upper) x 4Thermistor cleaning pad x 2
2 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller x 1 300K MX-311LHFusing separation pawl (lower) x 4Fuser bearing (lower) x 2
3 150K PM kit Drum separation pawl unit x 2 150K MX-311KATransfer roller unit x 1DV blade x 1DV side sheet F x 1DV side sheet R x 1Toner filter unit x 1
4 MC unit MC unit x 10 26cpm: 75K (x 10)31/35cpm: 100K (x 10)
MX-311MC
5 Cleaner blade Cleaner blade x 10 26cpm: 75K (x 10)31/35cpm: 100K (x 10)
MX-311CB
6 Drum frame unit Drum frame unit x 1 26cpm: 225K31/35cpm: 300K
MX-311DU * The life of the toner reception seat attached to the drum frame is 300K, and it can be used up to 3 times. (Supplied as a drum frame unit.)
7 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x 3 5000 staples x 3 MX-SCX1
Developer/drum counter Number of rotations (Rotations)
Developer/drum 26cpm model 31/35cpm model 550K75K 100K
– 4
4. Production number identification<Toner cartridge>The label on the toner cartridge shows the date of production.
<Developer>
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as fol-lows.The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of the developer bag.
<Drum>The laser print indicates the model conformity code and the date (year, month, day) of production.
5. Environmental conditions
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 AlphabetIndicates the production factory.
2 NumberIndicates the production year.
3, 4 NumberIndicates the production month.
5, 6 NumberIndicates the production day.
7 Hyphen8 Number
Indicates the production lot.
Label position
Internal product nameIncompatibility
Destination
Version No.
Production year/month/day (6 digits)
Serial No. in production day (5 digits)
Production place (1 digits)
1 2 3 4 5
1 AlphabetIndicates the model conformity code. L for this model.
2 NumberIndicates the end digit of the production year.
3 Number or X, Y, ZIndicates the month of packing.X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
4, 5 NumberIndicates the day of the month of packing.
Standard environmental conditions
Temperature 20 - 25 CHumidity 65 5%RH
Usage environmental conditions
Temperature 10 - 35 CHumidity 20 - 85%RHAtmospheric pressure
590 - 1013 hPa (height: 0 - 2000m)
Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the manufactured month (Production lot) under unsealed state Drum: 36 months from the manufactured month under unsealed state
(Humidity)
85%
60%
20%
10 C 30 C 35 C
(Temperature)
MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 1
MX-M264U[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. External view
*1: Peripheral device.
No. Name Function/Operation1 Job separator tray (Upper tray) (optional) Print jobs and received faxes are delivered to this tray.2 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically
scanned.3 Front cover Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" or to replace a toner cartridge.4 Output tray (center tray) Output is delivered to this tray.5 Operation panel This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.6 Exit tray unit (right tray)*1 When installed, output can be delivered to this tray.7 Finisher*1 This can be used to staple output.8 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
9 Keyboard*1 The keyboard is integrated into the main unit.If not using the keyboard, it can be retracted into the bottom of the operation panel.
10 Main power switch This is used to power on the machine.When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in the "on" position.
11 Tray 1 This holds paper.12 Tray 2 This holds paper.13 Tray 3 (when a paper drawer is installed)*1 This holds paper.14 Tray 4 (when a paper drawer is installed)*1 This holds paper.
21 3 4 6
7
5
When a finisher is installed
When a output tray unit is installed
9
10
When a keyboard is installed
1211 13 14
8
MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 2
2. Internal structure
No. Name Function/Operation1 Toner cartridge This holds toner for printing. The toner cartridge must be replaced when indicated on the operation panel.2 Upper cover of machine Open this cover to remove jam paper when a paper jam occurs in the output of the job separator or the optional
finisher.3 Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.4 Right side cover Open this cover to remove a misfeed.5 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover.6 Photoconductive drum This drum has a photoconductive coating on its surface.
The images are formed on top of this photoconductive surface. (The photoconductive coating is green in color.)
7 Right cover of paper drawer (when a paper drawer is installed)
Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 3 or tray 4.
8 Paper tray right side cover Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 2.9 Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually.
When loading a large sheet of paper, be sure to pull out the bypass tray extension.
1 2 3
8 976
54
MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 3
3. Automatic document feeder and document glass
No. Name Function/Operation1 Paper feed roller This roller rotates to automatically feed the original.2 Document feeding area cover Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean the paper feed roller.3 Original guides These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly.
Adjust the guides to the width of the original.4 Document feeder tray Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.5 Original exit tray Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.6 Scanning area Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.7 Original size detector This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.8 Document glass Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.
2
8
3 4 5 6 71
MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 4
4. I/F connectors
No. Name Function/Operation1 Connector for the finisher only Connects the finisher.2 Service-only connector This connector is for use only by service technicians.
Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the machine to malfunction.Important note for service technicians:The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 118" (3 m) in length.
3 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network.For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
4 USB connector (B type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer.For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
5 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
6 Power plug7 Extension phone jack When the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be connected to this jack.8 Telephone line jack When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to this jack.
When a fax expansion kit is installed
6
78
2
1
34
5
MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 5
5. Operation panel
No. Name Function/Operation1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display.
Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations.When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you perform an operation.
2 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings are used to configure paper tray settings, store addresses for transmission operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use.
3 [JOB STATUS] key Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and to cancel jobs.For details, see the chapters for each of the functions in this manual.
4 PRINT mode indicators • READY indicator: Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.• DATA indicator: This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place.
5 Numeric keys These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical values. These keys are also used to enter numeric value settings (except for the system settings).
6 [CLEAR] key ( ) Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".7 [HOME] key Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to
enable quick and easy operation of the machine.8 IMAGE SEND mode indicators • LINE indicator: This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during
transmission of an image in scan mode.• DATA indicator: This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such
as out of paper.This lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent.
9 Stylus pen This can be used to touch a key displayed on the touch panel.10 [STOP] key ( ) Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original.11 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.12 [POWER] key ( ) Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.13 [LOGOUT] key ( ) Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When using the fax function, this key
can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line.14 [#/P] key ( ) When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using the fax function, this key can be
used when dialing.15 [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) Press this key to return to the initial operation state.
Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have been selected and start operation from the initial state.
16 [START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode.17 [POWER SAVE] key ( ) / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key ( ) blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
LOGOUTHOME
IMAGE SEND
JOB STATUS PRINTREADYDATA
DATALINE
SYSTEMSETTINGS
54 6321
8
9
7
15 16 17
13
14
10 11 12
MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 6
6. RSPFA. Sensors and detectors
B. Motors, clutches, solenoids and PWB
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation NoteSCOV RSPF cover open/close detector Micro switch Detects open/close of the RSPF cover. SOCD RSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the RSPF unit. SPED Document sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the RSPF paper feed tray.SPLS1 Paper size detector 1 Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.SPLS2 Paper size detector 2 Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.SPPD1 Document transport sensor 1 Transmission type Detects paper feed and the document size in random
paper feed.SPPD2 Document transport sensor 2 Transmission type Detects paper pass.SPPD3 Document transport sensor 3 Transmission type Detects paper pass.SPPD4 Document transport sensor 4 Transmission type Detects paper exit and switchback.SPWS Document size detector Volume-type resistor Detects the document width.
Signal name Name Type Function/OperationSPFM RSPF transport motor Stepping motor Transports a document.SPM/SPUM RSPF paper feed motor Stepping motor Feeds a document.SPRS Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid
(RSPF)Magnetic solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the paper exit roller. (Releases the
paper exit roller pressure when reversing paper.)SRRC Registration roller clutch (RSPF) Magnetic clutch Controls the registration roller. (Controls the timing of document transport.)STMPS Stamp solenoid Magnetic solenoid Drives the finish stamp.
No. Name Function/Operation1 RSPF driver PWB Drives the motor, the solenoid, and the clutch in the RSPF section.
SPED
SPWSSOCD
SCOVSPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3 SPPD4
SPLS1SPLS2
1
STMPS
SPRS
SPFMSRRC
SPM (SPUM)
MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 7
C. Rollers
No. Name Function/Operation1 Document pickup roller (RSPF) Feeds a document to the paper feed roller.2 Paper feed roller (RSPF) Feeds a document to the transport section. Makes a buckle on paper between the registration roller and this
roller to correct the start position of document skew and document image scan.3 Separation roller (RSPF) Separates a document to prevent double-feeding.4 Transport auxiliary roller (RSPF) Reduces friction between a document and the paper guide to transport the document smoothly to the
registration roller.5 Registration roller (Drive) (RSPF) Transports a document to the transport roller 2. / Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts
the document scanning timing.6 Registration roller (Idle) RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to the document.7 Transport roller 2 (Idle) (RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller
to the document.8 Transport roller 2 (Drive) (RSPF) Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning section.9 Transport roller 3 (Idle) (RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller
to the document.10 Transport roller 3 (Drive) (RSPF) Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit roller.11 Paper exit roller (Idle) (RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller
to the document.12 Paper exit roller (Drive) (RSPF) Discharges a document. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller when scanning
the back surface.
6
7 8
5
10 9 1211
34 2 1
MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 8
7. Sensor
8. Switch
No. Name Code Function and operation1 Scanner home
position sensorMHPS Detects the scanner home
position. 2 Paper size detection
trigger sensorOCSW Detects generation of the paper
size detection trigger signal.3 2nd paper exit
sensor (Option)POD2 2nd paper exit detection
4 2nd paper exit full detection sensor (Option)
TFD2 2nd paper exit section full detection
5 1st paper exit sensor POD1 1st paper exit detection6 Shifter home position
sensorSHPOS Shifter home position sensor
detection7 Paper exit sensor
(DUP side)POSD Paper exit detection
8 Thermistor TH_UM/TH_US
Fusing temperature detection
9 1st tray (paper tray) detection
C1SS 1st tray (paper tray) empty detection
10 Manual feed paper entry sensor
PPD1 Sensor of paper entry from the manual paper feed tray, the 2nd/multi-tray desk, or the DUP
11 Manual paper feed tray empty sensor 2
MTOP2 Manual feed tray position detection
12 Manual paper feed tray empty sensor 1
MTOP1 Manual feed tray position detection
13 Manual feed length detection sensor 1
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detection
14 Manual feed length detection sensor 2
MPLD2 Manual feed paper length detection
15 Manual feed paper empty sensor
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection
16 2nd tray paper pass sensor
C2PFD 2nd tray paper pass
17 2nd tray paper upper limit detection sensor
C2LUD 2nd tray paper upper limit detection
18 2nd tray paper empty sensor
C2PED 2nd tray paper empty detection
19 1st tray paper pass sensor
C1PFD 1st tray paper pass
20 1st tray paper upper limit detection sensor
C1LUD 1st tray paper upper limit detection
5
6
7
9
1112
13141524 2616
1718
1920
2122
2310
8
27
25
1
23
4
21 1st tray paper empty sensor
C1PED 1st tray paper empty detection
22 Toner sensor TCS Toner density detection23 Center tray paper
YES/NO sensorTFD1 Center tray paper YES/NO
detection24 Reverse pass paper
detection sensorAPPD1 Reverse pass detection
25 2nd tray (paper tray) detection
C2SS 2nd tray (paper tray) empty detection
26 Manual feed width detection sensor
MPWD Manual feed paper width detection
27 Temperature sensor/Humidity sensor
TH_RA/HUD_RA
Machine temperature/humidity detection
No. Name Code Function and operation1 Right cabinet door
switch (Option)DSW_POC Right cabinet door open/
close detection2 Door switch DSW_R Front door and side door
open/close detection3 2nd right door switch DSW_C2 Side door open/close
detection4 Main switch MSW Main power switch
No. Name Code Function and operation
23
1
4
MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 9
9. Solenoid/Clutch 10. Drive motor
No. Name Code Function and operation1 Paper exit gate
switching solenoid (Option)
POGS1 Paper exit gate switcher
2 PS clutch RRC Main unit paper feed3 1st tray paper feed
clutchC1PUC Paper feed roller drive
4 Manual paper feed solenoid
MPFS Manual paper feed solenoid
5 Paper feed transfer clutch
PTRC2 Paper feed transfer clutch
6 2nd tray paper feed clutch
C2PUC Drives the paper feed roller
7 2nd tray paper feed solenoid
C2PUS Solenoid for the paper feed from the tray
8 1st tray paper feed solenoid
C1PUS Solenoid for the paper feed from the tray
9 Separation pawl solenoid
PSPS Separation pawl operation solenoid
1
23
4
5
678
9
No. Name Code Function and operation1 Scan motor MIRM Drives the scanner unit2 Shifter motor OSM Shifter drive3 Paper exit reverse
motorPOM Duplex paper switching and exit
motor4 ADU motor ADUM Reverse pass for paper
transport5 Main motor MM Main drive6 Tray lift motor C1LUM Tray paper lift7 Tray lift motor C2LUM Tray paper lift8 Toner motor TNM Toner supply9 Polygon motor PM Drives the polygon mirror
1
2
3
4
5
67
8
9
MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 10
11. Lamp 12. Fan/Filter
No. Name Function and operation1 Copy lamp Image exposure lamp2 Heater lamp Fusing heat lamp
1
2
No. Name Code Function and operation1 Fusing fan FUFM1/2 Cools the inside of the unit.2 Power supply cooling
fan 1PSFM1 Cools the inside of the unit.
3 Power supply cooling fan 2
PSFM2 Cools the inside of the unit.
4 Paper exit fan POFM1 Cools the inside of the unit. (31cpm/35cpm machine only)
5 Paper exit fan POFM2 Cools the inside of the unit.6 Ozone filter7 Ozone filter
7
2
3
4
6
1
1
56
MX-M264U EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 11
13. PWB 14. Roller
No. Name Function and operation1 Document size
detection PWB (Light emitting)
Drives the LED for the document size detection.
2 Document size detection PWB (Light receiving)
Outputs the document size detection signal.
3 Scanner lamp drive PWB
Drives the scanner lamp
4 CCD PWB Scans document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal.
5 USB I/F PWB USB I/F6 KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal.7 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD
display signal. Controls the touch panel.8 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.9 SCU PWB Controls the scanner and the operation
section.10 Tray interface PWB 2nd tray control11 DC power supply
PWBDC voltage control
12 High voltage PWB High voltage control13 MFP control PWB Controls image data (compression,
decompression, and filing), and controls the whole machine.
91
8
4
5
12
11
6
2
3
13
7
10
No. Name Function and operation1 Paper exit roller Paper exit roller2 Transport roller Paper transport roller3 Upper heat roller Fuses toner on paper. (with the Teflon
roller)4 Lower heat roller Fuses toner on paper. (with the silicone
rubber roller)5 DUP transport
follower rollerDuplex paper transport
6 DUP transport roller Duplex paper transport7 Transport roller Transfer images on the drum onto paper.8 Resist roller Synchronize the paper lead edge with the
image lead edge.9 Manual paper feed
rollerPicks up papers in manual paper feed port.
10 Manual feed transport roller
Transports paper from the manual paper feed port.
11 1st tray paper feed roller
Transports the picked up paper to RESIST section.
12 1st tray pick-up roller Picks up paper from the tray.13 2nd tray paper feed
rollerTransports the picked up paper to RESIST section.
14 2nd tray pick-up roller
Picks up paper from the tray.
1
2
3
4
5678
9101112
1314
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 1
MX-M264U[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
1. GeneralEach adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated witha specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in thesequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest.However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per-form only the necessary adjustments according to the need.
Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job numbermust be observed.If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment wouldnot complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list
Job No. Adjustment item list SimulationADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit 1A Developing doctor gap adjustment
1B MG roller main pole position adjustment1C Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values 2A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 8-22B Adjust the developing bias voltage 8-12C Transfer current and voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 3 Image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, image magnification ratio adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
3A Print image off-center automatic adjustment (Print engine) (Each paper feed tray) 50-283B Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub scanning
direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (Document table mode)50-28
3C Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (RSPF mode)
50-28
ADJ 4 Scan image distortion adjustment (Document table mode)
4A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment4B Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment4C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
ADJ 5 Scanner image skew adjustment (RSPF mode) 64-2ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment 48-1ADJ 7 Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode) 50-5ADJ 8 Image density adjustment 8A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) 63-3 (63-5)
8B Copy / Image send / FAX image quality adjustment (Individual adjustment)
8B (1)
Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each monochrome copy mode) (separately for the low-density area and the high-density area) (No need to adjust normally)
46-2
8B (2)
Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode document density scanning operation (exposure operation) conditions setting (Normally no need to set)
46-19
8B (3)
Document low density image density reproduction adjustment in the automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode (No need to adjust normally) (Background density adjustment in the scanning section)
46-32
8B (4)
Copy/Scan low density image density adjustment (for each mode) (No need to adjust normally) (Effective only for the color scan function)
46-63
8B (5)
Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document reproduction adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
46-37
8B (6)
RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
46-9
ADJ 9 Paper size sensor adjustment 9A Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 40-29B RSPF paper feed tray document size (width) sensor adjustment 53-6
ADJ 10 Document size detection adjustment
10A Document size sensor detection point adjustment 41-110B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor 41-2
ADJ 11 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1ADJ 12 Print image position, void area,
off-center adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
12A Print image print area adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment) 50-10/50-112B Print image off-center adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment) 50-10
ADJ 13 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual adjustment)
13A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)
48-1
13B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)
48-1/48-5
13C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)
48-1
13D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)
48-1
ADJ 14 Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)
14A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode) 50-1214B Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) 50-12/50-6
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 2
3. Details of adjustment
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit
1-A Developing doctor gap adjustment1) Remove the doctor cover.
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw A.3) Insert a thickness gauge of 1.5mm to the positions of three
screws on the developing doctor as shown.
4) Tighten the developing doctor fixing screw.5) Check the clearance of the developing doctor. If it is within the
specified range, then fix the doctor fixing screw with screwlock.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch thedeveloping doctor and the MG roller.
<Adjustment specification>
1-B MG roller main pole position adjustment1) Put the developing unit on a flat surface.2) Tie a needle or pin on a string.3) Hold the string and bring the needle close to the MG roller hor-
izontally. (Do not use paper clip, which is too heavy to make acorrect adjustment.) (Put the developing unit horizontally forthis adjustment.)
4) Do not bring the needle into contact with the MG roller, butbring it to a position 2 or 3mm apart from the MG roller. Markthe point on the MG roller which is on the extension line fromthe needle tip.
5) Measure the distance from the marking position to the top ofthe doctor plate of the developing unit to insure that it is9.1mm.If the distance is not within the specified range, loosen the fix-ing screw A of the main pole adjustment plate, and move theadjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
ADJ 15 Copy image position and image loss adjustment (Manual adjustment)
15A Copy image position, image loss, and void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)
50-1
15B Image scanning position adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) 53-815C Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) 50-6
ADJ 16 Finisher adjustments (alignment, staple position) 3-10
Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation
A
A
AF
C
R
F/C/R: 1.5
Developing doctor gap+0.1mm-0.15mm
9.1mm
A
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 3
1-C Toner density control reference value setting
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When developer is replaced.
CAUTION: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developeris replaced. Never execute it in the other cases.
1) With the front cabinet open, enter SIM25-2.
2) Toner cartridge installationShake the toner cartridge 20 times horizontally.
CAUTION: This is performed only when a new toner cartridge isinstalled.
3) Press the lock release lever and insert it along the guide in themachine until it locks securely.
CAUTION: Before installation, clean and remove dust and dirt fromthe toner cartridge.
4) Close the front cabinet.5) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, [EXECUTE] key is high-
lighted (in black) and the developer adjustment is started. (Theadjustment is automatically performed for 3 minutes.)
6) When the developer adjustment is completed, [EXECUTE] keyreturns to the normal state (in white), and the developer adjust-ment value is displayed.
CAUTION: If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, theadjustment result is not reflected.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during the operation,the operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns tothe normal display.If [EE-EU] or [EE-EL] is displayed, setting of the refer-ence toner density control value is not completed nor-mally.Troubleshoot the cause, remove the cause, and per-form setting again.
7) Cancel SIM25-2 with [CA] key.
CAUTION: When not replacing the developer, do not executeSIM25-2.
Abnormal end
EXECUTEEXECUTE
or INTERRUPT
Adjustment completed
Error display Error name Detail of error
EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level below 78EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level above 178
20
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 4
ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values
2-A Adjust the main charger grid voltageThis adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.* U2 trouble has occurred.* The PCU PWB has been replaced.* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.1) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.
2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted.
3) Enter the main charger values of items A/B under TS_OFF/ON.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in theprocedure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
CAUTION: Note that the adjustment value may differ depending onthe MC/DV high voltage power PWB.Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC/DV high voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed inorder to check the adjustment value.This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advis-able to put down the adjustment value in advance.
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the mid-dle speed mode is set, the adjustment values of theother modes are automatically set according to the mid-dle speed mode setting in a certain relationship.
CAUTION: Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with adigital multi meter in this model, a judgment of the out-put must be made by checking the print image quality.
2-B Adjust the developing bias voltageThis adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.* U2 trouble has occurred.* The PCU PWB has been replaced.* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.1) Enter the SIM 8-1 mode.
Button Item Display Content Setting range
Default value
TS_OFF A COPY GB
Charging/grid bias set value in a copy job (Toner save mode OFF)
0 - 750 590
B PRINTER FAXGB
Charging/grid bias set value in a Print/FAX job (Toner save mode OFF)
0 - 750 590
TS_ON A COPY GB
Charging/grid bias set value in a copy job (Toner save mode ON)
0 - 750 460
B PRINTER GB
Charging/grid bias set value in a print job (Toner save mode ON)
0 - 750 390
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
10-key
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 5
2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted.
3) Enter the developing bias values of items A/B under TS_OFF/ON.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in theprocedure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
CAUTION: Note that the adjustment value may differ depending onthe MC/DV high voltage power PWB.Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC/DV high voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed inorder to check the adjustment value.This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advis-able to put down the adjustment value in advance.
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the mid-dle speed mode is set, the adjustment values of theother modes are automatically set according to the mid-dle speed mode setting in a certain relationship.
CAUTION: Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with adigital multi meter in this model, a judgment of the out-put must be made by checking the print image quality.
2-C Transfer current and voltage adjustmentThis adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the TC high voltage PWB is replaced.* U2 trouble has occurred.* The PCU PWB has been replaced.* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.1) Enter the SIM 8-6 mode.
2) Select an item to be adjusted.
Button Item Display Content Setting range
Default value
TS_OFF A COPY DVB
Developing bias set value in a copy job (Toner save mode OFF)
0 - 650 450
B PRINTER FAXDVB
Developing bias set value in a Print/FAX job (Toner save mode OFF)
0 - 650 450
TS_ON A COPY DVB
Developing bias set value in a copy job (Toner save mode ON)
0 - 650 320
B PRINTER DVB
Developing bias set value in a print job (Toner save mode ON)
0 - 650 250
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
10-key
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value26cpm
machine31cpm
machine35cpm
machineA +V1 F Transfer
bias reference value
Standard paper
W Between papers
Single A-1: W, +V1 F (Between papers), Standard paper front surface (Single/Duplex)
0 - 255 5 5 5
B +V1 R Duplex A-2: W, +V1 R (Between papers), Standard paper back surface (Duplex)
0 - 255 5 5 5
C +V2 F Paper Single A-3: W, +V2 F, Standard paper front surface (Single/Duplex)
0 - 255 14 18 20
D +V2 R Duplex A-4: W, +V2 R, Standard paper back surface (Duplex)
0 - 255 12 16 14
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 6
E +V1 S-F Transfer bias reference value
Standard paper
N1jp Between papers
Single B-1: N1jp, +V1 S-F (Between papers), Standard paper front surface (Single/Duplex)
0 - 255 5 5 5
F +V1 S-R Duplex B-2: N1jp, +V1 S-R (Between papers), Standard paper back surface (Duplex)
0 - 255 5 5 5
G +V2 S-F Paper Single B-3: N1jp, +V2 S-F, Standard paper front surface (Single/Duplex)
0 - 255 14 18 20
H +V2 S-F Duplex B-4: N1jp, +V2 S-F, Standard paper back surface (Duplex)
0 - 255 14 18 20
I +V1 XS-F N2jp Between papers
Single C-1: N2jp, +V1 XS-F (Between papers), Standard paper front surface (Single/Duplex)
0 - 255 5 5 5
J +V1 XS-R Duplex C-2: N2jp, +V1 XS-R (Between papers), Standard paper back surface (Duplex)
0 - 255 5 5 5
K +V2 XS-F Paper Single C-3: N2jp, +V2 XS-F, Standard paper front surface (Single/Duplex)
0 - 255 14 18 20
L +V2 XS-R Duplex C-4: N2jp, +V2 XS-R, Standard paper back surface (Duplex)
0 - 255 14 18 20
M +V1 THICK Heavy paper
>LTR Between papers D-1: > LTR, +V1 THICK (Between papers), Heavy paper
0 - 255 5 5 5
N +V2 THICK Paper D-2: > LTR, +V2 THICK, Heavy paper
0 - 255 10 14 16
O +V1 THICK S LTR Between papers E-1: LTR, +V1 THICK S (Between papers), Heavy paper
0 - 255 5 5 5
P +V2 THICK S Paper E-2: LTR, +V2 THICK S, Heavy paper
0 - 255 12 14 16
Q +V1 THIN Thin paper
>LTR Between papers D-7: > LTR, +V1 THIN (Between papers), Thin paper
0 - 255 5 5 5
R +V2 THIN Paper D-8: > LTR, +V2 THIN, Thin paper
0 - 255 12 18 20
S +V1 THIN S LTR Between papers E-7: LTR, +V1 THIN S (Between papers), Thin paper
0 - 255 5 5 5
T +V2 THIN S Paper E-8: LTR, +V2 THIN S, Thin paper
0 - 255 12 18 20
U +V1 LABEL Label sheet
>LTR Between papers D-3: LTR, +V1 LABEL (Between papers), Label sheet
0 - 255 5 5 5
V +V2 LABEL Paper D-4: > LTR, +V2 LABEL, Label sheet
0 - 255 12 18 20
W +V1 LABEL S LTR Between papers E-3: LTR, +V1 LABEL S (Between papers), Label sheet
0 - 255 5 5 5
X +V2 LABEL S Paper E-4: LTR, +V2 LABEL S, Label sheet
0 - 255 12 14 16
Y +V1 OHP OHP >LTR Between papers D-5: > LTR, +V1 OHP (Between papers), OHP
0 - 255 5 5 5
Z +V2 OHP Paper D-6: > LTR, +V2 OHP, OHP
0 - 255 8 14 16
AA +V1 OHP S LTR Between papers E-5: LTR, +V1 OHP S (Between papers), OHP
0 - 255 5 5 5
AB +V2 OHP S Paper E-6: LTR, +V2 OHP S, OHP
0 - 255 12 18 20
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value26cpm
machine31cpm
machine35cpm
machine
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 7
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value), and press [OK] key.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.By setting the default value (specified value), the specified output is provided.
ADJ 3 Image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, image magnification ratio adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically withSIM50-28.* ADJ 12
Print image position, image magnification ratio, void area, off-center adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 13Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 14Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 15Copy image position, image loss adjustment (Manual adjustment)
Menu in SIM50-28 mode
3-A Print image off-center automatic adjustment (Print engine) (Each paper feed tray)
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
2) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] with the key.3) Select [ALL] with the key.
CAUTION: By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] key, the followingitems can be executed individually.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items areexecuted simultaneously.
AC +V1 POSTCARD Transfer bias reference value
Postcard/Envelope
>100mm Between papers D-9: > 100mm, +V1 POSTCARD (Between papers), Postcard/Envelope
0 - 255 5 5 5
AD +V2 POSTCARD Paper D-10: > 100mm, +V2 POSTCARD, Postcard/Envelope
0 - 255 16 26 26
AE +V1 POSTCARD S 100mm Between papers E-9: 100mm, +V1 POSTCARD S (Between papers), Postcard/Envelope
0 - 255 5 5 5
AF +V2 POSTCARD S Paper E-10: 100mm, +V2 POSTCARD S, Postcard/Envelope
0 - 255 16 26 26
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value26cpm
machine31cpm
machine35cpm
machine
Display/Item ContentOC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (RSPF mode)SETUP/PRINT ADJ
Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result displayDATA Display of data used when an adjustment is executed
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 8
4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.The adjustment pattern is printed out.
6) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
CAUTION: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the documentguide.In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printedadjustment pattern.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.The following item is automatically adjustment.* Print image lead edge image position adjustment* Print image off-center adjustment
8) Press [OK] key.The adjustment result becomes valid.
Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.
3-B Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (Document table mode)
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
2) Select [OC ADJ] with the key.3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key.
(Any paper size will do.)
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.The adjustment pattern is printed out.
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
CAUTION: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the documentguide.In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printedadjustment pattern.
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 9
6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The following item is automatically adjustment.* Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image
off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratioautomatic adjustment
7) Press [OK] key.The adjustment result becomes valid.
3-C Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (RSPF mode)
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
2) Press the [SPF ADJ] key.
3) Proceed to one of the three screens for selecting the cassetteused to print RSPF adjustment patterns by selecting the corre-sponding button:
SIDE1: RSPF adjustment for the front sideSIDE2: RSPF adjustment for the back sideALL: RSPF adjustment for both the front and back sides
4) Select one of the cassettes that can be used to print RSPFadjustment patterns. (Multiple selection is not allowed.)
5) Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts self-print ofRSPF adjustment patterns.* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
self-printing RSPF adjustment patterns.When self-print finishes, the next screen appears where youcan start RSPF adjustments.
6) RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the RSPF. (Set so that the pattern surface faces up.)
* By pressing the [REPRINT] key, you can return to the cas-sette selection screen and have the machine self-printRSPF adjustment patterns again.
7) Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts readingRSPF adjustment patterns (for the front side).* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
reading and calculating RSPF adjustment patterns (for thefront side).The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (forthe front side) after it has read the patterns for the front side.After the machine has finished calculating the adjustmentamount for the front side, the next screen appears whereyou can have the machine start reading RSPF adjustmentpatterns (for the back side).
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 10
Adjustment Item List
• RSPF original leading edge adjustment (front side)• RSPF original off-center adjustment (front side)• RSPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment
(front side)8) RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the RSPF.
(Set so that the pattern surface faces down.)
* By pressing the [REPRINT] key, you can return to the cas-sette selection screen and have the machine self-printRSPF adjustment patterns again.
9) Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts loadingRSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
reading RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (forthe back side) after it has read the patterns for the back side.After the machine has finished calculating the adjustmentamount for the back side, the next screen appears whereyou can view the results of the adjustments.
Adjustment Item List
• RSPF original leading edge adjustment (back side)• RSPF original off-center adjustment (back side)• RSPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment
(back side)10) The adjustment result screen appears.
This screen shows the current values along with the previousvalues in parentheses.* By pressing the [REPRINT] key, you can return to the cas-
sette selection screen and have the machine self-printRSPF adjustment patterns (for the front and back sides)again.
* To have the machine start re-reading the RSPF adjustmentpatterns (front and back sides), press the [RESCAN] key.
* To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment val-ues into EEPROM and RAM, press the [RETRY] key.
* To display the data used for adjustment, press the [DATA]key.
11) To save the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM andreturn to the top menu, press the [OK] key.* To return to the result screen, press the [BACK] key.
ADJ 4 Scan image distortion adjustment (Document table mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.* When the copy image is distorted.
4-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document tableglass.1) Remove the lamp unit, and then loosen the screws which are
fixing the scanner unit A and the drive wire. Release the scan-ner unit A from the drive wire.
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scannerunit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers onthe front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism isproper.
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 11
3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frameside of the scanner unit B.
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame sideof the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stopperson the front and the rear frames simultaneously.
5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unitB.If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce-dures, perform the following procedures.Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley whichis not in contact.Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scannerunit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit Bis in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rearframe simultaneously. (Change the relative position of thescanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scannerunit drive pulley fixing screw.
6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit theedge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, andfix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
4-B Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-ment table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the referenceposition as shown below.) With the document cover open,make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
L
L
L = 10mm
L
L
30mm
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 12
3) Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.If La = Lb, there is no distortion.
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, performthe following procedures.
4) Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drivepulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame willdo.)
5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn thescanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan-ner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scannerunit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.Repeat the procedures 2) - 6) until the condition of the procedure 3)is satisfied.If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted withthe above procedures, perform ADJ 4A Scanner (reading) unit par-allelism adjustment.
4-C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction.If the four angles of the rectangle of the copy image are rightangles, it is judged that there is no distortion. (The work iscompleted.)
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, performthe following procedure.
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-handand right-hand side images distortions.
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.(The distortions are balanced.)If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).If not, perform the following procedures.
La Lb
L
L
L = 10mm
L
L
Lc
Ld
Copy A
Lc
Ld
Copy B
There is no differencebetween the distortion onthe right and that on the left.
Lc Ld Lc Ld
There is some differencebetween the distortion onthe right and that on the left.
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 13
5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the frontframe side.
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen thescanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between theright and the left heights of the scanner rail.Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until the difference between theimage distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.
6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the frontframe side, change the overall height.
7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Checkthat the distortion in the main scanning direction is within thespecified range.Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the mainscanning direction is in the specified range.
ADJ 5 Scanner image skew adjustment (RSPF mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* The RSPF section has been disassembled.* When replacing the RSPF unit.* The RSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2.SIM 64-2 set values
A = 1, B = 1, C = 254, D = 255Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel withthe paper edges, and apply position marks A and B to theleading and trailing edges of the paper surface lead edge sec-tion.
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")paper in RSPF duplex mode, and then check the image forskews (Set in the RSPF feed tray so that the mark on theadjustment chart is at the edge). • Check with one of the following methods.
Check Method 1
Check Method 2Check that the squareness of the main scanning directionprint line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within1.0mm.
If the copy image is not in the above state, perform the pro-cedure 3).
3) Open the RSPF unit, and loosen the fixing screw of the hinge.
4) Slide the RSPF unit in the arrow direction to make the skewadjustment.
5) Make a copy again and measure (a) and (b) on the copied testchart. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition ((a) - (b) =
1mm or less) is satisfied.
A
B
Paper pass direction
A B
a b
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm
A
0 - 1.0mm
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 14
ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustmentThis adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.* The CCD unit has been replaced.* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted.* U2 trouble has occurred.1) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter theadjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.
4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scalelength in terms of length.
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the mainscanning direction from the following formula.Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correctionratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100%(Example) Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on thecopy image.Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correctionratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform thefollowing procedures.
7) Remove the document table glass.8) Remove the dark box cover.9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.
NOTE: MEMO: This procedure must be executed also when theCCD unit is replaced.
10 20 90 100 110
10 20 90 100 110
1.0mm
100mm scale(Orignal)
Copy image(1mm (1%)shorter thanthe original)
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 15
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
CAUTION: Never loosen the screws marked with X.If any one of these screws is loosened, the position andthe angle of the CCD unit base may be changed tocause a problem, which cannot be adjusted in the mar-ket. In that case, the whole scanner unit must bereplaced.
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanningdirection) to change the installing position.When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift theCCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorterthan the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with thescale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 9).
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 1%,repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied.
CAUTION: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simu-lation 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnifica-tion ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 1.0%) and the specified resolution is obtained based onthe optical system structure.
ADJ 7 Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the registration roller section is disassembled.* When the LSU is replaced or removed.* U2 trouble has occurred.* The PCU PWB has been replaced.* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
NOTE: This adjustment is performed by the user to increase thelead edge void area to greater than the standard value(3mm) in the printer mode.
1) Enter the SIM 50-5 mode.
2) Select the set item L with the scroll key, and enter the valuecorresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paperin it.
A
B
Display/Item Content Setting range Default
A DEN-C Printer lead edge image position adjustment
1 - 99 30
B DEN-B Rear edge void area adjustment
1 - 99 30
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area adjustment
1 - 99 20
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void area adjustment correction value
1 - 99 57
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area adjustment correction value
1 - 99 50
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area adjustment correction value
1 - 99 57
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area adjustment correction value
1 - 99 57
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area adjustment correction value
1 - 99 57
I DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void area adjustment correction value
1 - 99 60
EXECUTE End of print
EXECUTE10-key
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 16
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.The adjustment pattern is printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustmentpattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it isin the standard adjustment value range.Standard adjustment value: 4.0mm or less
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust-
ment item DENC with the scroll key.6) Change the adjustment value.
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the[EXECUTE] key.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern isprinted.When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from thepaper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. Whenthe adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased.When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changedby about 0.1mm.
Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.
ADJ 8 Image density adjustmentMake a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copyof the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11), and check that they are proper.Note for checking the monochrome copy mode densityTo check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ).Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Photomode (Manual).In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjustmentmode must be set to the default (center).Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insurethe following conditions.
CAUTION: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color testchart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to check.
J DENB-HV Heavy paper correction value
1 - 99 50
K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1L PAPER MFT Tray
selectionManual paper feed
1 - 5 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2CS2 Tray 2 3CS3 Tray 3 4CS4 Tray 4 5
M DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection
Yes 0 - 1 0 1 (NO)NO No 1
Display/Item Content Setting range Default
4.0mm or less
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 WSHARP GRAY CHART
SHARP gray chart
Patch 1 is not copied.
Patch 2 isslightly copied.
Patch 3 is copied.
(Black-and-white copy)
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 17
Monochrome copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)1) There are 12 void areas.2) The resolution of 4.0 (5 points) can be seen.3) The density difference between the F and the R sides is not so great.4) There are no white and black streaks.5) The background density is not so light.6) The black low-density gradation is copied slightly.
Void
Resolution
Void
Low-density gradation
Resolution
Density difference between the F and the R sides.No white and black streaks
Background density
Resolution
Resolution
Void Void
VoidVoid
Resolution
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 18
8-A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the CCD unit is replaced.* When a U2 trouble is occurred.* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.(1) Note before adjustment• Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens sur-
face are free from dirt and dust. (If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
• Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of theSIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are free fromdirt and scratches.If they are dirty, clean them.If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
(2) Adjustment procedures1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-ment table.Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is onthe left side.
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set theCCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustmentmethod using the SIT chart.
CAUTION: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ orUKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the docu-ment table.
NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment,[EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment,[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.
NOTE: Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultravioletrays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag (suchas a dark file) and store in a dark place of low temperatureand low humidity.
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 19
8-B Copy / Image send / FAX image quality adjustment (Individual adjustment)
a. GeneralThis is used to execute a fine adjustment in each mode when there is a request from the user. Normally, however, there is no need to use it.In this adjustment, the adjustment result may be applied to the image send mode and the FAX mode as well as the copy mode.This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.
*1: Text Printed Photo / Copy document, Text Printed Photo only
Copy MODE IMAGE SEND(SCAN) MODEMonochrome mode Color mode Monochrome mode
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer46-02 Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each
monochrome copy mode) (separately for the low-density area and the high-density area) (No need to adjust normally)
— — — — — —
46-04 Color image send mode image density adjustment (for each mode) (No need to adjust normally)
— — — — — —
46-05 Monochrome image send mode image density adjustment (for each mode) (No need to adjust normally)
— — — — — —
46-08 Image send mode RGB color balance adjustment (separately for the low-density area and the high-density area) (No need to adjust normally)
— — — — — —
46-09 RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
—
46-19 Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode document density scanning operation (exposure operation) conditions setting (Normally no need to set)
— — — — —
46-32 Document low density image density reproduction adjustment in the automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode (No need to adjust normally) (Background density adjustment in the scanning section)
— — — — —
46-37 Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document reproduction adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
— — —
46-39 FAX send image sharpness adjustment — — — — — — —46-40 FAX send image density adjustment
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)— — — — — — —
46-41 FAX send image density adjustment (Normal text mode) — — — — — — —46-42 FAX send image density adjustment (Fine text mode) — — — — — — —46-43 FAX send image density adjustment (Super fine mode) — — — — — — —46-44 FAX send image density adjustment (Ultra fine mode) — — — — — — —46-45 FAX send image density adjustment (600dpi mode) — — — — — — —46-47 Copy image, image send image, FAX send image
(JPEG) compression ratio setting (Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
—
46-60 Color (Scan) mode sharpness adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
— — — — — —
46-61 Area separation recognition level adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
(*1)
(*1)
(*1)
— —
46-62 ACS, area separation, background image process, automatic exposure mode operation conditions setting (Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
— — — —
46-63 Scan low density image density adjustment (for each mode) (No need to adjust normally)
— — — —
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 20
8-B (1)Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each monochrome copy mode) (separately for the low-density area and the high-density area) (No need to adjust normally)
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually.This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low
density and high density part at each copy density individually.* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the
copy by each the copy mode individually.* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the
copy mode individually.* When there is request from the user.1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode.
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"mode and change the adjustment value.When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density isincreased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copydensity is decreased.
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the test modealternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the testmode and changing the adjustment value and checking thecopy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
8-B (2)Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode document density scanning operation (exposure operation) conditions setting (Normally no need to set)
Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-ment density in monochrome auto copy mode.When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu-ment, change the setting.This setting is required in the following cases.* When a proper density copy is not obtained in the monochrome
automatic copy mode.* When a document with images near its lead edge is copied.* When a document with colored background is copied.1) Enter the SIM 46-19 mode.
2) Set REALTIME, STOP or PRE-SCAN to adjustment item AESTOP COPY. For contents of each setting item, refer to below.Change the setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or"PART", in some cases.
NOTE:MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)MODE2: Normal gamma
Display/Item Content Setting range Default
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50HIGH 1 - 99 50
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50HIGH 1 - 99 50
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50HIGH 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
Text/Printed Photo
LOW 1 - 99 50HIGH 1 - 99 50
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50HIGH 1 - 99 50
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50HIGH 1 - 99 50
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50HIGH 1 - 99 50
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50HIGH 1 - 99 50
OK
Display/Item Content Set value DefaultAE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 MODE2AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure
Stop (for copy)REALTIME/STOP/PRESCAN
STOP
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure Stop (for FAX) ON/OFF ON
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure Stop (for scanner)
REALTIME/STOP/PRESCAN
STOP
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter setting
SOFT NORMALNORMALSHARP
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL PARTPART
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 21
STOP: Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of document,decides the output image density according to the density of thatpart. (The output image density is constant at whole area.)REALTIME: Reads the density of width of the document one by one, decidesthe output image density according to the density of each part ofthe document. (The output image density may be not constant atwhole area.)PRESCAN: Once the densities on the document surface are scanned, the out-put image density is determined according to the average of thescanned densities. (The output image density is even for all thesurface.)AE WIDTH FULL: Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7mm (leading edge of document) x Document width. No relationshipto PRESCAN MODEAE WIDTH PART: Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width). No relationshipto PRESCAN MODEOperation in monochrome auto copy mode: When the density of the document of the read area is light, outputimage density is increased by control. When the density of the doc-ument of the read area is dark, output image density is decreasedby control.
8-B (3)Document low density image density reproduction adjustment in the automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode (No need to adjust normally) (Background density adjustment in the scanning section)
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document backgrounddensity in monochrome auto copy mode.This adjustment is required in the following cases.* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low densityimage of the document.
* When there is request from the user.1) Enter the SIM 46-32 mode.
2) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key.3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of thebackground and the low density image is increased. When theadjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back-ground and the low density image is decreased.
3 to 7mm
3 to 7mm
100mm
100mm
3 to 7mm
Document table/RSPF mode
Document table mode
RSPF mode
AE WIDTH = FULL
AE WIDTH = PART
AE WIDTH = PART
Document density detection area
Display/Item Content Set value DefaultA COPY : OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
OK
10-key
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 22
8-B (4)Copy/Scan low density image density adjustment (for each mode) (No need to adjust normally) (Effective only for the color scan function)
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den-sity area in the scanner mode.This adjustment is required in the following cases.* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low densityimage of the document.
* When there is request from the user.1) Enter the SIM 46-63 mode.
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
* Items A - J are not used. (Changes do not affect the picturequality.)
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of thebackground and the low density image is increased. When theadjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back-ground and the low density image is decreased.
OK
10-key
Display/Item Content Set value Default
A COLOR COPY : TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
Text print (color copy) 1 - 9 3
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1 - 9 3C COLOR COPY :
PRINTED PHOTOPrinted photo (color copy)
1 - 9 5
D COLOR COPY : PHOTOGRAPH
Photograph (color copy)
1 - 9 5
E COLOR COPY : TEXT/PHOTO
Text/Photograph (color copy)
1 - 9 3
F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1 - 9 5G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document
(color copy)1 - 9 6
H COLOR COPY : TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)
Copy document, Text print (color copy)
1 - 9 5
I COLOR COPY : TEXT (COPY TO COPY)
Copy document, Text (color copy)
1 - 9 5
J COLOR COPY : PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)
Copy document, Printed photo (color copy)
1 - 9 5
K COLOR PUSH : TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
Text print (color PUSH)
1 - 9 3
L COLOR PUSH : TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1 - 9 3M COLOR PUSH :
PRINTED PHOTOPrinted photo (color PUSH)
1 - 9 5
N COLOR PUSH : PHOTOGRAPH
Photograph (color PUSH)
1 - 9 5
O COLOR PUSH : TEXT/PHOTO
Text/Photograph (color PUSH)
1 - 9 3
P COLOR PUSH : MAP Map (color PUSH) 1 - 9 5
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 23
8-B (5)Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document reproduction adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellowimage when printing color document that included the red/yellowimage in monochrome copy mode.This adjustment is required in the following cases.* When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red
image in case of making a color copy of the color document inmonochrome copy mode.
* When there is request from the user.1) Enter the SIM 46-37 mode.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased,copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustmentvalue is decreased, copy density of red image is increased.When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased,copy density of red image is increased. When the adjustmentvalue is decreased, copy density of red image is decreased.
4) Press [OK] key.5) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode
(manual), check the copy.If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37mode and change the adjustment value.Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result isobtained.
8-B (6)RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
This setting is normally not required, however, in the followingcases, make changes to the setting:* When copy in RSPF mode differs from copy in document table
mode.* When copy density in RSPF mode is low or too high.* When the RSPF unit is replaced.* When the RSPF unit is disassembled.* The CCD unit has been replaced.* U2 trouble has occurred.* When the MFP PWB is replaced.* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.a. Adjustment procedure1) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode.
OK
DEFAULT
EXECUTENO
YES
10-key
Display/Item (Copy mode) Content Adjustment
range Default
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 63B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 877
OK
10-key
C
D
F
C
D
F
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 24
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.When adjusting density on low density part, select "A (COPYLOW)". When adjusting density on high density part, select "D(COPY HIGH)".
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.In case of increase of image density, input large numericvalue. Or in case of diluting the image density, input smallnumeric value.
4) Press [OK] key.5) Make a copy in the RSPF mode and check the copy.If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-9 modeand change the adjustment value.Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
ADJ 9 Paper size sensor adjustment
9-A Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.* The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.* U2 trouble has occurred.* The PCU PWB has been replaced.* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
1) Enter the SIM 40-2 mode.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default
A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure adjustment (Low density side)
1 - 99 48
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure adjustment (Low density side)
1 - 99 48
C FAX : LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure adjustment (Low density side)
1 - 99 48
D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure adjustment (High density side)
1 - 99 53
E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposure adjustment (Low density side)
1 - 99 53
F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure adjustment (High density side)
1 - 99 53EXECUTE
EXECUTE
Repeat the above procedure to adjustthe A5R width MIN POSITION.
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 25
2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-tion.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normaldisplay.The maximum width position detection level of the manualpaper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4R size.5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normaldisplay.The A4R size width position detection level of the manualpaper feed guide is recognized.
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normaldisplay.Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-tion.
9) Press [EXECUTE] key.[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normaldisplay.The minimum width position detection level of the manualpaper feed guide is recognized.
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis-played.When the operation is completed normally, the above data aresaved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
9-B RSPF paper feed tray document size (width) sensor adjustment
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* The RSPF paper feed tray section has been disassembled.* The RSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced.* When a U2 trouble occurs.* The scanner PWB has been replaced.* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced.1) Enter the SIM 53-6 mode.
2) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-tion.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.The maximum width detection level is recognized.
4) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The A4R width detection level is recognized.6) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The A5R width detection level is recognized. 8) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.When each of the above operations has been completed, the"COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations hasfailed, the "ERROR" message appears.
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 26
ADJ 10 Document size detection adjustment
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the original size sensor section has been disassembled.* When the original size sensor section has been replaced.* When U2 trouble has occurred.* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
10-A Document size sensor detection point adjustment
1) Enter the SIM 41-1 mode.
Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment screwand slide the actuator position so that the display OCSW isreturned to the normal display when the height of the arm unittop from the table glass is 20.2 0.25mm by slowly tilting thedocument detection arm unit in the arrow direction and adjust. (If the ON timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the doc-ument detection function may malfunction.)
10-B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor
1) Enter the SIM41-2 mode.
2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.With the document cover open, without placing a document onthe table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press[EXECUTE] key.
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT SIZEPHOTO SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.
20.2 0.25mm
Adjustment completed
EXECUTE
Adjustmentfailed EXECUTE
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 27
ADJ 11 Touch panel coordinate settingThis adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* The operation panel has been replaced.* U2 trouble has occurred.* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.1) Enter the SIM 65-1 mode.
2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer soundsand the display is reversed. When all the four points arepressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screenagain.Check to confirm that there is no shift between the displayframe and the detection position when the touch panel ispressed.* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).
ADJ 12 Print image position, void area, off-center adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automaticadjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute thisadjustment.In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when asatisfactory result is not obtained from the automaticadjustment (ADJ 3).
12-A Print image print area adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the LSU is replaced or removed.* When a paper tray is replaced.* When the paper tray section is disassembled.* When the manual feed tray is replaced.* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.* When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled.* When the registration roller section is disassembled.* U2 trouble has occurred.* The PCU PWB has been replaced.* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode.
2) Set A4 (11 x 8.5") paper to all the paper feed trays. Select anadjustment item of the target paper feed tray among items A -J and enter the adjustment value. Then select item "L" toselect the paper feed tray which is to be used for executingtest printing.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.The adjustment pattern is printed.
EXECUTE
End of print
EXECUTE
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 28
4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items beloware in the range of the standard values.
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desiredcondition, execute the simulation 50-1.
NOTE: Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm.5) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode.
6) Select an adjustment item (DENA, DENB, FRONT/REAR) withthe scroll key, enter the adjustment value, and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area isincreased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the voidarea is decreased.When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area ischanged by 0.1mm.
NOTE: The adjustment value and the actual void area are relatedas follows:Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
NOTE: When the amount of the rear edge void is different betweeneach paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item(DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust.
The adjustment item (DENB) have a effect on the paper of allpaper feed tray.That is, adjustment value of item (DENB-XXX) fine adjusts toadjustment item (DENB) for each paper tray.After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) tocheck that the void area is within the specified range.Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, ifthe lead edge void area is not within the specified range,change the adjustment value of item (RRCB-XXX) in SIM 50-1.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
12-B Print image off-center adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the LSU is replaced or removed.* When a paper tray is replaced.* When the paper tray section is disassembled.* When the manual feed tray is replaced.* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.* When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled.* When the registration roller section is disassembled.* U2 trouble has occurred.* The PCU PWB has been replaced.* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
Content Standard adjustment valueX Lead edge void area 4.0mm or lessY Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0 2.0mm
XY
Z22.0
4.0mm or less
2.0 - 5.0mm
Z12.0 2.0mm
2.0mm
OK
10-key
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
Void area adjustment
DENA Lead edge void area adjustment
1 - 99 30
DENB Rear edge void area adjustment
1 - 99 30
FRONT/REAR
FRONT/REAR void area adjustment
1 - 99 20
Sub scanning direction print area correction value
DENB-MFT Manual feed correction value
1 - 99 57
DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction value 1 - 99 50DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction value 1 - 99 57DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction value 1 - 99 57DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction value 1 - 99 57DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 60DENB-HV Heavy paper
correction value1 - 99 50
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 29
1) Enter SIM 50-10 mode.
2) Select the target paper feed tray (MAIN-XX) with the scroll key.
3) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-cedure 2).
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.The adjustment pattern is printed.
5) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-rect position.Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and therear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check thatall the following conditions are satisfied.
RV: REAR VOID AREAFV: FRONT VOID AREARV + FV 4.0mmRV = 2.0 2.0mmFV = 2.0 2.0mm
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
6) Change the adjustment value.Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the[EXECUTE] key.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern isprinted.When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat-tern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, theadjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance ischanged by about 0.1mm.Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the conditions of procedure 5)are satisfied.In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeatingthe above procedures, perform the following procedure.
7) Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray,and change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame direc-tion. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).
NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automaticadjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute thisadjustment.In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when asatisfactory result is not obtained from the automaticadjustment (ADJ 3).
Display/Item Content Setting rangeNO Not select 1
EXECUTE
End of print
EXECUTE
RV2.0mm 2.0mm
FV2.0mm 2.0mm
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 30
ADJ 13 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual adjustment)
NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automaticadjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute thisadjustment.In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when asatisfactory result is not obtained from the automaticadjustment (ADJ 3).
CAUTION: If the default adjustment value of the scan image magni-fication ration adjustment (main scanning direction) ofSIM 48-1, copy image quality may be degraded. There-fore, this adjustment must be executed only when thereis a special necessity.
13-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted.* When the scanner motor is replaced.* U2 trouble has occurred.* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.* When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is replaced.Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installingposition adjustment) must have been completed.1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to thecopy mode, and make a copy.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specifiedrange (100 1.0%).If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnificationratio is not within the specified range, perform the followingprocedure.
5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-tion ratio is increased.When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-cation ratio is changed by about 0.02%.Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratiois within the specified range (100 1.0%).
13-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image sub scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted.* When the scanner motor is replaced.* U2 trouble has occurred.* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.* When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is replaced.1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 31
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specifiedrange (100 1.0%).If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the followingprocedure.
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio iswithin the specified range (100 1.0%).
13-C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the scan control PWB is replaced.* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.* When U2 trouble occurs.* When the copy magnification ratio of the RSPF mode copy
image in the main scanning direction is not proper.* When the RSPF is disassembled.
a. Adjustment procedures
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-ment tray of the RSPF.The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides andboth surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
images.
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the followingformula:Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100(%)Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range(100 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-cedures.
5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
RSPF
6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) withthe scroll key.
10 20 90 100 110
10 20 90 100 110
10 20 90 100 110
(Example 1)Copy A(Shorter thanthe original)
(Example 2)Copy B(Longer thanthe original)
Scale(Original)
Copy magnifi-cation ratio
(Original dimension - Copy dimension)Original dimension
100%
A4 size
(Both the front surfaceand the back surface)
10mm10mm
Paper pass direction
Item Display Content Setting range
Default value
A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning magnification ratio adjustment (CCD)
1 - 99 50
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning magnification ratio adjustment (CCD)
1 - 99 50
C SPF(MAIN) RSPF document front surface magnification ratio adjustment (Main scan)
1 - 99 50
D SPF(SUB) RSPF document front surface magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan)
1 - 99 50
E SPFB(MAIN) RSPF document back surface magnification ratio adjustment (Main scan)
1 - 99 50
F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back surface magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan)
1 - 99 50
SPF (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio (Front surface)
SPFB (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio (Back surface)
original
10 50 100 150 200 250
copy
10 50 100 150 200 250
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 32
7) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changedby 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.02%.
8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result isobtained.
13-D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replaced.* When the EEPROM on the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replaced.* When U2 trouble occurs.* When the copy magnification ratio of the RSPF mode copy
image in the sub scanning direction is not proper.* When the RSPF is disassembled.1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-
ment tray of the RSPF.The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides andboth surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
images.
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the followingformula:Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100(%)Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range(100 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-cedures.
5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
6) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
7) Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-tion ratio is increased.When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magni-fication ratio is changed by 0.1%.
8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result isobtained.
A4 size
10mm
10mm
Paper pass direction
original
copy
1050
100150
200
1050
100150
200
Item Display Content Setting range
Default value
A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning magnification ratio adjustment (CCD)
1 - 99 50
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning magnification ratio adjustment (CCD)
1 - 99 50
C SPF(MAIN) RSPF document front surface magnification ratio adjustment (Main scan)
1 - 99 50
D SPF(SUB) RSPF document front surface magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan)
1 - 99 50
E SPFB(MAIN) RSPF document back surface magnification ratio adjustment (Main scan)
1 - 99 50
F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back surface magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan)
1 - 99 50
SPF (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio (Front surface)
SPFB (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio (Back surface)
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 33
ADJ 14 Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)
NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automaticadjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute thisadjustment.In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when asatisfactory result is not obtained from the automaticadjustment (ADJ 3).
14-A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.* When a U2 trouble occurs.* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the
adjustment mode (document table).
2) Check the copy image center position.If A - B = 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the followingprocedures.
3) Enter the SIM 50-12 mode.
4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
The entered value is set.When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi-tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
6) Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.Repeat the procedures of 1) - 6) until the above condition is satis-fied.
14-B Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the scan control PWB is replaced.* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.* When U2 trouble occurs.* When the RSPF section is disassembled.* When the RSPF unit is replaced.
CAUTION: To execute this adjustment, it is required that the ADJ14A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document tablemode) must have been properly adjusted.
1) Prepare the adjustment chart.Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back sur-face of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transportdirection.
B
A = B
A
B'
A' - B' = 1.0mm
A'
(100%)
Paper transport direction
Front surface Back surface
Draw a line at the center of the
front surface and the back surface
of paper in parallel with the paper
transport direction.
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 34
2) Set the adjustment chart to the RSPF.3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the
manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on thefront surface and the back surface of the copy paper.
If the difference is within the range of 0 2.7mmm there is noneed to perform the adjustment.If the adjustment is required, perform the following procedures.
4) Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode.
SIM50-12
A - C: When the adjustment value is increased, the imageposition is shifted to the rear frame side.1step = 0.1mm
SIM50-6
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scantiming is delayed.
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, theimage loss is increased.
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change* The SPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for
countermeasures against the case when shades areproduced.
5) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.
SIM50-12
SIM50-6
6) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)(When the adjustment value is increased, the print image isshifted to the rear.)
Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result isobtained.
Item Display Content Setting range
Default value
A OC Document table image off-center adjustment
1 - 99 50
B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off-center adjustment
1 - 99 50
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off-center adjustment
1 - 99 50
original copya
b
SIM50-12
SIM50-6
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A SIDE1 Front surface document scan position adjustment (CCD)
1 - 99 50
B SIDE2 Back surface document scan position adjustment (CCD)
1 - 99 50
C Image loss amount setting SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)
Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting
0 - 99 20
D FRONT_REAR (SIDE1)
Front surface side image loss amount setting
0 - 99 20
E TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1)
Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting
0 - 99 40
F Image loss amount setting SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)
Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting
0 - 99 20
G FRONT_REAR (SIDE2)
Back surface side image loss amount setting
0 - 99 20
H TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2)
Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting
0 - 99 40
I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface document off-center adjustment
1 - 99 50
J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back surface document off-center adjustment
1 - 99 50
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document front surface magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan)
1 - 99 50
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document back surface magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan)
1 - 99 50
SPF(SIDE1) Front surface modeSPF(SIDE2) Back surface mode
OFFSET SPF1 Front surface modeOFFSET SPF2 Back surface mode
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 35
ADJ 15 Copy image position and image loss adjustment (Manual adjustment)
NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automaticadjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute thisadjustment.In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when asatisfactory result is not obtained from the automaticadjustment (ADJ 3).
15-A Copy image position, image loss, and void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.* When the LSU is replaced or removed.* When the registration roller section is disassembled.* U2 trouble has occurred.* The PCU PWB has been replaced.* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm thatthe ADJ 3 Print engine image skew, image position, imagemagnification ratio, void area adjustments has been com-pleted normally.
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figurebelow.Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning directionand that its lead edge is in contact with the document guideplate.Place white paper on the document table so that the scale leadedge can be seen.
2) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode.
3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A Lead edge adjust-ment value
RRCA Document lead edge reference position (OC)
0 - 99 50
B RRCB-CS12 Regis-tration motor ON timing adjust-ment
Standard Tray
1 - 99 50
C RRCB-DSK Desk 1 - 99 50D RRCB-MFT Manual
paper feed1 - 99 50
E RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
F Image loss area setting value
LEAD Lead edge image loss area setting
0 - 99 40
G SIDE Side image loss area adjustment
0 - 99 20
H Void area adjust-ment
DENA Lead edge void area adjustment
1 - 99 30
I DENB Rear edge void area adjustment
1 - 99 30
J FRONT/REAR
FRONT/REAR void area adjustment
1 - 99 20
K Off-center adjust-ment
OFFSET_OC
OC document off-center adjustment
1 - 99 50
L Magnifi-cation ratio correction
SCAN_SPEED_OC
SCAN sub scanning magnification ratio adjustment (CCD)
1 - 99 50
M Sub scanning direction print area correction value
DENB-MFT Manual feed correction value
1 - 99 57
N DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction value
1 - 99 50
O DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction value
1 - 99 57
P DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction value
1 - 99 57
OK
10-key
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 36
4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.Shift to the copy mode, and make a copy at each of 100% and200% in the document table mode.When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edgeimage from 4.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200%copy scale.If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 4.0mm is not copiedin either of different copy magnification ratios.)Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result isobtained.
5) Image loss adjustmentWhen the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to thedefault value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not inthe below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value,change these adjustment items.
Void area: 4.0mm, Image loss: 4.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss isincreased. When the adjustment value is decreased, theimage loss is decreased.When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area ischanged by 0.1mm.
15-B Image scanning position adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the scan control PWB is replaced.* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.* When U2 trouble occurs.* When the RSPF section is disassembled.* When the RSPF unit is replaced.This simulation is to adjust the scanning position when scanning inthe RSPF mode.If this adjustment is made improperly, the scanner stop position isshifted from the specified position and a shade of the documenttable may be reflected on the lead edge section of the scan imagein the RSPF mode.1) Make a copy in the RSPF mode, and check for any shade on
the lead edge section of the copy image.
If there is any shade of the document table on the lead edgesection of the copy image, perform the following procedures.
2) Enter the SIM 53-8 mode, and press [MANUAL] key.
3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.When the set value is increased, the distance from the homeposition to the RSPF scanning position is increased. When theset value is changed by 1, the scanning position is changed by0.1mm.
Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result isobtained.
CAUTION: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to executeADJ 15C Copy image position, image loss, void areaadjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode).
Q Sub scanning direction print area correction value
DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction value
1 - 99 57
R DENB-ADU ADU correction value
1 - 99 60
S DENB-HV Heavy paper correction value
1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content Adjustment
range
De-fault value
Standard adjustment
valueLEAD Image loss
adjustmentLead edge image loss adjustment
0 - 99 40 4.0 1.0mm
SIDE Side image loss adjustment
0 - 99 20 2.0 1.0mm
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
5mm
5mm 10mm
100%
200%
Paper leadedge
Scale image 4.0mm position
5mm 10mm4321
Paper lead edge
Maginification ratio : 400%Copy area
Image area
Papar lead edge
Shadow image of RSPF
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 37
15-C Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the scan control PWB is replaced.* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.* When U2 trouble occurs.* When the RSPF section is disassembled.* When the RSPF unit is replaced.
a. Adjustment procedures
1) Prepare the adjustment chart.The adjustment chart can be made by the following proce-dures.Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper and draw arrow marks vertically andhorizontally on the front and the back surfaces.At the same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge,the front end, and the rear end as well as the identificationmarks of the front surface and the back surface.
2) Enter the SIM 50-6 mode.
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing is delayed.
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, theimage loss is increased.
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change* The RSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for coun-
termeasures against the case when shades are produced.
F
L
R
FACE
BACK
R
T
F
L T
Front surface
Back surface
Draw arrows.
Draw arrows.
Put the position
marks.
Put the position
marks.
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A SIDE1 Front surface document scan position adjustment (CCD)
1 - 99 50
B SIDE2 Back surface document scan position adjustment (CCD)
1 - 99 50
C Image loss amount setting SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)
Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting
0 - 99 20
D FRONT_REAR (SIDE1)
Front surface side image loss amount setting
0 - 99 20
E TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1)
Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting
0 - 99 40
F Image loss amount setting SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)
Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting
0 - 99 20
G FRONT_REAR (SIDE2)
Back surface side image loss amount setting
0 - 99 20
H TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2)
Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting
0 - 99 40
I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface document off-center adjustment
1 - 99 50
J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back surface document off-center adjustment
1 - 99 50
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document front surface magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan)
1 - 99 50
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document back surface magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan)
1 - 99 50
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 38
Lead edge image loss adjustment
1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE(SIDE1/SIDE2) on the front surface and the back surface tothe following values.(Standard set value)TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1):
40 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface)TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2):
40 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface)(When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss isincreased.)(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
2) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check toconfirm that the lead edge image loss is within 4.0 1.0mm onthe front surface and the back surface. The paper lead edgemust be aligned with the presumed image lead edge.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the followingprocedure.
3) Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, andpress [OK] key.Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the pre-sumed image lead edge.SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustmentSIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment(When the adjustment value is increased, the print image posi-tion is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.)(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
Perform the procedures of 2) - 3) until a satisfactory result isobtained.
Rear edge image loss adjustment
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check toconfirm that the rear edge image loss is 2.0 - 5.0mm on thefront surface and the back surface.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the followingprocedure.
2) Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2)with 10-key, and press [OK] key.TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1):
Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Front surface)TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2):
Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Back surface)(When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge imageloss is increased.)(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result isobtained.
Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check toconfirm that the image losses on the front frame side and therear frame side are 2.0 2.0mm on the front surface and theback surface.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the followingprocedure.
2) Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) /FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2), and press [OK] key.FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1):
Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Front surface)FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2):
Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Back surface)(When the adjustment value is increased, the front/rear imageloss is increased.)(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result isobtained.
Paper lead edge
Copy image
Image loss
4.0 1.0mm
The paper lead edge must be aligned with
the image lead edge.
Paper rear edge
Copy image
Image loss 2.0 - 5.0mm
Paper F
side edge
Paper R
side edge
Copy image
Copy image
Image loss
2.0 2.0mm
Image loss
2.0 2.0mm
MX-M264U ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 39
ADJ 16 Finisher adjustments (alignment, staple position)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:* When the finisher is disassembled.* When the finisher control PWB is replaced.* When the alignment is improper.* When the staple position is shifted.1) Enter the SIM 3-10 mode.
2) Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key.
Inner finisher
3) Enter an adjustment value and press [OK] key.4) Cancel the simulation, make a copy in the mode including the
adjustment target, and check the adjustment result.
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A FPAM ADJUST Alignment width adjustment 40 - 60 50B FDRLM ADJUST Paper exit roller descending
position adjustment40 - 60 50
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 1
MX-M264U[6] SIMULATION
1. General and purposeThe simulation mode has the following functions, to display themachine operating status, identify the trouble position and causesin an earlier stage, and to efficiently setup and adjust the machinefor improved serviceability.1) Various adjustments2) Setting of the specifications and functions3) Canceling troubles4) Operation check5) Counters check, setting, clear6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data
check, clear.7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
transport.The operating procedures and displays depend on the design ofthe operation panel of the machine.
2. Starting the simulationEntering the simulation mode1) Machine in Copy mode: Select Program key Asterisk (*) key
Clear key Asterisk (*) key Ready for input of maincode of simulation.
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key START key ON.Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel.
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key START key ON.4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simu-lation operation.To cancel the current simulation mode and change the maincode and the sub code, press [SYSTEM SETTING] key.
Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode1) Press [CA] key.
CAUTION: Do not turn OFF the power when the machine is in thesimulation mode.If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simula-tion mode, a malfunction may be result. In this case,turn OFF/ON the main power source.
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 2
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NOYES
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
Standby for entry of SIMsub code
Enter SIM sub code withthe 10-key.
Press the START key.
The display is made accordingto the selected mode and the item.
START (Copy mode)
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the Program key.
Standby for entry ofSIM code.
Enter the main code ofSIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIMis displayed.
Press the START key.
Is there a sub code ?
Select the mode and theitem with the scroll key
and the item key.
Operation check ?
Operating conditionscheck ?
Data clear ?
Adjustmentsor setting (counter data
change) ?
Do youwant to change the
content ?
Enter the new setting andadjustment values.
Press the SYSTEMSETTINGS key
Press the SYSTEMSETTINGS key
Press the EXECUTE keyand OK key.
Operation is made accordingto the selected mode and item.
Press the EXECUTE keyand OK key.
Press the EXECUTE keyand OK key.
The display is made according tothe selected some and the item.
Press the EXECUTE keyand OK key.
Is it the samesimulation main
code?
Do you wantto perform another
simulation ?
Do youwant to end thesimulation ?
The changed contentis stored.
The simulation modeis canceled.
Press the clear all key.
Operation is made accordingto the selected mode and the item.
(Other modes)
The selected mode andthe item are cleared.
<Exclusion type>
You have to exit
simulation mode
before entering into
this mode for self
printing type.
In the power OFF/ON type
simulation, OFF/ON
message is
displayed by the
SYSTEM
SETTINGS key.
If there is no item.
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 3
3. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Functions Section1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner (reading)5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. RSPF2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the automatic document feeder section
and the control circuits.RSPF
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. RSPF3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk, and the control circuit of those. Desk3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk, and the control circuit of those. Desk5 Used to check the operations of the paper feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC). Desk
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation panel2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the control circuits.
Paper transport/Paper exit section
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Others90 Used to reset the machine to the factory setting. (The scanner is set to the lock enable position) Scanner
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Others6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.8 Used to display the warm-up time.12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) RSPF
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control circuit.
Process (Developing)
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the control circuit.
Process (Charging)
6 Used to check the output of the transfer charger output voltage. Process (Transport)9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse section (duplex section)
and its control circuit.Duplex
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control circuit. Duplex10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit. Process (Developing)13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.14 - Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5 troubles.16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB17 - Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the
maintenance timing.)2 Used to check the total number of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)3 Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position.
* Presumption of the faulty point by this data is possible.4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Firmware6 Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version, and
the counter list.8 Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, ADU10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).11 Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX 12 Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position.
(When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)RSPF
13 Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge) and the fusing unit
Process
14 Used to display the use status of the toner cartridge. Process18 Used to display the user data delete history.19 Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.40 Used to display the error code list and the contents.90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of troubles of misfeed is considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)
80 Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the paper feed section and the paper transport section.
Paper feed, Paper transport
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 4
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.3 Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)5 Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the counter.)6 Used to clear the copy counter.9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)12 Used to clear the document filing counter value.15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.30 Used to initialize the administrator (Admin) password.31 Used to initialize the service mode password.35 Used to clear the toner cartridge use status data.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Process (Developing section)2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing)4 Used to display the operation data of the toner correction quantity. (Not used in the market.) Process
26 1 Used to set Yes/No of installation of the job separator. Paper exit2 Used to set the paper size of the paper feed tray.
(When the paper size is changed, this simulation must be executed to change the paper size in software.)Paper feed
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. (Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.)
Auditor
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size)6 Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards).
(For slow start to drive the fusing heater lamp)32 Used to set the special functions.35 Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There
are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.38 Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.50 Used to set functions.51 Used to set the specifications of the serial port operation. (For PCI)52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.56 Used to set ON/OFF of the Life Correction.65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode.69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.73 Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.79 Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display of user data delete result.
27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)5 Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.)
(FSS function)Communication (RIC/MODEM)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)7 Used to set of the enable, alert callout. (FSS function)9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment retry
number. (FSS function)10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number
history. (FSS function)13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.15 Used to display the FSS connection status.16 Used to set the FSS alert send.17 Used to set the FSS paper order alert.18 Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry counter.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and the control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control circuits.
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
Main Sub Functions Section
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 5
43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.4 Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each mode.10 Used to set the postcard feed cycle20 Used to perform the low-temperature, low-humidity (L/L) environment correction for the fusing temperature
setting of each paper (SIM43-01).22 Used to perform the low-temperature, low-humidity (L/L) environment correction for the fusing temperature
setting of each paper (SIM43-04).44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Process (OPC drum,
development)/Fusing/LSU43 Used to display the identification information of the developing unit. Developing system
46 2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.9 Used to adjust the scan image density.19 Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode
documents.30 Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode.32 Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.37 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of monochrome mode color.39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).60 Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.62 Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and
the auto exposure mode.63 Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.
48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning direction).
5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Scanner section49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.5 Used to perform the watermark update.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment2 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (This simulation is a simplified version of SIM
50-1.)5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (RSPF mode) RSPF7 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (RSPF mode).
(This simulation is a simplified version of SIM 50-6.)RSPF
10 Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position. (The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment. (The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio.
51 2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the RSPF registration roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image position on the paper or when paper jams frequently occur.)
9 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the separation voltage.53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the RSPF document size width sensor.8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the RSPF mode document scan position.
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)10 Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan only)
Main Sub Functions Section
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 6
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SD Card, and HDD (including user authentication data and
address data) to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.)3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.5 Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB memory in the TEXT format.11 Used to save the data in the SD card to the HDD temporarily.12 Used to copy the SD card data saved temporarily in the HDD with SIM56-11 to the machine.
60 1 Used to check the memory operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB.61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Used to set the laser power 62 1 Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and the watermark data)
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.8 Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Excluding the Operation Manual, the watermark data, and the system
area)10 Used to clear the job completion list data.11 Used to delete the document filing data.12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.13 Used to format the hard disk. (Operation Manual, watermark data only)14 Used to initialize (remake) only the database file of the HDD. HDD
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner2 Used to perform shading.3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density.5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting.
64 2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)4 Printer test print. (Self print)5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation panel section2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.5 Used to check the operation panel key input.
66 1 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2 - 150) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while checking with the LCD.
FAX
2 Used to enter a country code and set the default value for the country code. FAX3 Used to check read/write of the EEPROM and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller and display the result. FAX4 Used to send the selected signals to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: max.) FAX5 Used to send the selected signal to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting)
(For the kinds of send signals, refer to SIM66-04.)FAX
6 Used to print the confidential registration check table (BOX NO., BOX name, passcode. (If there is no confidential registration, no print is made.)
FAX
7 Used to output all image data saved in the image memory. (Confidential data are also outputted.) FAX8 Used to send the selected sound messages to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX9 Used to send the selected sound message to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting)
* For details of sound messages, refer to the sound message table of SIM66-08.FAX
10 Used to clear the FAX and image send image data. (The confidential data are also cleared.) FAX11 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX12 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting)
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps, refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal table.FAX
13 Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be registered.) FAX14 Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX15 Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX16 Used to execute the DTFM signal send test and to adjust the send level. FAX17 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX18 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX21 Used to print the selected items (system error, protocol monitor). FAX22 Used to set the handset sound volume. (This simulation can be executed even though the handset setting
is set to NO. When, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume cannot be checked.) (Japan model only)
FAX
24 Used to clear the FAST save data. FAX29 Used to initialize the telephone book data (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/Desktop expansion
table, the group expansion table, the program registration table, the interface memory box table, the meta data, InboundRouting, and the DocumentAdmin table).
FAX
30 Used to display the TEL/LIU status change, The display is highlighted by status change. FAX31 Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to TEL/LIU. FAX32 Used to check the fixed data received from the line and to display the result. FAX33 Used to execute detection of various signals with the line connected and to display the detection result.
When a signal is detected, the display is highlighted.FAX
Main Sub Functions Section
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 7
4. Details of simulation
1
1-1Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
(reading) unit and the control circuit.Section Scanner (reading)Operation/Procedure1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to thescan resolution (operation speed).
1-2Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner
(reading) section and the related circuits.Section Scanner (reading)Operation/ProcedureThe operating status of the sensor is displayed.When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi-tion.
1-5Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
(reading) unit and the control circuit.Section Scanner (reading)Operation/Procedure1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scanresolution (operation speed).When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
2
2-1Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto-
matic document feeder and the control cir-cuit.
Section RSPFOperation/Procedure1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-ations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (oper-ation speed).When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
66 34 Used to execute the send test and display the time required for sending image data in the test. Used to execute send test and display. (Unit: ms)
FAX
36 Used to check send and receive data from the MODEM controller to the MFP controller or the data line or the command line individually.
FAX
39 Used to check and change the destination setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX. FAX42 Used to rewrite the program to power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX43 Used to write the adjustment value into the power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX61 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while
checking with the LCD.FAX
62 Used to import the FAX receive data into a USB memory in PDF file type. FAX67 17 Printer reset Printer
45 Used to adjust the printer image filter and trapping. Printer
Main Sub Functions Section
Item/Display Operation mode Default valueOC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI
(346.0mm/s)300DPI (346.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (173.0mm/s)
1200DPI 1200DPI (86.5mm/s)
Item/Display Operation mode Default valueOC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI
(346.0mm/s)300DPI (346.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (173.0mm/s)
1200DPI 1200DPI (86.5mm/s)
Item/Display Operation mode Default value (SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI
(259.5mm/s)300DPI (259.5mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (173.0 mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI (259.5mm/s)
300DPI (259.5mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (173.0 mm/s)
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 8
2-2Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and the detectors in the automaticdocument feeder section and the controlcircuits.
Section RSPFOperation/ProcedureThe operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-played.The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are activeare highlighted.
CAUTION: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.
2-3Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
in the automatic document feeder and thecontrol circuit.
Section RSPFOperation/Procedure1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel
key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load performs the operation.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
3
3-2Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and the detectors in the finisher andthe control circuit.
Section FinisherOperation/ProcedureThe operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-played.The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are activeare highlighted.
Inner finisher (MX-FN23)
3-3Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in
the finisher and the control circuit.Section FinisherOperation/Procedure1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load performs the operation.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Inner finisher (MX-FN23)
Display ContentSPED SPF document empty sensorSPPD1 SPF primary paper transport sensorSPLS1 SPF document length sensor 1SPLS2 SPF document length sensor 2SOCD RSPF open/close sensorSPPD2 SPF secondary paper transport sensorSPPD3 SPF scan front sensorSPPD4 SPF scan rear sensorSCOV RSPF cover open/close detectorSSET SPF installation detectionSTMPU SPF stamp UN installation detectionSWD_LEN SPF document guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm)SWD_AD SPF document detection volume output AD value
Display ContentSPUM_F RSPF paper feed motor (normal rotation)SPUM_R RSPF paper feed motor (reverse rotation)SPFM_F RSPF transport motor (normal rotation)SPFM_R RSPF transport motor (reverse rotation)SPRS Pressure release solenoid (RSPF)SRRC Registration roller clutch (RSPF)STMPS Stamp solenoid
Display ContentFAPHPS_F Paper alignment plate HP sensor FFAPHPS_R Paper alignment plate HP sensor RFDRPS Paper exit roller position sensorFDTLLS Paper exit tray lower limit sensorFDTPD Delivery tray paper detectorFPHPS Punch unit home position sensorFPLD Paper height detectorFPLS Paper surface sensor auxiliary detectorFPMRS Punch motor rotation sensorFPPD1 Paper entry detectorFPRD Compiler paper rear edge detector CFSED Staple empty detectorFSHPS Staple HP sensorFSLD Staple lead edge detectorFSSW Safety switchFSTPD Staple tray paper detectorFTPS Tray position sensor
Display ContentFCF Cooling fanFDRLM Paper exit roller lift motorFPAM_F Paper alignment motor FFPAM_R Paper alignment motor RFPDM Paper exit motorFPGS Paper gate solenoidFPS Paddle solenoidFPTM Paper transport motorFSL Illumination of the staple unitFSM Staple motorFTLM Tray lift motor
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 9
3-10Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.Section FinisherOperation/Procedure1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Inner finisher (MX-FN23)
4
4-2Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and detectors in the desk, and thecontrol circuit of those.
Section DeskOperation/ProcedureThe operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-played.The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are activeare highlighted.
Desk
4-3Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
in the desk, and the control circuit of those.Section DeskOperation/Procedure1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
touch panel key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load performs the operation.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Desk
4-5Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the paper
feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC).Section DeskOperation/ProcedureCheck the ON operationPress the button of the code name for checking the ON operation.Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button onthe display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is nothighlighted.Check the OFF operationPress the highlighted button which is ON.When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the displayreturns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighteddisplay is maintained.
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
Change when the adjustment value is increased or decreased
Change when the adjustment value is changed by 1
A FPAM ADJUST Paper alignment width adjustment
40 - 60 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the width of the alignment plate F/R during alignment operation is decreased.When the adjustment value is decreased, the width of the alignment plate F/R during alignment operation is increased.
0.419mm
B FDRLM ADJUST Paper exit roller descending position adjustment
40 - 60 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the descending position of the paper exit roller is shifted to the compression side.When the adjustment value is decreased, the descending position of the paper exit roller is shifted to the decompression side.
0.13mm
Display ContentC3PFD Cassette 3 paper entry sensorC3LUD Cassette 3 paper upper limit sensorC3PED Cassette 3 paper empty sensorC3SS Cassette 3 installation sensorDSW_C3 Cassette 3 door open/close sensorC4PFD Cassette 4 paper entry sensorC4LUD Cassette 4 paper upper limit sensorC4PED Cassette 4 paper empty sensorC4SS Cassette 4 installation sensorDSW_C4 Cassette 4 door open/close sensor
Display ContentCPFM Desk motorPTRC1 Desk vertical transport clutchC3LUM Cassette 3 lift-up motorC3PUC Cassette 3 paper feed clutchC3PUS Cassette 3 paper feed solenoidC4LUM Cassette 3 lift-up motorC4PUC Cassette 4 paper feed clutchC4PUS Cassette 4 paper feed solenoid
Button ContentDTRC Desk transport clutch
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 10
5
5-1Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-cuit.
Section Operation panelOperation/ProcedureThe LCD is changed as shown below.The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX MIN the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status arechecked.
5-2Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater
lamp and the control circuit.Section FusingOperation/Procedure1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
5-3Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
lamp and the control circuit.Section Scanner (reading)Operation/Procedure1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
6
6-1Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
the paper transport system (clutches andsolenoids) and the control circuits.
Section Paper transport/Paper exit sectionOperation/Procedure1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load performs the operation.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Load operation check methodThe load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operationsound.
*1: If "Normal rotation" and "Reverse rotation" of a same load aredisplayed as different items, when the both are selected at thesame time, "Normal rotation" is performed. In addition, achange in the rotating direction is accepted only when theoperation is stopped.
HL_UM Main heater lamp (F) (Paper surface heat roller)HL_US Sub heater lamp (F) (Paper surface heat roller)
SIMULATION NO.05-01TEST
SIMULATION NO.05-01TEST
Section Item/Display ContentTransport/process
MM Main motorPOM_F*1 Paper exit reverse motor (normal rotation)POM_R*1 Paper exit reverse motor (reverse
rotation)OSM Shifter motorPTRC2 Vertical transport clutch 2CSRRC PS clutchPSPS Process separation pawl solenoidPOGS1 Paper exit gate solenoidPOGS2 Right paper exit keep solenoid
Paper feed C1LUM Cassette 1 lift-up motorC1PUC Cassette 1 paper feed clutchC1PUS Cassette 1 paper feed solenoidC2LUM Cassette 2 lift-up motorC2PUC Cassette 2 paper feed clutchC2PUS Cassette 2 paper feed solenoidMPFS Manual feed take-up solenoid
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 11
6-2Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan
motor and its control circuit.Section OthersOperation/Procedure1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load performs the operation.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Load operation check methodThe load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operationsound.
6-90Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to reset the machine to the factory
setting. (The scanner is set to the lockenable position)
Section ScannerOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The scanner is shifted to the lock enable position and stopped.
7
7-1Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
aging.Section OthersOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
7-6Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging
cycle.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10-
key.2) Press [OK] key.
The time entered in procedure 1) is set.* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec).
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
7-8Purpose Operation displayFunction (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.SectionOperation/ProcedurePress [EXECUTE] key.Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required forwarm-up is displayed* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
7-12Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets
setting (for aging operation)Section RSPFOperation/Procedure1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key.
(Setting range: 0 - 255)2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
Display ContentPOFM Paper exit cooling fan motor
(Drives POFM1 and POFM2 at the same time.)PSFM Power cooling fan motorFUFM Fusing fan motor
AGING Aging operation setupINTERVAL Intermittent operation settingMISFEED DISABLE JAM detection ignoring settingFUSING DISABLE Fusing unit ignoring settingWARMUP DISABLE Warming up ignoring settingDV CHECK DISABLE Developing unit ignoring settingSHADING DISABLE Shading correction operation omitting settingCCD GAIN FREE CCD gain adjustment omitting setting
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 12
8
8-1Purpose Operation test/check/adjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
the developing voltage in each print modeand the control circuit.
Section Process (Developing)Operation/Procedure1) Select a mode with [TS_OFF] and [TS_ON] keys on the touch
panel.2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.3) Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the
label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) isoutput for 30 sec.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
8-2Purpose Operation test/check/adjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the main charger grid voltage in eachprinter mode and the control circuit.
Section Process (Charging)Operation/Procedure1) Select a mode with [TS_OFF] and [TS_ON] keys on the touch
panel.2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified
on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) isoutput for 30 sec.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Item/Display (Mode) Content Adjustment range
Default value
TS_OFF A COPY DVB
Developing bias set value in a copy job (Toner save mode OFF)
0 - 650 450
B PRINTER FAX DVB
Developing bias set value in a PRINT/FAX job (Toner save mode OFF)
0 - 650 450
TS_ON A COPY DVB
Developing bias set value in a copy job (Toner save mode ON)
0 - 650 320
B PRINTER DVB
Developing bias set value in a print job (Toner save mode ON)
0 - 650 250
Item/Display (Mode) Content Adjustment range
Default value
TS_OFF A COPY GB
Charging/grid bias set value in a copy job (Toner save mode OFF)
0 - 750 590
B PRINTER FAX GB
Charging/grid bias set value in a PRINT/FAX job (Toner save mode OFF)
0 - 750 590
TS_ON A COPY GB
Charging/grid bias set value in a copy job (Toner save mode ON)
0 - 750 460
B PRINTER GB
Charging/grid bias set value in a print job (Toner save mode ON)
0 - 750 390
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 13
8-6Purpose Operation test/check/adjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to check the output of the transfer
charger output voltage.Section Process (Transport)Operation/Procedure1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to theset value is output for 30 sec. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value26cpm
machine31cpm
machine35cpm
machineA +V1 F Transfer
bias reference value
Standard paper
W Between papers
Single A-1: W, +V1 F (Between papers), Standard paper front surface (Single/Duplex)
0 - 255 5 5 5
B +V1 R Duplex A-2: W, +V1 R (Between papers), Standard paper back surface (Duplex)
0 - 255 5 5 5
C +V2 F Paper Single A-3: W, +V2 F, Standard paper front surface (Single/Duplex)
0 - 255 14 18 20
D +V2 R Duplex A-4: W, +V2 R, Standard paper back surface (Duplex)
0 - 255 12 16 14
E +V1 S-F Standard paper
N1jp Between papers
Single B-1: N1jp, +V1 S-F (Between papers), Standard paper front surface (Single/Duplex)
0 - 255 5 5 5
F +V1 S-R Duplex B-2: N1jp, +V1 S-R (Between papers), Standard paper back surface (Duplex)
0 - 255 5 5 5
G +V2 S-F Paper Single B-3: N1jp, +V2 S-F, Standard paper front surface (Single/Duplex)
0 - 255 14 18 20
H +V2 S-F Duplex B-4: N1jp, +V2 S-F, Standard paper back surface (Duplex)
0 - 255 14 18 20
I +V1 XS-F Standard paper
N2jp Between papers
Single C-1: N2jp, +V1 XS-F (Between papers), Standard paper front surface (Single/Duplex)
0 - 255 5 5 5
J +V1 XS-R Duplex C-2: N2jp, +V1 XS-R (Between papers), Standard paper back surface (Duplex)
0 - 255 5 5 5
K +V2 XS-F Paper Single C-3: N2jp, +V2 XS-F, Standard paper front surface (Single/Duplex)
0 - 255 14 18 20
L +V2 XS-R Duplex C-4: N2jp, +V2 XS-R, Standard paper back surface (Duplex)
0 - 255 14 18 20
M +V1 THICK Heavy paper
>LTR Between papers D-1: > LTR, +V1 THICK (Between papers), Heavy paper
0 - 255 5 5 5
N +V2 THICK Paper D-2: > LTR, +V2 THICK, Heavy paper
0 - 255 10 14 16
O +V1 THICK S LTR Between papers E-1: LTR, +V1 THICK S (Between papers), Heavy paper
0 - 255 5 5 5
P +V2 THICK S Paper E-2: LTR, +V2 THICK S, Heavy paper
0 - 255 12 14 16
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 14
9
9-2Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and detectors in the paper reversesection (duplex section) and its control cir-cuit.
Section DuplexOperation/ProcedureThe operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-played.The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are activeare highlighted.
9-3Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
the paper reverse section (duplex section)and its control circuit.
Section DuplexOperation/Procedure1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load performs the operation.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Q +V1 THIN Transfer bias reference value
Thin paper
>LTR Between papers D-7: > LTR, +V1 THIN (Between papers), Thin paper
0 - 255 5 5 5
R +V2 THIN Paper D-8: > LTR, +V2 THIN, Thin paper
0 - 255 12 18 20
S +V1 THIN S LTR Between papers E-7: LTR, +V1 THIN S (Between papers), Thin paper
0 - 255 5 5 5
T +V2 THIN S Paper E-8: LTR, +V2 THIN S, Thin paper
0 - 255 12 18 20
U +V1 LABEL Label sheet
>LTR Between papers D-3: LTR, +V1 LABEL (Between papers), Label sheet
0 - 255 5 5 5
V +V2 LABEL Paper D-4: > LTR, +V2 LABEL, Label sheet
0 - 255 12 18 20
W +V1 LABEL S LTR Between papers E-3: LTR, +V1 LABEL S (Between papers), Label sheet
0 - 255 5 5 5
X +V2 LABEL S Paper E-4: LTR, +V2 LABEL S, Label sheet
0 - 255 12 14 16
Y +V1 OHP OHP >LTR Between papers D-5: > LTR, +V1 OHP (Between papers), OHP
0 - 255 5 5 5
Z +V2 OHP Paper D-6: > LTR, +V2 OHP, OHP
0 - 255 8 14 16
AA +V1 OHP S LTR Between papers E-5: LTR, +V1 OHP S (Between papers), OHP
0 - 255 5 5 5
AB +V2 OHP S Paper E-6: LTR, +V2 OHP S, OHP
0 - 255 12 18 20
AC +V1 POSTCARD Postcard/Envelope
>100mm Between papers D-9: > 100mm, +V1 POSTCARD (Between papers), Postcard/Envelope
0 - 255 5 5 5
AD +V2 POSTCARD Paper D-10: > 100mm, +V2 POSTCARD, Postcard/Envelope
0 - 255 16 26 26
AE +V1 POSTCARD S 100mm Between papers E-9: 100mm, +V1 POSTCARD S (Between papers), Postcard/Envelope
0 - 255 5 5 5
AF +V2 POSTCARD S Paper E-10: 100mm, +V2 POSTCARD S, Postcard/Envelope
0 - 255 16 26 26
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value26cpm
machine31cpm
machine35cpm
machine
Display ContentAPPD1 ADU paper transport detector 1
Display ContentADUM ADU motor
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 15
10
10-1Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
supply mechanism (toner motor) and therelated circuit.
Section Process (Developing)Operation/Procedure1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
CAUTION: This simulation must be executed without installing thetoner cartridges.If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridgesinstalled, toner will be forcibly supplied to the develop-ing unit, resulting in overtoner.If this simulation is erroneously executed with the tonercartridges installed, overtoner state may be deleted bymaking a few black background copy in the copy mode.
13
13--Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
14
14--Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5
troubles.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
16
16--Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.Section MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWBOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
17
17--Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
21
21-1Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.SectionOperation/Procedure* Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance
counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing clean-ing roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may notclarify.
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touchpanel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Display ContentTNM Toner motor
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A MAINTENANCE COUNTER (TOTAL)
Maintenance counter (Total)
0:Default1 – 300: 1K – 300K999: Free
26CPM: 75K31/35CPM: 100K
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 16
22
22-1Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/
CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each
section and each operation mode. (Used to check the maintenance timing.)
SectionOperation/ProcedureChange the display page with scroll key on the touch panel.
22-2Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the total number of misfeed
and troubles. (When the number of totaljam is considerably great, it is judged asnecessary for repair.)
SectionOperation/ProcedureThe paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
22-3Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the
misfeed count of each position. * Presumption of the faulty point by thisdata is possible.
SectionOperation/ProcedureThe paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest oneup to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
22-4Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his-
tory.SectionOperation/ProcedureThe trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.(The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
22-5Purpose OthersFunction (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each
unit (section).Section FirmwareOperation/ProcedureThe ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed.When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation tocheck the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.
22-6Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to output the setting/adjustment data
(simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), thefirmware version, and the counter list.
SectionOperation/Procedure* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
1) Select the print list mode with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step1).
Item Display ContentTotal output quantity
TOTAL OUT Total output quantity of black and white
All prints including jams
Total use quantity
TOTAL Total use quantity of black and white
Effective paper (including self print, excluding jams)
Copy COPY Black and white copy counter
Billing target (excluding self print)
Print PRINT Black and white print counter
Billing target (excluding self print)
Document filing
DOC FIL Black and white document filing print counter
Billing target (excluding self print)
Other OTHER Black and white other counter
Self print quantity
PCI PCI OPE-TIME
PCI counter PCI accumulated operation time (H)
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counterRSPF JAM RSPF JAM counterTROUBLE Trouble counter
S/N Serial No. (The codes for November and December are "X" and "Y" respectively.)
ICU (MAIN) ICU (Main section)ICU (BOOT) ICU (Boot section)ICU (SUB) ICU (Sub section) (ARM9)LANGUAGE Language support data versionGRAPHIC Graphic data for LCDPCL (MAIN) PCL (Main section)PCU PCUSCU SCUFAX1 (MAIN) FAX 1-Line (Main section)FINISHER FinisherNIC NICPOWER-CON Power controllerE-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage)
(except 20cpm machine)WATER MARK Watermark (HDD storage)ESCP ESCP font ROMPDL PDL font ROMPCI PCI
Item/Display Print list mode Print content
ADATA PATTERN
1 Firmware version, counter data, etc.
2 Data related to the process control
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 17
22-8Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations
(counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF,and the scan (reading) unit.
SectionOperation/ProcedureThe counter values of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scannerrelated counters are displayed.
22-9Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print
quantity) of each paper feed section.Section Paper feed, ADUOperation/ProcedureThe counter values related to paper feed are displayed.
22-10Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration
(option, internal hardware).SectionOperation/ProcedureThe system configuration is displayed.(The model names of the installed devices and options are dis-played.)
(*) Displayed only in the OSA models.
22-11Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/
receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed)
Section FAX Operation/ProcedureThe values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counterare displayed.
22-12Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions
and the number of misfeed at each posi-tion. (When the number of misfeed is con-siderably great, it can be judged asnecessary for repair.)
Section RSPFOperation/ProcedureThe paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest oneup to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
SPF Document feed quantity (The number of sheets of discharged documents)
SCAN Number of times of scanSTAPLER Staple counterSTAMP Stamp counterCOVER Document cover open/close counterHP_ON Number of scanner HP detectionOC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the scanner lamp
(* hour * minutes)
TRAY1 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 1)TRAY2 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 2)TRAY3 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 3)TRAY4 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 4)MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)ADU ADU paper feed counter (Paper reverse section)
MACHINE MX-M264U Main unitMX-M314UMX-M354UMX-M264NMX-M314NMX-M354N
RSPF MX-RP15 Reversing single pass feederSTANDARD
STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stampDESK MX-DE17 First stage paper feed tray
MX-DE18 Second state paper feed trayFINISHER MX-FN23 Inner finisher
MX-TR11/STANDARD
Job separator
FAX1 MX-FX11 Facsimile expansion kitPRINTER MX-PB15 Printer expansion kit (PCL)
STANDARDPS MX-PK11 PS expansion kit
SECURITY MX-FR37U Data security kit (commercial version)AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration moduleSDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacitySDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacityHDD *****MB Hard disk capacitySD *****MB SD Card capacityNIC STANDARD NICBARCODE MX-PF10 Bar code fontINTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kitACM(*) MX-AMX2 Application communication moduleEAM(*) MX-AMX3 External account modulePCI NOTE PCI generating unit
CONNECTRIGHT TRAY MX-TE10 Paper exit tray unit
FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1)FAX SEND FAX send counterFAX RECEIVED FAX receive counterSEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)SEND TIME FAX send timeRECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 18
22-13Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, tonercartridge) and the fusing unit
Section ProcessOperation/ProcedureThe number of prints and the number of rotations in the processsection are displayed.
22-14Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to display the use status of the toner
cartridge.Section ProcessOperation/ProcedureThe status of the toner cartridge is displayed.
*1: The sum total of LARGE/SMALL is displayed. For the remaining amount, it is common to LARGE/SMALL.*2: Displayed only in the domestic specifications. The remaining amount is not displayed.
22-18Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to display the user data delete history.SectionOperation/ProcedureThe date and time of the user data delete are displayed.
Item/Display Content Counter RPM Number of use days
Life meter (Unit: 1%)
Number of remaining
daysMAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365PRESSURE ROLLER Pressure roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365SEPARATE PAWL Separation pawl Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365CLEANING ROLLER Cleaning roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365TC ROLLER Transfer roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365OZONE FILTER Ozone filter Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365DEVE CTRG(K) Developer cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365DRUM CTRG(K) Drum cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365MAIN CHARGER(K) Main charger K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365DRUM BLADE(K) Drum blade K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365TONER CTRG(K) Toner cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) Not displayed
Display item ContentAccumulated No. of
installed cartridges (Unit)Accumulated No. of near
near end (Unit)Accumulated No. of
end (Unit)Remaining quantity
(Unit: %)INSTALL NN END END RESIDUAL
TONER (K)*1 Toner number counter (K) 0 - 510 0 - 510 0 - 510 0-25%25-50%50-75%75-100%
LARGE*2 Toner number counter (K LARGE)
0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255
SMALL*2 Toner number counter (K SMALL)
Display itemContent
Item name DateSTART Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time
of operation start)END Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time
of operation end)
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 19
22-19Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters
related to the scan - image send.SectionOperation/ProcedureUsed to display the counter value related to the network scannerChange the display with scroll key.
22-40Purpose Error contents displayFunction (Purpose) Used to display the error code list and the
contents.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select the main error code.The sub error code and the contents are displayed.
22-90Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Change the display with scroll key.2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
* When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSKmodel, this setting is invalid.
Item/Display ContentNetwork scanner
NET SCN ORG_B/W
Network scanner document read quantity counter (B/W scan job)
NET SCN ORG_CL
Network scanner document read quantity counter (Color scan job)
Internet FAX
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT
Number of internet FAX output
INTERNET FAX SEND OUTPUT
Number of internet FAX sending page
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE
Number of internet FAX receive
INTERNET FAX SEND
Number of internet FAX send
E-Mail MAIL COUNTER
Number of times of E-MAIL send
FTP FTP COUNTER Number of FTP sendOther SMB SEND Number of SMB send
USB CNT Number of times of USB storageTRIAL MODE_B&C
Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W
SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
SCAN TO HDD_CL
SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)
All setting list (*) ALL CUSTOM SETTING LISTPrinter test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
PCL INTERNAL FONT LISTPCL EXTENDED FONT LISTPS FONT LISTPS KANJI FONT LIST (Japan)PS EXTENDED FONT LISTNIC PAGE
Address registration list (*) INDIVIDUAL LISTGROUP LISTPROGRAM LIST (Output Disable)MEMORY BOX LISTALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
Document filing list (*) DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LISTSystem setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND)ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
Receive rejection number table ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LISTReceive rejection/allow addressdomain table
ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
To E-mailTransfer table list
INBOUND ROUTING LIST
To administrator Transfer list DOCUMENT ADMIN LISTWeb setting list WEB SETTING LISTMeta data set list METADATA SET LIST
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 20
23
23-2Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of
paper jam and misfeed. (If the number oftroubles of misfeed is considerably great,the judgment is made that repair isrequired.)
SectionOperation/ProcedurePress [EXECUTE] key to execute print.The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed.
23-80Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed
and paper transport in the paper feed sec-tion and the paper transport section. Usedto output the list of the operation status ofthe sensor and the detectors in the paperfeed section and the paper transport sec-tion.
Section Paper feed, Paper transportOperation/ProcedureWhen [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed andpaper transport is outputted.Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectorsin the paper feed and transport section.The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of thelatest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed.Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ dependingon the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen-sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ.
*1: The value without unit on the left side of each item on the listhas no relation to the operation timing. It is not used in the market.
24
24-1Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
ble counter. (After completion of mainte-nance, clear the counters.)
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
24-2Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
ber of prints) of each paper feed section.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
24-3Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the
scan (reading) unit counter.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
SECTION Operation content (Trigger name - Detection operation or load operation name)
STANDARD Reference value (ms)CURRENT (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the latest job on the final
paperPREVIOUS (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the second latest job on the
final paperMAXIMUM (*1) Max. operation timing (ms) of all the jobsMINIMUM (*1) Min. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs
MACHINE Machine JAM counterSPF RSPF JAM counterTROUBLE Trouble counter
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counterTRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counterTRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counterTRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counterMFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)ADU ADU paper feed counter
SPF RSPF document feed counter (No. of discharged sheets)
SCAN Scan counterSTAPLER Staple counterSTAMP Stamp counterCOVER Document cover open/close counterHP_ON Number of scanner HP detectionOC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the scanner lamp
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 21
24-4Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the
printer counters of the transport unit andthe fusing unit. (After completion of mainte-nance, clear the counters.)
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
24-5Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. (After
replacement of developer, clear thecounter.)
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
NOTE: The "Developer cartridge life meter" counter displayed inSIM22-13 is not displayed in this simulation, but it iscleared in conjunction with this simulation.
24-6Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
24-9Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter
and the self print mode print counter.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
24-10Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter.
(Only when FAX is installed)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
Item/Display ContentMaintenance MAINTENANCE
ALLMaintenance counter (Total) (Counter)Maintenance counter (Total) (Number of use days)
Fusing FUSING ROLLER
Fusing roller (Counter)Fusing roller (Number of use days)Fusing roller (Accumulated number of rotations)
PRESS ROLLER
Pressure roller (Counter)Pressure roller (Number of use days)Pressure roller (Accumulated number of rotations)
Separation SEPARATE PAWL
Separation pawl (Counter)Separation pawl (Number of use days)Separation pawl (Accumulated number of rotations)
CLEAN ROLLER
Cleaning roller (Counter)Cleaning roller (Number of use days)Cleaning roller (Accumulated number of rotations)
Transfer TC ROLLER Transfer roller (Counter)Transfer roller (Number of use days)Transfer roller (Accumulated number of rotations)
Drum DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge (K) (Counter)Drum cartridge (K) (Number of use days)Drum cartridge (K) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Main charger
MAIN CHARGER K
Main charger (K) (Counter)Main charger (K) (Number of use days)Main charger (K) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Drum blade DRUM BLADE K
Drum blade K (Counter)Drum blade K (Number of use days)Drum blade K (Accumulated number of rotations)
Other OZONE FILTER Ozone filter (Counter)Ozone filter (Number of use days)
KDeveloper cartridge print counter (K)Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (K)Number of day that used developer (Day) K
COPY BW Copy counter (B/W)
PRINT BW Print counter (B/W)OTHER BW Other counter (B/W)
FAX OUTPUT FAX Print quantity counterFAX SEND FAX send counterFAX RECEIVED FAX receive counterSEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counterSEND TIME FAX send timeRECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 22
24-12Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to clear the document filing counter
value.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
24-15Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the
scan mode and the image send.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
24-30Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator (Admin)
password.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.2) Press [YES] key.
The administrator password is initialized.
24-31Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode pass-
word.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.2) Press [YES] key.
Used to initialize the service mode password.
24-35Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to clear the toner cartridge use status
data.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.2) Press [YES] key.The toner cartridge use status data (SIM22-14) are cleared.
25
25-1Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel-
oping section.Section Process (Developing section)Operation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis-played.
DOC FIL (BW) Black-white document filing print counter
Division Item/Display ContentNetwork scanner
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity counter (B/W scan job)
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity counter (COLOR scan job)
Internet Fax
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT
Number of internet FAX output
INTERNET FAX SEND OUTPUT
Number of internet FAX sending page
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE
Number of internet FAX receive
INTERNET FAX SEND
Number of internet FAX send
E-mail MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL sendFTP FTP COUNTER Number of FTP sendOther SMB SEND Number of SMB send
USB CNT Number of times of USB storageTRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR
scan job)SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity
(COLOR)
Sensor name (Display) Sensor nameTCS_K Toner sensor output value (K)
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 23
25-2Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner
density when replacing developer. (Auto-matic adjustment)
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-ing)
Operation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.The developing motor rotates and the toner density sensor makessampling of the toner density, displaying the detected level.After stopping the developing motor, it is set as the reference tonerdensity control level.
CAUTION: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, thereference toner concentration level is not set. Also whenerror code of EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the refer-ence toner density level is not set normally.
CAUTION: Do not execute this simulation except when new devel-oper is supplied. If it is executed in other cases, under-toner or overtone may occur, causing a trouble.
Display during execution of the simulation
Error content
25-4Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the
toner correction quantity. (Not used in themarket.)
Section ProcessOperation/ProcedureThe operation data of the toner supply quantity are displayed.
26
26-1Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set Yes/No of installation of the Job
separator.Section Paper exitOperation/Procedure1) Enter the set value with 10-key.2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)This setting is required to use the Job separator.
26-2Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the paper feed
tray. (When the paper size is changed, thissimulation must be executed to change thepaper size in software.)
Section Paper feedOperation/ProcedureSelect a paper size and a weight system to be changed.
Item/Display Content Display range
Default value
AT DEVE ADJ Automatic development adjustment value
1 - 255 128
Item/Display ContentTCS Toner sensor output value
Display Error name Error contentEE-EL EL abnormality The sensor output level is less than 78.EE-EU EU abnormality The sensor output level exceeds 178.
Item/Display Content Display range
TONER DEN_LT Current toner density sensor output value (final value)
1 - 255
TONER DEN_ST Current toner density reference value display (the value including all the correction values)
1 - 255
AUTO DEVE Automatic development adjustment value
1 - 255
ALL All correction reference value 1 - 255LIFE Life correction value -128 - 127ENV Environment correction value -128 - 127DUPLEX Duplex correction value -128 - 127PRINT RATE Print ratio correction value -128 - 127AREA Area correction value -128 - 127AUTO DEVE AREA Area in the auto development
adjustment-128 - 127
CURRENT AREA Current area -128 - 127
Item/Display ContentA 0 YES Job separator provided
1 NO Job separator not provided
Item Setting value ContentLEGAL SET 0 8.5 x 14
1 8.5 x 13.42 8.5 x 13.5
G/LBS SET 0 GRAM1 LBS
Destination Setting value
LEGAL SET G/LBS SETU.S.A 8.5 x 14 LBSCANADA 8.5 x 14 LBSINCH 8.5 x 14 LBSJAPAN 8.5 x 14 GRAMAB_B 8.5 x 14 GRAMEUROPE 8.5 x 14 GRAMU.K. 8.5 x 14 GRAMAUS. 8.5 x 14 GRAMAB_A 8.5 x 14 GRAMCHINA 8.5 x 14 GRAM
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 24
26-3Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor.
(Setting must be made according to theauditor use conditions.)
Section AuditorOperation/ProcedureSelect an item to be set with the touch panel.
(*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC.(*2) Details of the vendor mode
Details of the vendor mode
Operation 1: Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,which can be changed in the system setting.Operation 2: Auto clear is not made.Operation 3: The display is shifted to the initial screen.
26-5Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total
counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size)
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 23) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Item/Display Content Default value
BUILT-IN AUDITOR
P10 Built-in auditor mode (standard mode) operation.
P10
OUTSIDE AUDITOR
NONE No external connection vendor is used.
NONE
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode (Only the copy mode can be controlled.)
P VENDOR3 Vendor mode in which signals for the intercard connected to the PCU are used for communication in parallel I/F.
P OTHER Mode for an external auditor connected to the SCU.
VENDOR-EX (*1)
Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC
VENDOR-EX (MULTI) (*1)
VENDOR-EX + Multi job cueing Enable mode
S_VENDOR Serial vendor modeDOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in
document filing printOFF
OFF No support for the auditor in document filing print
PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is performed in the duplex print mode.If the remaining money expires during continuous printing, the sheets in the machine are discharged without being printed on the back surfaces.
OFF
OFF Continuous printing is not performed in the duplex print mode. (The remaining amount is checked for printing every surface in all the printing process.)If the remaining money expires during printing, the sheet is discharged without printing on the back surface.
VENDOR MODE (*2)
MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE 3MODE2 Vendor mode 2
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
COUNTUP TIMING
FUSER_IN Mode in which the detection timing of the paper lead edge by the sensor after the paper passes the fusing section is used as the money charging timing.
EXIT_OUT
FUSER_OUT Mode in which the detection timing of the paper rear edge by the sensor after the paper passes the fusing section is used as the money charging timing.
EXIT_OUT Mode in which the detection timing of the paper rear edge by the paper exit sensor of the right paper exit tray or of the after process unit is used as the money charging timing.
Completion of the
specified quantity.(Money
remaining)
Insufficient money during copy job
Completion of the
specified quantity.
(No money remaining)
BW (no money remaining)
BW (money
remaining)
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3
Item/Display Content Default valueA TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 1
(Japan)2
(Except Japan)B MAINTE (B/W) Maintenance counter (B/W) 2C DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)
Item/Display Content Default value
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 25
26-6Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed
magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected set content is saved.
26-10Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network
scanner.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Enter the set value with 10-key.2) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 1) is saved.
26-18Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner
save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
26-30Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre-
sponding to the CE mark (Europe safetystandards). (For slow start to drive the fus-ing heater lamp)
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key.The set value in step 1) is saved.* Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due
to the power frequency, etc.
26-32Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the special functions.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Enter the set value with 10-key.2) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 1) is saved.
26-35Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4
trouble history when a same troubleoccurred repeatedly. There are two displaymodes: display as one trouble and displayas several series of troubles.
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key.The set value in step 1) is saved.
U.S.A. United States of AmericaCANADA CanadaINCH Inch series, other destinationsJAPAN JapanAB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinationsEUROPE EuropeU.K. United KingdomAUS. AustraliaAB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinationsCHINA China
TRIAL MODE (0: YES 1: NO)
0 Trial mode setting1 Trial mode cancel (Default)
Item Display Content Default value
A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode is inhibited.0
1 Copy toner save mode is allowedB PRINTER 0 Printer toner save mode is inhibited.
01 Printer toner save mode is allowed.
0 Control allowed1 Control inhibited
U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported)CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported)INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported)JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported)AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
A CLEANING PRINT SET
The screen of the cleaning mode self print execution is displayed. (ON)
0 YES 1(NO)
The screen of the cleaning mode self print execution is not displayed. (OFF)
1 NO
0 Only once display.1 Any time display.
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 26
26-38Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the
maintenance life is reached.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Enter the set value with 10-key.2) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 1) is saved.
26-50Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set functions.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
(*1) Default values for each destination of item A
(*2)
26-51Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the serial
port operation. (For PCI)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When the PCI is installed, setting is made to 1 or 2.2) Press [OK] key.
MODE1: Red LED is light/blink/OFF, MODE2: Red LED alwaysOFF
CAUTION: When "PCI SETTING" is changed from "0" to "1" or "2,"if SIM26-03 "OUTSIDE AUDITOR" is set to"S_VENDOR," "OUTSIDE AUDITOR" is changed to"NONE."
26-52Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
(insertion paper, cover paper) is counted upor not.
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Item/Display Content Default value
A MAINTENANCE LIFE OVER(0: CONTINUE 1: STOP)
0 Setting of Print Continue/Stop when the maintenance life is over (Print Continue)
0
1 Setting of Print Continue/Stop when the maintenance life is over (Print Stop)
Item/Display Content Default value
A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer to *11 BW reverse copy Enable
B FINISHERFUNCTION
0 Finisher special paperThe number of paper exit is limited.
0Refer to *2
1 Finisher special paperThe number of paper exit is not limited.
C FEED TRAYCOLOR
0 Paper feed tray color display ON during paper feed
0
1 Paper feed tray color display OFF during paper feed
D LONG SIZE PRINT 0 Long size print disable 01 Long size print enable
E WIRELESS SET 0 Wireless LAN disable 01 Wireless LAN enable
Destination Item AU S A 1
CANADA 1INCH 1
JAPAN 1AB_B 1
EUROPE 1U K 0AUS 1AB_A 1CHINA 1
Target paper
Target paper setting0 1
Inner finisher
Postcard, envelope
The operation is stopped when 10 sheets of a same kind are discharged continuously. When, however, different kinds of sheets are mixed and discharged and 10 or less sheets of a kind are continuously discharged, the operation is stopped by the paper exit tray full detection.
If it is set to "1," the operation is stopped when the paper exit tray is full or when 250 sheets (35.5mm thick) are discharged.
Label sheet, tab sheet, OHP
The operation is stopped when 100 sheets of a same kind are discharged continuously. When, however, different kinds of sheets are mixed and discharged and 100 or less sheets of a kind are continuously discharged, the operation is stopped by the paper exit tray full detection.
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A PCI SETTING
Serial port PCI mode OFF( For connecting the serial port vendor)
0 0(Serial port PCI mode OFF)
Serial port PCI mode ON (JOB status LED: MODE1)Serial port PCI mode ON (JOB status LED: MODE2)
0 Count up1 No count up
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 27
2) Press [OK] key.The set value in step 1) is saved.
26-56Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set ON/OFF of the Life Correction.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
26-65Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode.SectionOperation/ProcedureUse the touch key to set.
26-69Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for
toner near end.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Destination DefaultU.S.A 0 (Counted)CANADA 0 (Counted)INCH 0 (Counted)JAPAN 1 (Not counted)AB_B 0 (Counted)EUROPE 0 (Counted)U.K. 0 (Counted)AUS. 1 (Not counted)AB_A 0 (Counted)CHINA 0 (Counted)
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A AUTO1 Life correction of Auto 1 is turned ON.
0 - 1 1 1 (ON)
Life correction of Auto 1 is turned OFF.
0
B AUTO2 Life correction of Auto 2 is turned ON.
0 - 1 1 1 (ON)
Life correction of Auto 2 is turned OFF.
0
C TEXT Life correction of Text is turned ON.
0 - 1 1 0 (OFF)
Life correction of Text is turned OFF.
0
D TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
Life correction of Text/Printed Photo is turned ON.
0 - 1 1 0 (OFF)
Life correction of Text/Printed Photo is turned OFF.
0
E TEXT/PHOTO
Life correction of Text/Photograph is turned ON.
0 - 1 1 0 (OFF)
Life correction of Text/Photograph is turned OFF.
0
F PRINTED PHOTO
Life correction of Printed Photo is turned ON.
0 - 1 1 1 (ON)
Life correction of Printed Photo is turned OFF.
0
G PHOTOGRAPH
Life correction of Photograph is turned ON.
0 - 1 1 1 (ON)
Life correction of Photograph is turned OFF.
0
H MAP Life correction of Map is turned ON.
0 - 1 1 0 (OFF)
Life correction of Map is turned OFF.
0
Item Set value Content Setting
rangeDefault value NOTE
LIMIT COPIES
ON Number of sets of stapling: Max. 50 sets
ON or OFF
ON
OFF Number of sets of stapling: Not Limited
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A TONER PREPARATION (0:YES 1:NO)
0 The toner preparation message is displayed.
0 - 1 List of Default values and set values for each destination
1 The toner preparation message is not displayed.
B REMAINING TONER LEVEL
0.05 0 Toner preparation at remaining toner level of 5%
0 - 9 4
0.1 1 Toner preparation at remaining toner level of 10%
0.15 2 Toner preparation at remaining toner level of 15%
0.2 3 Toner preparation at remaining toner level of 20%
0.25 4 Toner preparation at remaining toner level of 25%
0.3 5 Toner preparation at remaining toner level of 30%
0.35 6 Toner preparation at remaining toner level of 35%
0.4 7 Toner preparation at remaining toner level of 40%
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 28
Item E (TONER END COUNT) setting value and printable quan-tity
List of Default values and set values for each destination
Contents of set itemsA: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display.B: The toner remaining quantity at which the toner preparationmessage is displayed.C: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message displaywhen the toner near end status is reached.D: Machine operation at toner endE: Number of allowable copy/print/FAX when the toner near endmessage is displayed. (Range: 0 - 160 sheets)The number of output print allowed in item D is based on theassumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 6%.(The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the papersize and the print ratio.)
CAUTION: When item A is set to "0" and item E is properly set,printing can be made after toner near end. However,improper phenomena such as insufficient density, thinspots, or improper color balance may result dependingon the using conditions. When item E is set to "1" print-ing is disabled after toner near end. In this case, tonerend display is made in the toner near end status, andcopy/print/FAX outputs are disabled.
26-73Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide
copy mode image loss (shade delete quan-tity) adjustment
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss(shade delete quantity) is increased.
26-74Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Enter the set value with 10-key.2) Press [OK] key.
B REMAINING TONER LEVEL
0.45 8 Toner preparation at remaining toner level of 45%
0 - 9 4
0.5 9 Toner preparation at remaining toner level of 50%
C TONER NEAR END (0:YES 1:NO)
0 The toner near end message is displayed.
0 - 1 List of Default values and set values for each destination
1 The toner near end message is not displayed.
D TONER END 1 Operation setup 1
1 - 3 –
2 Operation setup 2
3 Operation setup 3
E TONER END COUNT
Setting of the number of copy/print/FAX outputs Enable after TONER NEAR END.
1 - 5 4
F TONER E-MAIL ALERT
0 Low status send of E-mail alert (When the toner preparation message is displayed) (in near near toner end)
0 - 1 1
1 Low status send of E-mail alert (near toner end)
Setting value Printable quantity at A4/6% equivalent conversion1 02 203 404 805 160
DestinationSetting value
Toner preparation message Toner near end message
U.S.A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)CANADA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)INCH 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)JAPAN 0 (Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed)AB_B 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)EUROPE 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)U.K. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)AUS. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)AB_A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)CHINA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
A DELETING SHADOW ADJ (M)
Rear frame side image loss quantity (shade delete quantity) adjustment
0 - 50 0 (Adjustment amount: 0.1mm/step)
B DELETING SHADOW ADJ (S)
Lead edge image loss quantity (shade delete quantity) adjustment
0 - 50 0 (Adjustment amount: 0.1mm/step)
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A OSA TRIAL MODE (0: YES 1: NO)
0 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
0 - 1 1
1 OSA trial mode is canceled.
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 29
26-78Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote
operation panel.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits)
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW".In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] keyto delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
2) Press [SET] key.
26-79Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display
of user data delete result.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The value for the display operation specification after comple-tion of user data delete is set.
2) Press [OK] key.
27
27-1Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communica-
tion error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key.The set value in step 1) is saved.
27-2Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
ber and the HOST server telephone num-ber. (FSS function)
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
[USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [SET] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
A DISP SET User data delete result pop-up display ON
YES 1 0 (NO)
User data delete result pop-up display OFF
NO 0
0 Not detection1 Detection
USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
• If the connection process is not completed normally when registering the FSS, calling to the HOST may be continuously made every time when the power is turned ON (from OFF) or rebooted.In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the HOST.
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 30
27-4Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
27-5Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func-
tion allows the host computer to check themachine tag No.) (FSS function)
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM)Operation/Procedure1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key.
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”.In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] keyto delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
2) Press [SET] key.
27-6Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call.
(FSS function)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key.The set value in step 1) is saved.
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value Remarks
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send in NE-B mode 0 - 3 0 1NEB2 Send/Receive in NE-B mode 1NFB1 Exclusive for send in NE-F mode 2 For convenience
storesNFB2 Send/Receive in NE-F mode 3 For convenience
storesB RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 0: No retryC TIMER(MINUTE)_BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 0: No retryE TIMER(MINUTE)_ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1F FAX RETRY Resend number setting when FAX initial connection 0 - 15 2 Unit: Number of timesG TONER ORDER
TIMING(K)EMPTY Toner order auto send
timing setting (K)Empty 0 - 11 0 6
NEAR_END Near end 10.05 0.05 20.1 0.1 30.15 0.15 40.2 0.2 50.25 0.25 60.3 0.3 70.35 0.35 80.4 0.4 90.45 0.45 100.5 0.5 11
H TEMP HISTORY CYCLE Frequency of acquiring the temperature and humidity history 1 - 1440 60 Unit: min.I LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU) Log output capacity 0 - 50 30 Unit: [KB]
0 Allow (Default) 1 Inhibit
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 31
27-7Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert callout.
(FSS function)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
*1 Alert send timing
27-9Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record-
ing YES/NO threshold value and shadinggain adjustment retry number. (FSS function)
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
* Items A, B: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper.
* Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number ofretry is actually not registered.
27-10Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history
information. (FSS function)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.2) Press [YES] key.
The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
27-11Purpose OthersFunction (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication
retry number and the scanner gain adjust-ment retry number history. (FSS function)
SectionOperation/ProcedureThe serial communication retry number history and the scannergain adjustment retry number history are displayed.
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A FUNCTION(0:YES 1:NO)
FSS function enable 0 1 (NO)FSS function disable 1
B ALERT(0:YES 1:NO)
Alert call enable (*1) 0 0 (YES)Alert call disable 1
C CONNECTION(0: FAX 1: No Use 2: HTTP)
FAX connection enable 0 0 (FAX)Not used. 1HTTP connection enable 2
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alertMaintenance When the maintenance timing is reached.Service call When pressing Service call.Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is
reached.Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for
a new product)Alert resend
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A FEED TIME1 Threshold value of paper transport time between sensors (Machine)
0 - 100 50(%)
B FEED TIME2 Threshold value of paper transport time between sensors (SPF)
0 - 100 50(%)
C GAIN ADJUSTMENT RETRY
Threshold value of the gain adjustment retry number
0 - 20 11 (TIMES)
D JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert judgment threshold value (Alert judgment threshold value for continuous JAM's) (Setting of the number of JAM's continuously made at which it is judged as an alert.)
1 - 100 10 (TIMES)
Target history Serial communication retry historyScanner gain adjustment retry historyPaper transport time between sensors
Display ItemContent
Item name Occurrence date (Display)
Retry number
LSU1 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
8 digits Serial communication retry number history display
LSU2 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
8 digits
DESK1 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
8 digits
DESK2 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
8 digits
FINISHER1 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
8 digits
FINISHER2 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
8 digits
SCAN GAIN ADJ1 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
8 digits Scanner gain adjustment retry historySCAN GAIN ADJ2 Year/month/day
hour: min.: sec.8 digits
SCAN GAIN ADJ3 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
8 digits
SCAN GAIN ADJ4 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
8 digits
SCAN GAIN ADJ5 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
8 digits Scanner gain adjustment retry history
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 32
27-13Purpose OthersFunction (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors. (FSS function)SectionOperation/ProcedureChange the display with scroll key.
27-14Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection
test mode.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key.The set value in step 1) is saved.
27-15Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to display the FSS connection status.SectionOperation/ProcedureThe FSS operating status is displayed.
Item/Display Content Occurrence date Code between sensors Passing time Reference
passing timeMain unit
FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME3 History of paper transport time between sensors 3 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME4 History of paper transport time between sensors 4 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME5 History of paper transport time between sensors 5 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME6 History of paper transport time between sensors 6 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME7 History of paper transport time between sensors 7 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME8 History of paper transport time between sensors 8 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME9 History of paper transport time between sensors 9 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME10 History of paper transport time between sensors 10 Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
RSPF FEED TIME1 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 1
Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME2 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 2
Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME3 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 3
Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME4 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 4
Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME5 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 5
Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME6 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 6
Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME7 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 7
Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME8 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 8
Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME9 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 9
Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME10 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 10
Year/month/day hour: min.: sec.
5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
0 Disable (Default)1 Enable
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
FSS CONNECTION Used to display the FSS connection status.
0 Not operated
0
1 Operated
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 33
27-16Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the FSS alert send.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The value for the FSS alert operation specification is set.2) Press [OK] key.
27-17Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the FSS paper order alert.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The value for the FSS paper order alert operation specificationis set.
3) Press [SET] key.
27-18Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry
counter.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be cleared. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
30
30-1Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and the detectors in other than thepaper feed section and the control circuits.
SectionOperation/ProcedureThe operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-played.The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-lighted.
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A MAINTENANCE ALERT (0:YES 1:NO)
Maintenance alert send Enable setting
Alert send Enable
0 0
Alert send Disable
1
B TONER ORDER ALERT (0:YES 1:NO)
Toner order alert send Enable setting
Alert send Enable
0 0
Alert send Disable
1
C TONER CTRG ALERT (0:YES 1:NO)
Toner cartridge replacement alert send Enable setting
Alert send Enable
0 0
Alert send Disable
1
D JAM ALERT (0:YES 1:NO)
Continuous JAM alert send Enable setting
Alert send Enable
0 0
Alert send Disable
1
E TROUBLE ALERT (0:YES 1:NO)
Trouble alert send Enable setting
Alert send Enable
0 0
Alert send Disable
1
F PAPER ORDER ALERT (0:YES 1:NO)
Paper order alert send Enable setting
Alert send Enable
0 0
Alert send Disable
1
Item/Display Content Setting
rangeDefault value NOTE
PAPER TYPE SET
Setting of paper kind for paper order alert
0 - 2 0 0: Standard paper and recycled paper1: Standard paper only2: Recycled paper only
A3 Paper order number setting [Number of sheets] (A3)
500 - 5000
1250 Unit: No. of sheets for a box
A4 Paper order number setting [Number of sheets] (A4)
500 - 5000
2500 Unit: No. of sheets for a box
B4 Paper order number setting [Number of sheets] (B4)
500 - 5000
2500 Unit: No. of sheets for a box
B5 Paper order number setting [Number of sheets] (B5)
500 - 5000
2500 Unit: No. of sheets for a box
A3:FIRST
Paper order alert number setting (A3) (Number of used sheets)
500 - 10000
1000 Unit: No. of alert sheets for the first time
A4:FIRST
Paper order alert number setting (A4) (Number of used sheets)
500 - 10000
1000 Unit: No. of alert sheets for the first time
B4:FIRST
Paper order alert number setting (B4) (Number of used sheets)
500 - 10000
1000 Unit: No. of alert sheets for the first time
B5:FIRST
Paper order alert number setting (B5) (Number of used sheets)
500 - 10000
1000 Unit: No. of alert sheets for the first time
Item/Display ContentTRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed retry counterTRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed retry counterTRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed retry counterTRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed retry counterMFT Manual paper feed retry counter
PPD1 Registration front detectorPOSD Paper exit branch detectorPOD1 Paper exit detector 1POD2 Paper exit detector 2POD3 Paper exit detector 3TFD1 Paper exit tray full detector 1TFD2 Paper exit tray full detector 2TFD3 Paper exit tray full detector 3SHPOS Shifter home positions sensorDSW_R Front/side cover open/close detectorDSW_POC Paper exit cover open/close detector
Item/Display Content Setting
rangeDefault value NOTE
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 34
30-2Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and the detectors in the paper feedsection and the control circuits.
SectionOperation/ProcedureThe operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-played.The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-lighted.
40
40-2Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
adjustment.Section Paper feedOperation/Procedure1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX).2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized.3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4R).4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The P1 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A5R).6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The P2 width (A5R) detection level is recognized.7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" isdisplayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
40-7Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.Section Paper feedOperation/Procedure1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
41
41-1Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
ment size sensor and the control circuit.SectionOperation/ProcedureThe operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-played.The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-lighted.
41-2Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor
detection level.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without
place a document on the document table.The sensor level without document is recognized.
2) Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table, and press[EXECUTE] key.The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed.
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed.
C1PFD Cassette 1 paper entry detectorC1LUD Cassette 1 paper upper limit detectorC1PED Cassette 1 paper empty detectorC1SS Cassette 1 detectorC2PFD Cassette 2 paper entry detectorC2LUD Cassette 2 paper upper limit detectorC2PED Cassette 2 paper empty detectorC2SS Cassette 2 installation detectorDSW_C2 Cassette 2 door open/close detectorMPED Manual feed paper empty detectorMPLD1 Manual feed paper length detector 1MPLD2 Manual feed paper length detector 2MTOP1 Manual feed tray detector 1MTOP2 Manual feed tray detector 2
MAX POSITION Manual feed max. widthP1(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4R)P2(A5R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A5R)MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width
Item/Display Content Default value
A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 235B P1 (A4R) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width
(A4R)143
C P2 (A5R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A5R)
78
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 27
OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal displayClose: Highlighted
PD1 - 7 Document detection sensor status
No document: Normal displayDocument present: Highlighted
Sensor name Content Setting
rangeDefault value
PD1 - 7 Document detection sensor 1 - 7 0 - 255 128
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 35
41-3Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
ment size sensor and the control circuit.SectionOperation/ProcedureThe detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the documentsensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time.The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
43
43-1Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
mode.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
26cpm machine
Item/Display Content Detection level rangeOCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close)PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255 PD2 Document detection 2 0 - 255 PD3 Document detection 3 0 - 255 PD4 Document detection 4 0 - 255 PD5 Document detection 5 0 - 255 PD6 Document detection 6 0 - 255 PD7 Document detection 7 0 - 255
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default valueGroup A Group B Group C Group D
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-BA HL_UM READY Ready standby TH_UM set value 70 - 220 175 175 175 175 180 180 180 180B HL_US READY Ready standby TH_US set value 70 - 220 170 170 170 170 175 175 175 175C HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_UM
set value70 - 220 175 180 175 180 185 190 185 190
D HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_US set value
70 - 220 175 180 175 180 185 190 185 190
E WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_US set value
0 - 200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F WARMUP FUMOFF HL_UM T Fusing motor previous rotation complete time
0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
G WARMUP END TIME Warm-up complete time 0 - 20 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18H HL_UM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 220 190 190 190 190I HL_US HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_US set value 70 - 220 190 190 190 190J HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 220 175 175 185 185K HL_US OHP PAPER OHP-TH_US set value 70 - 220 175 175 185 185L HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 70 - 220 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95M HL_US E-STAR Preheating TH_US set value 70 - 220 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95N HL_UM PRE-JOB TH_UM set value when recovery
from Warm-Up70 - 220 130 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
O HL_UM WARMUP_120L TH_UM set value when Warm-Up at 120 C or below
70 - 220 130 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
P HL_US WARMUP_120L TH_US set value when Warm-Up at 120 C or below
70 - 220 130 170 170 170 170 170 170 170
Q LO_WARMUP_TIME O, P applying time (Timer from completion of Ready)
0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
R HL_UM WARMUP_120H TH_LM set value when Warm-Up at 120 C or above
70 - 220 130 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
S HL_US WARMUP_120H TH_US set value when Warm-Up at 120 C or above
70 - 220 130 170 170 170 170 170 170 170
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 36
Code descriptions
List of destination groups
31cpm machine
T HI_WARMUP_TIME R, S applying time (Timer from completion of Ready)
0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
U HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP FM prior rotation start TH_US when Warm-Up at alpha C or above
0 - 220 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
V HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-Up completion time when Warm-Up at alpha C or above
0 - 60 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
W HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 1 Job enable TH_UM temperature 1 when Warm-Up at alpha C or above
30 - 220 130 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
X HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value alpha to which U - W is applied
1 - 119 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
Y LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 1 Job enable TH_UM temperature 1 when Warm-Up at alpha C or below
70 - 220 130 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
Z JOBEND_FUMON_TIME After rotating time when a job is completed
0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
AA HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 Job enable TH_UM temperature 2 when Warm-Up at alpha C or above
70 - 220 130 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
AB LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 Job enable TH_UM temperature 2 when Warm-Up at alpha C or below
70 - 220 130 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default valueGroup A Group B Group C Group D
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
Group DestinationGroup A JAPAN – – – –Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – –Group C AB_B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_AGroup D CHINA – – – –
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default valueGroup A Group B Group C Group D
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-BA HL_UM READY Ready standby TH_UM set value 70 - 220 185 185 185 185 190 190 190 190B HL_US READY Ready standby TH_US set value 70 - 220 180 180 180 180 185 185 185 185C HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_UM
set value70 - 220 185 195 190 195 195 200 195 200
D HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_US set value
70 - 220 185 195 190 195 195 200 195 200
E WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_US set value
0 - 200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F WARMUP FUMOFF HL_UM T Fusing motor previous rotation complete time
0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
G WARMUP END TIME Warm-up complete time 0 - 20 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18H HL_UM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 220 200 200 200 200I HL_US HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_US set value 70 - 220 200 200 200 200J HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 220 190 190 195 195K HL_US OHP PAPER OHP-TH_US set value 70 - 220 190 190 195 195L HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 70 - 220 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95M HL_US E-STAR Preheating TH_US set value 70 - 220 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95N HL_UM PRE-JOB TH_UM set value when recovery
from Warm-Up70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
O HL_UM WARMUP_120L TH_UM set value when Warm-Up at 120 C or below
70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
P HL_US WARMUP_120L TH_US set value when Warm-Up at 120 C or below
70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
Q LO_WARMUP_TIME O, P applying time (Timer from completion of Ready)
0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 37
Code descriptions
List of destination groups
35cpm machine
R HL_UM WARMUP_120H TH_LM set value when Warm-Up at 120 C or above
70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
S HL_US WARMUP_120H TH_US set value when Warm-Up at 120 C or above
70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
T HI_WARMUP_TIME R, S applying time (Timer from completion of Ready)
0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
U HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP FM prior rotation start TH_US when Warm-Up at alpha C or above
0 - 220 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
V HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-Up completion time when Warm-Up at alpha C or above
0 - 60 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
W HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 1 Job enable TH_UM temperature 1 when Warm-Up at alpha C or above
30 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
X HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value alpha to which U - W is applied
1 - 119 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
Y LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 1 Job enable TH_UM temperature 1 when Warm-Up at alpha C or below
70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
Z JOBEND_FUMON_TIME After rotating time when a job is completed
0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
AA HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 Job enable TH_UM temperature 2 when Warm-Up at alpha C or above
70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
AB LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 Job enable TH_UM temperature 2 when Warm-Up at alpha C or below
70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default valueGroup A Group B Group C Group D
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
Group DestinationGroup A JAPAN – – – –Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – –Group C AB_B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_AGroup D CHINA – – – –
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default valueGroup A Group B Group C Group D
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-BA HL_UM READY Ready standby TH_UM set value 70 - 220 185 185 185 185 190 190 190 190B HL_US READY Ready standby TH_US set value 70 - 220 180 180 180 180 185 185 185 185C HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_UM
set value70 - 220 195 200 195 200 195 200 195 200
D HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_US set value
70 - 220 195 200 195 200 195 200 195 200
E WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_US set value
0 - 200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F WARMUP FUMOFF HL_UM T Fusing motor previous rotation complete time
0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
G WARMUP END TIME Warm-up complete time 0 - 20 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18H HL_UM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 220 200 200 200 200I HL_US HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_US set value 70 - 220 200 200 200 200J HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 220 195 195 195 195K HL_US OHP PAPER OHP-TH_US set value 70 - 220 195 195 195 195L HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 70 - 220 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95M HL_US E-STAR Preheating TH_US set value 70 - 220 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95N HL_UM PRE-JOB TH_UM set value when recovery
from Warm-Up70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
O HL_UM WARMUP_120L TH_UM set value when Warm-Up at 120 C or below
70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 38
Code descriptions
List of destination groups
P HL_US WARMUP_120L TH_US set value when Warm-Up at 120 C or below
70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
Q LO_WARMUP_TIME O, P applying time (Timer from completion of Ready)
0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
R HL_UM WARMUP_120H TH_LM set value when Warm-Up at 120 C or above
70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
S HL_US WARMUP_120H TH_US set value when Warm-Up at 120 C or above
70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
T HI_WARMUP_TIME R, S applying time (Timer from completion of Ready)
0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
U HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP FM prior rotation start TH_US when Warm-Up at alpha C or above
0 - 220 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
V HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-Up completion time when Warm-Up at alpha C or above
0 - 60 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
W HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 1 Job enable TH_UM temperature 1 when Warm-Up at alpha C or above
30 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
X HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value alpha to which U - W is applied
1 - 119 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
Y LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 1 Job enable TH_UM temperature 1 when Warm-Up at alpha C or below
70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
Z JOBEND_FUMON_TIME After rotating time when a job is completed
0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
AA HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 Job enable TH_UM temperature 2 when Warm-Up at alpha C or above
70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
AB LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 Job enable TH_UM temperature 2 when Warm-Up at alpha C or below
70 - 220 130 180 180 180 190 190 190 190
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default valueGroup A Group B Group C Group D
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
Group DestinationGroup A JAPAN – – – –Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – –Group C AB_B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_AGroup D CHINA – – – –
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 39
43-4Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in
each mode.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
26cpm machine
Code descriptions
List of destination groups
31cpm machine
Item Display Content Setting range
Default value (SW-A) Default value (SW-B)Group
AGroup
BGroup
CGroup
DGroup
AGroup
BGroup
CGroup
DA HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW
DUPBlack and white plain paper duplex TH_UM set value
70 - 220 175 175 185 185 175 175 185 185
B HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
Black and white plain paper duplex TH_US set value
70 - 220 175 175 185 185 175 175 185 185
C PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT
Black and white plain paper duplex applying number of sheets
0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP
Black and white heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value
70 - 220 175 175 185 185 175 175 185 185
E HL_US HEAVY PAPER BW DUP
Black and white heavy paper duplex TH_US set value
70 - 220 175 175 185 185 175 175 185 185
F HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT
Black and white heavy paper duplex applying number of sheets
0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
Group DestinationGroup A JAPAN – – – –Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – –Group C AB_B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_AGroup D CHINA – – – –
Item Display Content Setting range
Default value (SW-A) Default value (SW-B)Group
AGroup
BGroup
CGroup
DGroup
AGroup
BGroup
CGroup
DA HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW
DUPBlack and white plain paper duplex TH_UM set value
70 - 220 185 190 195 195 185 190 195 195
B HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
Black and white plain paper duplex TH_US set value
70 - 220 185 190 195 195 185 190 195 195
C PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT
Black and white plain paper duplex applying number of sheets
0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP
Black and white heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value
70 - 220 185 190 195 195 185 190 195 195
E HL_US HEAVY PAPER BW DUP
Black and white heavy paper duplex TH_US set value
70 - 220 185 190 195 195 185 190 195 195
F HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT
Black and white heavy paper duplex applying number of sheets
0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 40
Code descriptions
List of destination groups
35cpm machine
Code descriptions
List of destination groups
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
Group DestinationGroup A JAPAN – – – –Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – –Group C AB_B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_AGroup D CHINA – – – –
Item Display Content Setting range
Default value (SW-A) Default value (SW-B)Group
AGroup
BGroup
CGroup
DGroup
AGroup
BGroup
CGroup
DA HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW
DUPBlack and white plain paper duplex TH_UM set value
70 - 220 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195
B HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
Black and white plain paper duplex TH_US set value
70 - 220 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195
C PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT
Black and white plain paper duplex applying number of sheets
0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP
Black and white heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value
70 - 220 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195
E HL_US HEAVY PAPER BW DUP
Black and white heavy paper duplex TH_US set value
70 - 220 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195
F HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT
Black and white heavy paper duplex applying number of sheets
0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
Group DestinationGroup A JAPAN – – – –Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – –Group C AB_B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_AGroup D CHINA – – – –
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 41
43-10Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the postcard feed cycleSectionOperation/Procedure1) Enter the set value with 10-key.2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
43-20PurposeFunction (Purpose) Used to perform the low-temperature, low-
humidity (L/L) environment correction forthe fusing temperature setting of eachpaper (SIM43-01).
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
* WARMUP END TIME LL: 1 count = 1s changeOther correction values: 1 count = 1 C change
* Items C/D: Correction of "–5" is made for item C and Item D in the case of B5 size
Item Display Content Setting range
Default value
A POSTCARD CYCLE Postcard feed cycle 1 - 99 50
Item Display Content Setting range
Default value
A HL_UM READY LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in ready standby under LL environment 1 - 99 55B HL_US READY LL Correction value for TH_US set value in ready standby under LL environment 1 - 99 55C HL_UM PLAIN BW LL Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55D HL_US PLAIN BW LL Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55E WARMUP FUMON HL_US T LL Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 50F WARMUP FUMOFF LL Fusing motor prior rotation completion time under LL environment 1 - 99 50G WARMUP END TIME LL Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL environment 1 - 99 50H HL_UM HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55I HL_US HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55J HL_UM OHP LL Correction value for OHP-TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55K HL_US OHP LL Correction value for OHP-TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55L HL_UM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55M HL_US E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55N HL_UM PRE-JOB LL Correction value for the set value of TH_UM when restoring from preheating under LL
environment1 - 99 50
O HL_UM WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120 C or below under LL environment 1 - 99 55P HL_US WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120 C or below under LL environment 1 - 99 55Q LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value for O, P applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL environment 1 - 99 50R HL_UM WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120 C or above under LL environment 1 - 99 55S HL_US WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120 C or above under LL environment 1 - 99 55T HI_WU_TIME_LL Correction value for R, S applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL environment 1 - 99 50U HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_LL Correction value for FM prior rotation start TH_UM in Warm-Up at alpha C or above under LL
environment1 - 99 50
V HI_WU_END_TIME_LL Correction value for Warm-Up completion time in Warm-Up at alpha C or above under LL environment
1 - 99 50
W HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (1) when Warm-Up at alpha C or above under LL environment
1 - 99 50
X HI_WARMUP_BORDER_LL Correction value for the threshold value alpha applying SIM43-1-U - W under LL environment 1 - 99 50Y LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (1) when Warm-Up at alpha C or below
under LL environment1 - 99 50
Z JOBEND_FUMON_TIME LL Correction value for the after rotation time when completing a job under LL environment 1 - 99 50AA HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 LL Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (2) when Warm-Up at alpha C or above
under LL environment1 - 99 50
AB LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 LL Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (2) when Warm-Up at alpha C or below under LL environment
1 - 99 50
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 42
Code descriptions
• Correction value: (-49 - +49), Input value: Actual input value (1 - 99)
43-22PurposeFunction (Purpose) Used to perform the low-temperature, low-
humidity (L/L) environment correction forthe fusing temperature setting of eachpaper (SIM43-04).
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
* PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL: 1 count = 1s changeOther correction values: 1 count = 1 C change
Code descriptions
• Setting value: Target value (-49 - +49), Input value: (Actual input value) 1 - 99
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Item Display Content Setting range
Default value
A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for the upper TH_UM black and white plain paper duplex under the LL environment
1 - 99 55
B HL_US PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for the upper TH_US black and white plain paper duplex under the LL environment
1 - 99 55
C PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white plain paper duplex under LL environment
1 - 99 50
D HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for the upper TH_UM set value of black and white heavy paper duplex under the LL environment
1 - 99 55
E HL_US HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for the upper TH_US set value of black and white heavy paper duplex under the LL environment
1 - 99 55
F HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white heavy paper duplex under LL environment
1 - 99 50
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
Setting value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 43
44
44-1Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
tion in the image forming (process) section.Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)Operation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
(The selected item is highlighted.)2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
CAUTION: Set the items to the default values unless a change isspecially required.
44-9Purpose Operation data displayFunction (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)Operation/ProcedureSelect a target display mode with [CPY/PRN], [OTHER] keys.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value NOTEMD_VG Membrane decrease (GB) Enable/Disable setting Black text on
white background (Inhibit: 0=NO)White text on black background (Allow: 1=YES)
EnableMD_DV_LIFE DV life correction (GB, DVD) Enable/Disable setting EnableMD_ENV Environment correction (GB, DVD) Enable/Disable setting EnableMD_DUPLEX Duplex print correction (GB, DVD) Enable/Disable setting EnableMD_LD Membrane decrease life correction (laser power) Enable/Disable setting EnableMD_LD_ENV Environment correction (laser power) Enable/Disable setting EnableTN_LIFE Enable/Disable setting of the toner density life correction EnableTN_ENV Enable/Disable setting of the toner density environment correction EnableTN_DUPLEX Toner density duplex print correction Enable/Disable setting EnableTN_COV Enable/Disable setting of the toner density print ratio correction EnableTN_AREA Enable/Disable setting of the toner density area correction EnableTN_DRIP Enable/Disable setting of the toner density correction unconditional supply EnableTC Enable/Disable setting of the transfer output correction Enable
Mode Page numberItem/Display (*: Correction
value)Content Display range Default
value
CPY/PRN*1
1/2 (PROCESS) REF (TS_OFF) Left GB *** GB/DVB default value when TS is OFF 0 - 750 590Right DVB *** 0 - 650 450
ALL (TS_OFF) Left GB *** GB/DVB value after addition or subtraction of the correction amount when TS is OFF
0 - 750 590Right DVB *** 0 - 650 450
REF (TS_ON_C) Left GB *** Copy GB/DVB default value when TS is ON
0 - 750 460Right DVB *** 0 - 650 320
ALL(TS_ON_C) Left GB *** GB/DVB value after addition or subtraction of the correction amount when Copy TS is ON.
0 - 750 460Right DVB *** 0 - 650 320
REF (TS_ON_P) Left GB *** Printer GB/DVB default value when TS is ON
0 - 750 390Right DVB *** 0 - 650 250
ALL (TS_ON_P) Left GB *** GB/DVB value after addition or subtraction of the correction amount when Printer TS is ON
0 - 750 390Right DVB *** 0 - 650 250
MD_VG Left GB *** Drum membrane decrease correction amount GB value
0 - 255 0
MD_DV_LIFE Left GB *** Process developer life correction amount GB/DVB value
–127 - +127 0Right DVB *** –127 - +127 0
MD_ENV Left GB *** Environment correction amount GB/DVB value
–127 - +127 0Right DVB *** –127 - +127 0
MD_DUPLEX Left GB *** Duplex print correction amount GB/DVB value
0 - 255 0Right DVB *** 0 - 255 0
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 44
*1: The left of the correction amount indicates the execution result, and the right indicates the reference value.
Default values for each item
CPY/PRN*1
2/2 (LD) REF (TS_OFF) Left LD (CP) Laser power default value when TS is OFF (CP/PRT)
0 - 255 For default values refer to "Default values for each item".
Right LD (PRT) 0 - 255ALL (TS_OFF) Left LD (CP) Laser power value after addition or
subtraction of the correction amount when TS is OFF (CP/PRT)
0 - 255Right LD (PRT) 0 - 255
REF (TS_ON_C) Left LD (CP) Laser power default value when TS is ON (CP/PRT)
0 - 255Right LD (PRT) 0 - 255
ALL (TS_ON_C) Left LD (CP) Laser power value after addition or subtraction of the correction amount when Copy TS is ON (CP/PRT)
0 - 255Right LD (PRT) 0 - 255
MD_LD Left LD (CP) Drum membrane decrease laser power correction amount (CP/PRT)
–127 - +127 0Right LD (PRT) –127 - +127 0
MD_LD_ENV Left LD (CP) Environment laser power correction amount (CP/PRT)
–127 - +127 0Right LD (PRT) –127 - +127 0
OTHER 1/2 (TN/TC/MD)
TN_TMP_AREA *** Toner control display temperature/humidity area
1 - 8 4
TN_TMP_DATA *** Toner control display temperature AD value
0 - 1023 0
TN_HUD_DATA *** Toner control display humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0TC_TMP_AREA *** Transfer display temperature/humidity
area1 - 8 4
TC_TMP_DATA *** Transfer display temperature AD value 0 - 1023 0TC_HUD_DATA *** Transfer display humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0MD_VG_AREA *** Membrane decrease drum traveling
distance area1 - 15 1
MD_DV_LIFE_AREA *** Developer life area for process 0 - 15 1MD_ENV_AREA *** Environment correction area 1 - 8 1MD_DUPLEX_COUNTER *** Duplex counter 0 - 300 0MD_LD_AREA *** Laser power area 0 - 15 1MD_LD_ENV_AREA *** Laser power environment area 0 - 8 4
2/2 (CRUM/CNT)
DESTINATION Left xx Machine side management CRUM destination
– –
MODEL TYPE xx Model type of the machine 0 - 1 0CRUM DEST_K Right xx Crum destination – –
Mode Page numberItem/Display (*: Correction
value)Content Display range Default
value
Mode Item/DisplayDefault value
35cpm machine 31cpm machine 26cpm machineCPY/PRN
REF (TS_OFF) LD (CP) 181 163 145LD (PRT) 181 163 145
ALL (TS_OFF) LD (CP) 181 163 145LD (PRT) 181 163 145
REF (TS_ON_C) LD (CP) 181 163 145LD (PRT) 181 163 145
ALL (TS_ON_C) LD (CP) 181 163 145LD (PRT) 181 163 145
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 45
44-14Purpose Operation data displayFunction (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem-
perature and humidity sensor.Section Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/
LSUOperation/ProcedureThe output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machinetemperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
44-43Purpose Data displayFunction (Purpose) Used to display the identification informa-
tion of the developing unit.Section Developing systemOperation/ProcedureThe identification number and the identification signal level of thedeveloping unit are displayed.
46
46-2Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode)Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
mode.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of eachitem can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy densityin the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change theadjustment value. When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density isincreased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-sity is decreased.
46-4Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
send mode.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of eachitem can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)When the adjustment value is increased, the image density isincreased, and vice versa.
Item/Display
Content Display range
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main detection temperatureFusing upper thermistor main detection temperature A/D value
Temperature: 0 - 255 C ( 1 C)AD value: 0-1023
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub detection temperatureFusing upper thermistor sub detection temperature A/D value
Temperature: 0 - 255 C ( 1 C)AD value: 0-1023
TH_RA Temperature thermistorTemperature thermistor A/D value
Temperature: –40.0-60.0 C ( 0.1 C)AD value: 0-123
HUD_RA Humidity sensorHumidity sensor A/D value
Humidity: 5.0-90.0% ( 0.1%)AD value: 0-1023
Item/Display Content Display range NOTE
A DVCH KIND K
K developing unit identification number
1 - 9 The model identification number of the developing unit which is backed up in the EEPROM of the machine.
B DV_TYP_SEL_K
K developing unit identification detection
0 - 1 0 = High (Open)1 = Low (GND)
C DVCH_AD_K
K developing unit identification AD value
0 - 255 AD value of the developing unit identification voltage
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50HIGH 1 - 99 50
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50HIGH 1 - 99 50
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50HIGH 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
Text/Printed Photo
LOW 1 - 99 50HIGH 1 - 99 50
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph
LOW 1 - 99 50HIGH 1 - 99 50
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50HIGH 1 - 99 50
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50HIGH 1 - 99 50
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50HIGH 1 - 99 50
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
LOW A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50C TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTOText/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
HIGH A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50C TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTOText/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 46
46-5Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode)Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
send mode.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of eachitem can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)When the adjustment value is increased, the image density isincreased, and vice versa.
46-8Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color
balance RGB.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch
panel.2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.3) Enter the set value with 10-key.4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low densityarea and the high density area.When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of thetarget color is increased, and vice versa.
46-9Purpose Adjustment (RSPF mode)Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of eachitem can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copymode, and the fax mode.When the adjustment value is increased, the image density isincreased, and vice versa.
46-19Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the
density scanning (exposure) of mono-chrome auto copy mode documents.
SectionOperation/ProcedureSelect an item to be set with touch panel.When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change issaved.
NOTE:
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
LOW A AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50C TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTOText/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
HIGH A AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50C TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTOText/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content Default value
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction amount 50B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction amount 50
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure adjustment (Low density side)
1 - 99 48
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure adjustment (Low density side)
1 - 99 48
C FAX : LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure adjustment (Low density side)
1 - 99 48
D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure adjustment (High density side)
1 - 99 53
E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposure adjustment (Low density side)
1 - 99 53
F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure adjustment (high density)
1 - 99 53
Item/Display Content Set value Default value
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 MODE2AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure
Stop (for copy)REALTIME/STOP/PRESCAN
STOP
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure Stop (for FAX)
ON/OFF ON
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure Stop (for scanner)
REALTIME/STOP/PRESCAN
STOP
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter setting
SOFT NORMALNORMAL SHARP
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART PART
MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images)MODE 2 Normal gammaSTOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is
scanned, and the output image density is determined according to the scanned density. (The output image density is even for all the surface.)
REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned sequentially, and the output image density is determined according to the density in each area of document. (The output image density may not be even for all the surface.)
PRESCAN The densities of the all surface of document are scanned sequentially, and the output image density is determined according to the average of the scanned densities. (The output image density is even for all the surface.)
AE WIDTH FULL
The document density scan area in the monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x the document width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
AE WIDTH PART
The document density scan area in the monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x 100mm width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 47
46-30Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the resolution in the sub
scanning direction in the copy mode.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corre-
sponding to the resolution mode with 10-key.2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
46-32Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background
density reproducibility in the monochromeauto copy mode.
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of thebackground and the low density image is increased. When theadjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the backgroundand the low density image is decreased.
46-37Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of monochrome mode color.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [EXECUTE] key.4) Press [YES] key.This is to adjust the reproduction capability of red and yellowimages when copying color documents with red and yellow imagesin the monochrome mode.Applied to the copy mode only.
* B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained fromthe formula below. 1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initialvalues (Default).When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is increased,the copy density of red images is decreased. When the adjustmentvalue is decreased, the density is increased.When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is increased,the copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjust-ment value is decreased, the density in also decreased.
46-39Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send
images.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input largenumeric value to decrease moire.
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A SCAN RESOLUTION SW
Scan resolution selection (COPY: COLOR)
Mode1 0 - 1 0 0Mode2 1
Mode Scan mode
Resolution in the sub scanning direction (DPI)25-99%
[Magnification ratio]
100-200% [Magnification
ratio]
201-400% [Magnification
ratio]Mode1 OC 600 600 1200
RSPF 600 600 –Mode2 OC 300 600 1200
RSPF 400 600 –
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A COPY : OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 63B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 877
B-Ratio Gray making setting (B) (1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio)
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A 200 x 100 [DPI] OFF 200 x 100 [DPI] halftone OFF
0 - 2 1
B 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] halftone OFF
0 - 2 1
C 200 x 200 [DPI] ON 200 x 200 [DPI] halftone ON
0 - 2 1
D 200 x 400 [DPI] OFF 200 x 400 [DPI] halftone OFF
0 - 2 1
E 200 x 400 [DPI] ON 200 x 400 [DPI] halftone ON
0 - 2 1
F 400 x 400 [DPI] OFF 400 x 400 [DPI] halftone OFF
0 - 2 1
G 400 x 400 [DPI] ON 400 x 400 [DPI] halftone ON
0 - 2 1
H 600 x 600 [DPI] OFF 600 x 600 [DPI] halftone OFF
0 - 2 1
I 600 x 600 [DPI] ON 600 x 600 [DPI] halftone ON
0 - 2 1
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 48
46-40Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Set the document on the document table.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is setand the scanned document image is outputted.
46-41Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Normal)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Set the document on the document table.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is setand the scanned document image is outputted.
To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the docu-ment and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F,and press [EXECUTE] key.
46-42Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Fine)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Set the document on the document table.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is setand the scanned document image is outputted.
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,and press [EXECUTE] key.
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A EXPOSURE LEVEL(ALL)
Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50G EXECUTE
MODEAUTO Print
modeAuto 1 - 6 1 1
(AUTO)EXP1 Exposure 1 2EXP2 Exposure 2 3EXP3 Exposure 3 4EXP4 Exposure 4 5EXP5 Exposure 5 6
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/
Halftone1 - 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/Halftone
1 - 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/Halftone
1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/Halftone
1 - 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/Halftone
1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/Halftone
1 - 99 50
M EXECUTE MODE
AUTO Print mode
Fine/Auto 1 - 12
1 1 (AUTO)EXP1 Fine/
Exposure 12
EXP2 Fine/Exposure 2
3
EXP3 Fine/Exposure 3
4
EXP4 Fine/Exposure 4
5
EXP5 Fine/Exposure 5
6
AUTO H_TONE
Fine/Automatic/halftone
7
EXP1 H_TONE
Fine/Exposure 1/Halftone
8
EXP2 H_TONE
Fine/Exposure 2/Halftone
9
EXP3 H_TONE
Fine/Exposure 3/Halftone
10
EXP4 H_ONE
Fine/Exposure 4/Halftone
11
EXP5 H_TONE
Fine/Exposure 5/Halftone
12
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 49
46-43Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Super Fine)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Set the document on the document table.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is setand the scanned document image is outputted.
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,and press [EXECUTE] key.
46-44Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Ultra fine)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Set the document on the document table.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is setand the scanned document image is outputted.
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,and press [EXECUTE] key.
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/
Exposure 11 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/Exposure 2
1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/Exposure 3
1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/Exposure 4
1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/Exposure 5
1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine/Auto/Halftone
1 - 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 1/Halftone
1 - 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 2/Halftone
1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 3/Halftone
1 - 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 4/Halftone
1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 5/Halftone
1 - 99 50
M EXECUTE MODE
AUTO Print mode
Super Fine/Auto
1 - 12
1 1 (AUTO)
EXP1 Super Fine/Exposure 1
2
EXP2 Super Fine/Exposure 2
3
EXP3 Super Fine/Exposure 3
4
EXP4 Super Fine/Exposure 4
5
EXP5 Super Fine/Exposure 5
6
AUTO H_TONE
Super Fine/Auto/Halftone
7
EXP1 H_TONE
Super Fine/Exposure 1/Halftone
8
EXP2 H_TONE
Super Fine/Exposure 2/Halftone
9
EXP3 H_TONE
Super Fine/Exposure 3/Halftone
10
EXP4 H_TONE
Super Fine/Exposure 4/Halftone
11
EXP5 H_TONE
Super Fine/Exposure 5/Halftone
12
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/
Halftone1 - 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
Ultra Fine/Exposure 1/Halftone
1 - 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
Ultra Fine/Exposure 2/Halftone
1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
Ultra Fine/Exposure 3/Halftone
1 - 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
Ultra Fine/Exposure 4/Halftone
1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
Ultra Fine/Exposure 5/Halftone
1 - 99 50
M EXECUTE MODE
AUTO Print mode
Ultra Fine/Auto
1 - 12
1 1 (AUTO)
EXP1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1
2
EXP2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2
3
EXP3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3
4
EXP4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4
5
EXP5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5
6
AUTO H_TONE
Ultra Fine/Auto/Halftone
7
EXP1 H_TONE
Ultra Fine/Exposure 1/Halftone
8
EXP2 H_TONE
Ultra Fine/Exposure 2/Halftone
9
EXP3 H_TONE
Ultra Fine/Exposure 3/Halftone
10
EXP4 H_TONE
Ultra Fine/Exposure 4/Halftone
11
EXP5 H_TONE
Ultra Fine/Exposure 5/Halftone
12
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 50
46-45Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(600dpi).SectionOperation/Procedure1) Set the document on the document table.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is setand the scanned document image is outputted.
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,and press [EXECUTE] key.
46-47Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy
and scan images (JPEG).SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.
*1: Disable without HDD.*2: Setting of compression rate for images when the image
compression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode.
NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacityin the document filing mode is decreased. On the otherhand, however, the image quality of some documents maybe remarkably reduced.
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto/
Halftone 11 - 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1/Halftone
1 - 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2/Halftone
1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3/Halftone
1 - 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4/Halftone
1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5/Halftone
1 - 99 50
M EXECUTE MODE
AUTO Print mode
600dpi/Auto
1 - 12
1 1 (AUTO)
EXP1 600dpi/Exposure 1
2
EXP2 600dpi/Exposure 2
3
EXP3 600dpi/Exposure 3
4
EXP4 600dpi/Exposure 4
5
EXP5 600dpi/Exposure 5
6
AUTO H_TONE
600dpi/Auto/Halftone
7
EXP1 H_TONE
600dpi/Exposure 1/Halftone
8
EXP2 H_TONE
600dpi/Exposure 2/Halftone
9
EXP3 H_TONE
600dpi/Exposure 3/Halftone
10
EXP4 H_TONE
600dpi/Exposure 4/Halftone
11
EXP5 H_TONE
600dpi/Exposure 5/Halftone
12
Operation mode
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
FILLING (COLOR) (COLOR mode)*1
A FILLING (C)
LOW Low compression (Color)
0 0 (LOW)
MIDDLE Medium compression (Color)
1
HIGH High compression (Color)
2
FILLING (GRAY) (Mono-chrome halftone mode)*1
B FILLING (G)
LOW Low compression (Gray)
0 0 (LOW)
MIDDLE Medium compression (Gray)
1
HIGH High compression (Gray)
2
PUSH SCAN (COLOR) (Scanner (Color mode))
C SCAN (C) *1
MIDDLE1
Medium compression mode 1Low compression
0 1 (MIDDLE
2)
MIDDLE2
Medium compression mode 2Medium compression
1
MIDDLE3
Medium compression mode 3High compression
2
PUSH SCAN (GRAY) (Scanner (Mono-chrome halftone mode))
D SCAN (G) *2
MIDDLE1
Medium compression mode 1Low compression
0 1 (MIDDLE
2)
MIDDLE2
Medium compression mode 2Medium compression
1
MIDDLE3
Medium compression mode 3High compression
2
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 51
46-60Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color
auto copy mode.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.
46-61Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni-
tion level.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an adjustment mode.2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.4) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.
CAUTION: This must be set to the default unless any change isspecially required.When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly dif-ferent from the default value, image quality trouble mayoccur for some documents.
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A SCREEN FILTER LEVEL
H Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern image in auto copy mode
Strong emphasis
1 3 (Auto)
L Soft emphasis
2
AUTO Auto 3
B CPY PUSH AUTO FILTER LEVEL
SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the automatic push scan mode (Text, Printed Photo / Printed Photo images)
SOFT 1 2 (CENTER)CENTER CENTER 2
HIGH HIGH 3
C B/W COPY
OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome copy mode
OFF 0 1 (ON)ON ON 1
D COLOR PUSH : RGB
OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan color mode
OFF 0 1 (ON)ON ON 1
E B/W PUSH
OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan monochrome mode
OFF 0 1 (ON)ON ON 1
F B/W PRINT
OFF Setting of ON/OFF of soft filter application to monochrome print images
OFF 0 0 (OFF)ON ON 1
Item/Display ContentCOLOR AUTO [Color/Gray] Auto
TPP [Color/Gray] Manual (Text print)MONO AUTO [Monochrome] Auto
TPP [Monochrome] Manual (Text print)
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A SEGMENT: SWITCH [TXT ON SCR]
Detection ON/OFF: Text on dot
0 - 1 0
B SEGMENT: SWITCH [LINE SCR]
Detection ON/OFF: line screen
0 - 1 0
C SEGMENT: SWITCH [SMALL SCR]
Detection ON/OFF: Dot in a small area
0 - 1 0
D SEGMENT: SWITCH [HIGH LPI]
Detection ON/OFF: High line number judgment select
0 - 1 0
E SEGMENT: SWITCH [TXT ON SCR IMAGE SEND]
Detection ON/OFF: Text on image send dots
0 - 1 0
F SEGMENT: ADJUST [BK TXT 1]
Detection level adjustment: Black text 1
1 - 99 50
G SEGMENT: ADJUST [CL TXT 1]
Detection level adjustment: Color text 1
1 - 99 50
H SEGMENT: ADJUST [BK TXT 2, CL TXT 2]
Detection level adjustment: Black text 2, Color text 2
1 - 49 25
I SEGMENT: ADJUST [TXT ON SCR 1]
Detection level adjustment: Text 1 on dots
1 - 99 50
J SEGMENT: ADJUST [TXT ON SCR 2]
Detection level adjustment: Text 2 on dots
1 - 99 50
K SEGMENT: ADJUST [TXT ON SCR AREA]
Detection level adjustment: Detection area of text on dots
1 - 15 8
L SEGMENT: ADJUST [HIGH LPI]
Detection level adjustment: High line number judgment
1 - 49 25
M SEGMENT: ADJUST [BK]
Detection level adjustment: No chrome judgment
1 - 99 50
N SEGMENT: ADJUST [CL]
Detection level adjustment: Chrome judgment
1 - 99 50
O SEGMENT: ADJUST [TXT ON BG]
Detection level adjustment: Text on background
1 - 99 50
P SEGMENT: ADJUST [SCR 1 HIGH]
Detection level adjustment: High density dots
1 - 49 25
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 52
46-62Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
ACS, the area separation, the backgroundimage process, and the auto exposuremode.
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.3) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.
CAUTION: This must be set to the default unless any change isspecially required.When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly dif-ferent from the default value, image quality trouble mayoccur for some documents.
46-63Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low
density section.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.3) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of thebackground and the low density image is increased. When theadjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the backgroundand the low density image is decreased.
Q SEGMENT: ADJUST [SCR 1 MIDDLE]
Detection level adjustment: Medium density dots
1 - 49 25
R SEGMENT: ADJUST [SCR 1 LOW]
Detection level adjustment: Low density dots
1 - 49 25
S SEGMENT: ADJUST [SCR 2]
Detection level adjustment: Dot 2
1 - 15 8
T SEGMENT: ADJUST [SCR 3]
Detection level adjustment: Dot 3
1 - 15 8
U SEGMENT: ADJUST [LINE HALFTONE]
Detection level adjustment: line screen
1 - 49 25
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A SW_ACS ACS judgment reference area select
0 - 1 1
B TEXT_IMAGE Text/Image judgment priority level adjustment
0 - 6 3
C TEXT_BLANK Text/Blank judgment priority level adjustment
0 - 6 4
D HT_LV Dot area judgment threshold value adjustment
0 - 6 1
E AE_AREA_LV Color AE judgment target area adjustment
0 - 6 3
F AE_LV_CC AE background detection division result adjustment: For color copy
0 - 8 4
G AE_LV_MC AE background detection division result adjustment: For monochrome copy
0 - 8 4
H AE_LV_CS AE background detection division result adjustment: For color scan
0 - 8 4
I AE_LV_MS AE background detection division result adjustment: For monochrome scan
0 - 8 4
J AE_JUDGE_LV_L_U
Color AE background density threshold value adjustment (lower limit)
0 - 4 0
K AE_JUDGE_LV_L_O
Color AE background density threshold value adjustment (upper limit)
0 - 10 0
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
L AE_JUDGE_LV_C
Color AE background detection level adjustment (chroma)
0 - 10 5
M AE_ONOFF_CC
ON AE mode ON/OFF switch: For color copy
ON 0 - 1 0 0 (ON)OFF OFF 1
N AE_ONOFF_MC
ON AE mode ON/OFF switch: For mono-chrome copy
ON 0 - 1 0 0 (ON)OFF OFF 1
O AE_ONOFF_CS
ON AE mode ON/OFF switch : For color scan
ON 0 - 1 0 0 (ON)OFF OFF 1
P AE_ONOFF_MS
ON AE mode ON/OFF switch : For mono-chrome copy
ON 0 - 1 0 0 (ON)OFF OFF 1
Q BLANK_JUDGE_LV_L
Blank judgment level adjustment (value)
0 - 10 0
R BLANK_JUDGE_LV_C
Blank judgment level adjustment (chroma)
0 - 10 0
S MODE0_UNDER Mode 0 developing paper mode select
0 - 6 0
T MODE1_UNDER Mode 1 developing paper mode select
0 - 6 0
U MODE5_UNDER Mode 5 developing paper mode select
0 - 6 0
V MODE6_UNDER Mode 6 developing paper mode select
0 - 6 0
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A COLOR COPY : TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
Text print (color copy)
1 - 9 3
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1 - 9 3C COLOR COPY :
PRINTED PHOTOPrinted photo (color copy)
1 - 9 5
D COLOR COPY : PHOTOGRAPH
Photograph (color copy)
1 - 9 5
E COLOR COPY : TEXT/PHOTO
Text/Photograph (color copy)
1 - 9 3
F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1 - 9 5G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document
(color density)1 - 9 6
H COLOR COPY : TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)
Copy document, Character print (color copy)
1 - 9 5
I COLOR COPY : TEXT (COPY TO COPY)
Copy document, Character (color copy)
1 - 9 5
J COLOR COPY : PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)
Copy document, Printed photo (color copy)
1 - 9 5
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 53
48
48-1Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica-
tion ratio (in the main scanning directionand the sub scanning direction).
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnificationratio is increased.A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corre-sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B, D, or F corre-sponds to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.
48-5Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnifi-
cation ratio (in the sub scanning direction).Section Scanner sectionOperation/Procedure1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction isadjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci-fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, performthis adjustment.When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When thereis an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, changethe adjustment value in the low speed mode.
49
49-1PurposeFunction (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Save the firmware to the USB memory.2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the
operation panel section.)3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel.4) Select a target firmware.
Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively.5) Press [EXECUTE] key.6) Press [YES] key.
The selected firmware is updated.When the operation is normally completed, "COMPLETE" isdisplayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is dis-played.
K COLOR PUSH : TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
Text print (color PUSH)
1 - 9 3
L COLOR PUSH : TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1 - 9 3M COLOR PUSH :
PRINTED PHOTOPrinted photo (color PUSH)
1 - 9 5
N COLOR PUSH : PHOTOGRAPH
Photograph (color PUSH)
1 - 9 5
O COLOR PUSH : TEXT/PHOTO
Text/Photograph (color PUSH)
1 - 9 3
P COLOR PUSH : MAP Map (color PUSH) 1 - 9 5
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning magnification ratio adjustment (CCD)
1 - 99 50
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning magnification ratio adjustment (CCD)
1 - 99 50
C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front surface magnification ratio adjustment (Main scan)
1 - 99 50
D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front surface magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan)
1 - 99 50
E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back surface magnification ratio adjustment (Main scan)
1 - 99 50
F SPFB (SUB) RSPF document back surface magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scan)
1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50B MR(MID) Scanner motor (Reference speed) 1 - 99 50C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor
(High speed)1 - 99 50
E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor (Reference speed)
1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content Error display in case of abnormality
ICU (MAIN) ICU Main section ICUMICU (BOOTM) ICU Boot section main ICUBMICU (BOOTCN) ICU Boot section CN ICUCNICU (SUB) ICU Sub section (ARM9) ICUSLANGUAGE Language support data
programLANG
GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD GRAPHSLIST SLIST data for L-LCD SLISTPCU (BOOT) PCU Boot section PCUBPCU (MAIN) PCU Main section PCUMFIN (BOOT) Inner finisher boot section FINBFIN (MAIN) Inner finisher main section FINM
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 54
49-3PurposeFunction (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the
HDD.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key ispressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1.
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis-play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.)The current version and the update version are displayed.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomesactive from gray out.
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual isupdated.When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
49-5PurposeFunction (Purpose) Used to perform the watermark update.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.2) Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark
update.3) The current version and the update version are displayed.4) Press [EXECUTE] key.5) Press [YES] key.
The selected watermark is updated.
50
50-1Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust-
mentSectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to thedefault.RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustmentLEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustmentSIDE: Side image loss adjustment
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifyingthe image lead edge reference is adjusted. (01.mm/step)
* When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. Whenthe value is increased, the timing is delayed.
B - E. (RRC-B) The timing to turning ON the registration roller afterreceiving the registration signal is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When thevalue is increased, the timing is advanced.
F. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.G. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted.
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.(0.1mm/step)
H. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.I. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
step)* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
J. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges ofpaper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
SCU (BOOT) SCU Boot section SCUBSCU (MAIN) SCU Main section SCUMFAX (BOOT) FAX1 Boot section FAXBFAX (MAIN) FAX1 Main section FAXMANIMATION Animation data ANIMEWEB HELP WEB help WEBHP
Item/Display Content Error display in case of abnormality
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A Lead edge adjust-ment value
RRCA Document lead edge reference position (OC)
0 - 99 50
B RRCB-CS12
Regis-tration motor ON timing adjust-ment
Standard Tray
1 - 99 50
C RRCB-DSK Desk 1 - 99 50D RRCB-MFT Manual
paper feed
1 - 99 50
E RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50F Image
loss area setting value
LEAD Lead edge image loss area setting
0 - 99 40
G SIDE Side image loss area adjustment
0 - 99 20
H Void area adjust-ment
DENA Lead edge void area adjustment
1 - 99 30
I DENB Rear edge void area adjustment
1 - 99 30
J FRONT/REAR
FRONT/REAR void area adjustment
1 - 99 20
K Off-center adjust-ment
OFFSET_OC
OC document off-center adjustment
1 - 99 50
L Magnification ratio correction
SCAN_SPEED_OC
SCAN sub scanning magnification ratio adjustment (CCD)
1 - 99 50
M Sub scanning direction print area correction value
DENB-MFT Manual feed correction value
1 - 99 57
N DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction value
1 - 99 50
O DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction value
1 - 99 57
P DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction value
1 - 99 57
Q DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction value
1 - 99 57
R DENB-ADU ADU correction value
1 - 99 60
S DENB-HV Heavy paper correction value
1 - 99 50
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 55
50-2Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
the image loss. (This simulation is a simpli-fied version of SIM 50-1.)
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Set item A (L1) and item B (L2) to 0.2) Place a rule on the left edge of the document table, and make
a copy at a magnification ratio of 400%.3) Measure the length of L1 and L2 on the copied image in the
unit of 0.1mm (referring to the figure below). Enter the adjust-ment values of L1 x 10 and L2 x 10. Be sure to enter the bothadjustment values of L1 and L2.L1: Distance from the lead edge of the copied image to 10mmscale.L2: Distance from the paper lead edge to the copy image leadedge.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)5) Make a copy at the magnification ratio of 100%, and adjust the
rear edge void.
Same as the adjusted items of SIM50-01 except for A and B.The values adjusted with A and B are reflected to the documentlead edge reference position (RRC-A) of SIM50-01 and all thepaper lead edge positions (RRCB-**).All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
Item/Display Description Setting range
Default value
A Actual measurement value
L1 Distance from the image lead edge to the scale of 10mm. (Platen 400%, 0.1mm increment)
0 - 999 -
B L2 Distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge (0.1mm increment)
0 - 999 0
C Image loss area setting value
LEAD Lead edge image loss amount setting (When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.)
0 - 99 40
D SIDE Side edge image loss amount setting (When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.)
0 - 99 20
Paper leadedge
L1
L2
400% enlargement copy
Fig. 1
E Void area adjustment
DENA Lead edge void area adjustment (When the adjustment value is increased, the void is increased.)
1 - 99 30
F DENB Rear edge void area adjustment (When the adjustment value is increased, the void is increased.)
1 - 99 30
G FRONT/REAR
FRONT/REAR void amount adjustment (When the adjustment value is increased, the void is increased.)
1 - 99 20
Item/Display Description Setting range
Default value
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 56
50-5Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
position. (PRINTER MODE)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with scroll key on the
touch panel.2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern isprinted.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustmentpattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it isin the standard adjustment value range.Standard reference value: 4.0mm or less
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from thepaper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When theadjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed byabout 0.1mm.
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustmentvalue is decreased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is decreased.When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value NOTE
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
1 - 99 30 Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the printer. When the adjustment value of this item is decreased by 1, the printer print start position in the paper transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.
B DEN-B Rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 30 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the adjustment value of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the print area adjustment value in the sub scanning direction for the paper transport direction is decreased by 0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area adjustment 1 - 99 20 Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and right edges of paper. When the adjustment value is increased, the void amount is increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void area adjustment correction value
1 - 99 57
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area adjustment correction value
1 - 99 50
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area adjustment correction value
1 - 99 57
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area adjustment correction value
1 - 99 57
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area adjustment correction value
1 - 99 57
I DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria adjustment correction value
1 - 99 60
J DENB-HV Heavy paper correction value 1 - 99 50K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1L PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1 - 5 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2CS2 Tray 2 3CS3 Tray 3 4CS4 Tray 4 5
M DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Yes 0 - 1 0 1 (NO)NO No 1
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 57
50-6Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
the image loss. (RSPF mode)Section RSPFOperation/Procedure1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timingis delayed.Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image lossis increased.Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
50-7Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
the image loss (RSPF mode). (This simula-tion is a simplified version of SIM 50-6.)
Section RSPFOperation/Procedure1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.2) Set item A (L4) and item B (L5) to 0.3) Set the magnification ratio to 200%, and make a copy in the
RSPF duplex mode.4) Measure the size of the printed image. Enter the actual mea-
surement value of distance a (RSPF) to L4 and L5 in the unit of0.1mm.(Adjustment value "1" for 0.1mm)L4: Distance a (RSPF front surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm) L5: Distance a (RSPF back surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm)
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image lossis increased.Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm changeItems C - H are linked with items C - H of SIM50-06.
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A SIDE1 Front surface document scan position adjustment (CCD)
1 - 99 50
B SIDE2 Back surface document scan position adjustment (CCD)
1 - 99 50
C Image loss amount setting SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)
Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting
0 - 99 20
D Image loss amount setting SIDE1
FRONT_REAR(SIDE1)
Front surface side image loss amount setting
0 - 99 20
E TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1)
Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting
0 - 99 40
F Image loss amount setting SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)
Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting
0 - 99 20
G FRONT_REAR(SIDE2)
Back surface side image loss amount setting
0 - 99 20
H TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2)
Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting
0 - 99 40
I OFSET_SPF1 SPF front surface document off-center adjustment
1 - 99 50
J OFSET_SPF2 SPF back surface document off-center adjustment
1 - 99 50
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document front surface magnification ratio (Sub scan)
1 - 99 50
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document back surface magnification ratio (Sub scan)
1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A L4 Distance (SPF 200%, 0.1mm unit) from the front surface image lead edge to the scale of 10mm.
0 - 999 -
B L5 Distance (SPF 200%, 0.1mm unit) from the back surface image lead edge to the scale of 10mm.
0 - 999 -
C LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)
Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting
0 - 99 20
D FRONT_REAR (SIDE1)
Front surface side image loss amount setting
0 - 99 20
E TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1)
Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting
0 - 99 40
F LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)
Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting
0 - 99 20
G FRONT_REAR (SIDE2)
Back surface side image loss amount setting
0 - 99 20
H TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2)
Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting
0 - 99 40
Distance "a"
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 58
50-10Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magni-
fication ratio and the off-center position.(The adjustment is made separately foreach paper feed section.)
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item A - F: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted tothe rear frame side. 1 step = 0.1mm change
50-12Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center
position adjustment. (The adjustment ismade separately for each scan mode.)
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)When the adjustment value is increased, the image position isshifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value isdecreased, it is shifted to the front frame side.1step = 0.1mm
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value NOTEA MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment value (Manual paper feed) 1 - 99 50 Adjustment Item
ListB MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) 1 - 99 50C MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) 1 - 99 50D MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) 1 - 99 50E MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) 1 - 99 50F MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment value (Duplex)
CAUTION: If the adjustment items A - F are not properly adjusted, this adjustment cannot be executed properly.
1 - 99 50
G SUB-MFT Registration motor ON timing adjustment Manual paper feed 1 - 99 50H SUB-CS12 Standard cassette 1 - 99 50I SUB-DSK DESK 1 - 99 50J SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern
print conditions setting
L PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1 - 5 1 2 (CS1)CS1 Tray 1 2CS2 Tray 2 3CS3 Tray 3 4CS4 Tray 4 5
M DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Yes 0 - 1 0 1 (NO)NO No 1
Item/Display Content Setting range Default valueA OC Document table image off-center adjustment 1 - 99 50B SPF (SIDE1) SPF front surface image off-center adjustment 1 - 99 50C SPF (SIDE2) SPF back surface image off-center adjustment 1 - 99 50
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 59
50-27Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment
of scanned images in the FAX or imagesend mode.
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER]
key.2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.3) Enter the set value with 10-key.4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.1step = 0.1mm
50-28Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image
loss, void area, image off-center, and imagemagnification ratio.
SectionOperation/ProcedureThe following adjustment items can be executed automatically withSIM50-28.* ADJ 12 Print image position, image magnification ratio, void
area, off-center adjustments (Manual adjustments)* ADJ 13 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual
adjustment)* ADJ 14 Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)* ADJ 15 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image
loss (Manual adjustments)1) Select an adjustment item with the menu button.2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.3) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.5) Press [OK] key.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default valueFAX send A Image loss
amount setting OC
LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)B FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)C TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)D Image loss
amount setting SPF SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)E FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)F TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)G Image loss
amount setting SPF SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)H FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)I TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
When image send mode (Except for FAX and copy)
A Image loss amount setting OC
LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)B FRONT_REAR(OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)C TRAIL_EDGE(OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)D Image loss
amount setting SPF SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)E FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)F TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)G Image loss
amount setting SPF SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)H FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)I TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
Item/Display Content SectionOC ADJ MFT Document lead
edge
Document off-centerSub scanning magnification ratio
Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
ScannerCS1CS2
Item/Display Content SectionSPF ADJ (RSPF)
ALL SIDE1 (Front surface)
MFT Document lead edge
Document off-centerSub scanning magnifica-tion ratioDocument lead edgeDocument off-centerSub scanning magnifica-tion ratio
Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image magnifica-tion ratio adjustment (RSPF mode)
Scanner
SIDE2 (Back surface)
CS1CS2
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 60
51
51-2Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec-
tion amount) on paper by the main unit andthe RSPF registration roller. (This adjust-ment is performed when there is a consid-erable variation in the print image positionon the paper or when paper jams frequentlyoccur.)
SectionOperation/Procedure1) (When RSPF model)
Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or[ENGINE] keys.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.3) Enter the set value with 10-key.4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/Display Content SectionSETUP/PRINT ADJ
ALL LEAD MFT Print off center
Print lead edge
Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
EngineCS1CS2
OFFSET ADUCS3CS4
RESULT Adjustment result displayDATA Adjustment operation data display
Mode Display/Item Content Setting range
Default value
SIDE1 A NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
- 1 - 99 50
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
- 1 - 99 50
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
- 1 - 99 50
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
- 1 - 99 50
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
- 1 - 99 50
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Random/Plain paper/LOW)
- 1 - 99 50
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
- 1 - 99 50
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value (Random/Thin paper/LOW)
- 1 - 99 50
SIDE2 A NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_1 RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
- 1 - 99 50
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1 RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
- 1 - 99 50
ENGINE A TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size)
LT size (216mm) or less
1 - 99 25
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size)
LT size (216mm) or above
1 - 99 25
C TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size)
LT size (216mm) or less
1 - 99 50
D TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size)
LT size (216mm) or above
1 - 99 50
E MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less
1 - 99 40
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 61
Note on “Large size” and “Small size”Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter than the LT size (216mm).Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer than the LT size (216mm).Adjustment valueWhen the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp amount isdecreased.(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is changed by 0.1mm.)
51-9Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the
separation voltage.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
*1: Transfer V2ON reference (Synchronized with the adjustment value of 50)
*2: Transfer V2OFF reference (Synchronized with the adjustment value of 50)
53
53-6Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the
RSPF document width.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The maximum width detection level is recognized.3) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width.4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The A4R width detection level is recognized.5) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key.The A5R width detection level is recognized.
7) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width.8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" isdisplayed and. When the above operation is completed normally,"COMPLETE" is displayed.
53-7Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the RSPF document size
width sensor.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.2) Enter the set value with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
ENGINE F MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above
1 - 99 40
G MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size)
LT size (216mm) or less
1 - 99 70
H MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size)
LT size (216mm) or above
1 - 99 70
I MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 30J MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Envelope) - 1 - 99 40K ADU PLAIN PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value
(Plain paper/Small size)LT size (216mm) or less
1 - 99 50
L ADU PLAIN PAPER (L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size)
LT size (216mm) or above
1 - 99 50
M DESK (S) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size)
LT size (216mm) or less
1 - 99 20
N DESK (L) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size)
LT size (216mm) or above
1 - 99 25
Mode Display/Item Content Setting range
Default value
Item Display Content Setting range
Default value
A SHV ON Separation voltage ON/OFF timing adjustment *1
25 - 90 50
B SHV OFF Separation voltage OFF timing adjustment *2
50 - 90 75
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
Item/Display Setting range
Default value
A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 84B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 509C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 808D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 961
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 62
53-8Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge ref-
erence and the RSPF mode documentscan position.
SectionOperation/ProcedureSelect an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key.AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment(Auto adjustment)1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document
table.2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the
adjustment value is saved.)
MANUAL: RSPF mode document scan position adjustment1) Enter the set value with 10-key.2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
• When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop posi-tion in the RSPF mode is shifted to the right.
• When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position isshifted by 0.1mm.
55
55-1Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.)Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine
control operations. (SOFT SW)SectionOperation/Procedure
55-2Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.)Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan-
ner control operation. (SOFT SW)SectionOperation/Procedure
55-3Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.)Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control-
ler operation. (SOFT SW)SectionOperation/Procedure
55-10Purpose Adjustment/SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan
only)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select an item to be set (digit, color, type) with the scroll key.2) Enter the value corresponding to the setting item with 10-key.3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Input value
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
MEASUREMENT DISTANCE
Document lead edge measurement distance
0-255 (0.1mm unit)
-
RRCA Document lead edge reference position
0 - 99 50
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A ADJUST VALUE
RSPF mode document scan position adjustment (Scanner stop position adjustment)
1 - 99 5
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value
A 1ST DIGIT First digit (left edge) 1 - 90 1B 2ND DIGIT Second digitC 3RD DIGIT Third digit 32 [blank:
20H]D 4TH DIGIT Fourth digit 65 - 90
[Alphabet: 41H("A) - 5AH("Z")]
E 5TH DIGIT Fifth digit 48 - 57 [Numeral: 30H("0") - 39H("9")]
F 6TH DIGIT Sixth digit (right edge)
G COLOR K Color specification input
0 0C 1M 2Y 3R 4G 5B 6
H TYPE PATTERN1
Print com-posing method
Edging type
0 1
PATTERN2
OR process type
1
PATTERN3
No-delete-compo-sition type
2
Print Blank A B C E F GInput value 32 65 66 67 69 70 71
Print H I J K L M NInput value 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
Print O P Q R T U VInput value 79 80 81 82 84 85 86
Print W X Y Z 0 1 2Input value 87 88 89 90 48 49 50
Print 3 5 6 7 8 9Input value 51 53 54 55 56 57
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 63
56
56-1Purpose BackupFunction (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP
PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair thePWB.)
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select a target content of data transfer.2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" isdisplayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
56-2Purpose Data backupFunction (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM.
SD Card, and HDD (including user authen-tication data and address data) to the USBmemory. (Corresponding to the devicecloning and the storage backup.)
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
<IMPORT>From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SD Card HDD<EXPORT>From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD To USB MEMORY
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performedWhen the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" isdisplayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Machine with the DSK installed1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
• IMPORTFrom USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card HDD
• EXPORTFrom EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
3) Enter the password with 10-key.4) Press [SET] key.5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" isdisplayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Data list outside the backup targetsEEPROM/SD Card
HDD
56-3Purpose Data backupFunction (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to
the USB memory.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
<IMPORT>From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card, HDD<EXPORT>From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" isdisplayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
56-4Purpose Data backupFunction (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the
USB memory.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key.3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" isdisplayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
EEPROM HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDDHDD EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
PWB Type Content NOTEController Machine serial No.
Product key informationVarious counter Copy counter/FAX
send counter etc.Trouble history
PCU Machine serial No.Various counter Maintenance counterMachine adjustment execute historyTrouble history
SCU Various counter Maintenance counterTrouble history
Classifi-cation Content NOTE
Japanese FEP
User dictionary
Job end list Job end list display data (The image send series include the preserved job list.)
Log Job log Read from WEB is enable.
New N/A • Print history information• JAM history information• Trouble history information• Same position continuous jam
count value• Charging information• Life information
Operation manual
E-manual
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 64
56-5Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB
memory in the TEXT format.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.2) Select a kind of data to be imported.3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Procedure 2) The selected data are imported.When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" isdisplayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
56-11Purpose Data copyFunction (Purpose) Used to save the data in the SD card to the
HDD temporarily.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
The data are saved temporarily to the HDD.When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" isdisplayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
56-12Purpose Data copyFunction (Purpose) Used to copy the SD card data saved tem-
porarily in the HDD with SIM56-11 to themachine.
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
The set values are copied from the HDD to the SD card.When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" isdisplayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
60
60-1Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the memory operations
(read/write) of the MFP PWB.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Start the test.
61
61-1Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-
tion and laser detection.Section LSUOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
Error display ContentCOMPLETE Normal completionWARNING HDD unmountingERROR (HDD ACCESS ERROR) HDD access disableERROR (LOW LEVEL BLOCK WRITE ERROR)
Low level block IO error: write
ERROR (LOW LEVEL BLOCK READ ERROR)
Low level block IO error: read
ERROR (NO DATA ADJUSTMENT) Inconsistent dataTROUBLE (U2-42) U2-42 occurrence
Error display ContentCOMPLETE Normal completionWARNING SD/HDD unmountingNO DATA No dataERROR (EXPORT DATA ILLEGAL) Export data illegalERROR (LOW LEVEL BLOCK READ ERROR)
Low level block IO error: read
ERROR (NO DATA ADJUSTMENT) Inconsistent data (Error at the verify check)
ERROR (SD ACCESS ERROR) SD access error (File IO error)
Result display DescriptionOK SuccessNG FailNONE Not installed (Including DIMM trouble)INVALID Execution disable
SLOT DescriptionICU SLOT-1 ICU standard memory DIMM1ICU SLOT-2 ICU expansion memory DIMM2PCL SLOT-1 Printer standard memory DIMM3PCL SLOT-2 Printer expansion memory DIMM4ACRE SLOT Enhanced compression kit memory -
Display ContentLSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormalityLSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 65
61-3Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to set the laser power SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY], [PR600/
FAX], [PR1200] on the touch panel.2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value areincreased, the print density is increased and the line width ofline images are increased.
62
62-1Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (HDD:
Excluding the Operation manual and thewatermark data)
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.2) Press [YES] key.
Used to execute the HDD format.When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to thenormal display.
62-2Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(partial).SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.2) Press [YES] key.
62-3Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(all areas).SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.2) Press [YES] key.
Read/write operations are performed.
62-6Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the
hard disk.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Select the self diag area.2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The self diag operation is performed.
NOTE: E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD,use this simulation to cheek the HDD.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to thenormal display.Normal completion "OK (RESULT:0)" is displayed. Abnormal end "NG (RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.* If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for
some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding sec-tion.
62-7Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics
error log.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, andthe result is printed.When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to thenormal display.
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
Default valueDestination
linkage26cpm machine
31cpm machine
35cpm machine
COPY A LASER POWER (BW) Laser power setting/BW 0 - 255 145 163 181 ✕
B LASER POWER TS (BW) Laser power setting toner save/BW 0 - 255 145 163 181 ✕
PR600/FAX A LASER POWER (BW) Laser power setting/BW 0 - 255 145 163 181 ✕
B LASER POWER TS (BW) Laser power setting toner save/BW 0 - 255 145 163 181 ✕
PR1200 A LASER POWER (BW) Laser power setting/BW 0 - 255 145 163 181 ✕
B LASER POWER TS (BW) Laser power setting toner save/BW 0 - 255 145 163 181 ✕
SHORT S.T Partial area diagEXTENDED S.T All area diag
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 66
62-8Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (HDD:
Excluding the Operation Manual, the water-mark data, and the system area)
SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.2) Press [YES] key.
Used to execute the hard disk format.When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to thenormal display.* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)NG" is displayed.
62-10Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to clear the job completion list data.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.2) Press [YES] key.
Used to delete the job log data.When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to thenormal display.
62-11Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.2) Press [YES] key.
Used to delete the document filing data.When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to thenormal display.
62-12Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
in a hard disk trouble.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Enter the set value with 10-key.2) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the systemdata storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the systemdata storage area is cleared.
62-13Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Operation
Manual, watermark data only)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.2) Press [YES] key.
The operation manual data are deleted.When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to thenormal display.
62-14Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to initialize (remake) only the data-
base file of the HDD.Section HDDOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.2) Press [YES] key.
The database file is initializedWhen the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to thenormal display.
63
63-1Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction
result.Section ScannerOperation/Procedure1) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch
panel.
A 0 Enable1 Disable (Default)
Item/Display Content NOTE
GAIN ODD Gain adjustment value (odd number)
GAIN EVEN Gain adjustment value (Even number)
OFFSET ODD
Offset value (odd number)
OFFSET EVEN
Offset value (even number)
SMP AVE ODD
Reference plate sampling average value (ODD)
SMP AVE EVEN
Reference plate sampling average value (EVEN)
TARGET VALUE
Target value
BLACK LEVEL
Black output level
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 67
63-2Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to perform shading.SectionOperation/Procedure1) (When RSPF model)
Press [EXECUTE] key.Used to perform shading.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to thenormal display.
63-3Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD) color bal-
ance and gamma auto adjustment.Section ScannerOperation/Procedure1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)
on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the doc-ument table.
2) Select a target color of data display with [R] [G] [B] keys, andpress [OC] key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per-formed.
When the operation is completed, data are displayed on the initialscreen.
63-4Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data checkFunction (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-ment table.
2) Select a target color of data display with [R] [G] [B] keys, andpress [OC] key.
3) Select a data display mode.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.The patch of the SIT chart is scanned.When the operation is completed, data are displayed on theinitial screen.
63-5Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color
balance and gamma default setting.SectionOperation/Procedure1) Press [SIDE A(OC)] key.2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key3) The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the
default.
ERROR CODE
Error code (0, 1-14)(for debug)
0 No error1 Loop number over2 The target value is under
the specified value.3 The gain set value is
negative.4 END is not asserted.
(Gain adjustment)5 (reserve)6 Underflow7 Black shading error8 Other error9 END is not asserted.
(White shading)10 END is not asserted.
(Black shading)11 END is not asserted.
(Light quantity correction)12 END is not asserted.
(Scan)13 Register check error.
(When booting/Before gain)
14 Register check error. (Before light quantity correction)
RSPF WHITE LEVEL 1ST
First scan RSPF white reference level
RSPF WHITE LEVEL 2ND
Second scan RSPF white reference level
Item/Display Content NOTE
GAMMA THROUGH SIT chart scan dataCOPY GAMMA Copy mode gamma process data of the SIT chart
scan dataSCANNER GAMMA Image send mode gamma process data of the SIT
chart scan dataSIT CHECK SIT chart scan data/Check result
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 68
64
64-2Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.Change the set values with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.The test print (self print) is performed.
Print pattern of Item A
Item/Display Content Setting range Default valueA PRINT PATTERN
(1, 2, 17 - 19)Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to the description below.)
1 - 58 (Printable only 1, 2, 17 - 19)
1
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A: 2) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n)
1-255 (Pattern 2, 11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
1
C DOT2 (DOT1>=2 IF A:2) Setting of blank dot number (N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n)
0-255 (Pattern2, 11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
254
D DENSITY (DOT1>=2 IF A:2) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1F EXPOSURE
(2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19)THROUGH Exposure mode
specificationNo process (through) 1-8
(Pattern 17-19: 2-8 except above: 1-8)
1 8 (STANDARD
DITHER)CHAR/PIC Text/Printed Photo 2CHAR/PRPIC Text/ Photograph 3CHAR Text 4PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5PRINT PAPER Photograph 6MAP Map 7STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1 - 5 1 2 (CS1)CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3CS3 Tray 3 4CS4 Tray 4 5
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection
Yes 0 - 1 0 1 (NO)NO No 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1 - 6 1 1 (PLAIN)HEAVY Heavy paper 2
OHP OHP 3ENVELOPE Envelope 4
Pattern No. Content Pattern generating section NOTE
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC • Print is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge. • Writing regardless of void. The first one is fixed to LD1.
2 Dot print –17 All background (halftone) Halftone (IMG-ASIC
rear process)–
18 256 gradations pattern (Other dither)
• 16 gradations are printed in the main scan direction, and the following 16 gradations are printed in the next line. (16 x 16 patch print)
• Printing is started at 5mm from the paper lead edge.• Printing is made from 255 gradation, and 0 - 254 gradations are printed.
19 256 gradations pattern (For text dither)
–
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 69
64-4Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.Change the set values with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.3) The test print (self print) is performed.
Print pattern of Item A
64-5Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.Change the set values with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.The test print (self print) is performed.
Print pattern of Item A
Item/Display Content Setting range Default valueA PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern
(* For details, refer to the description below.)1 - 3 3
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray selection Manual paper feed 1 3
(CS2)CS1 Tray 1 2CS2 Tray 2 3CS3 Tray 3 4CS4 Tray 4 5
E PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0 0HEAVY Heavy paper 1
Pattern No. Content1 256 gradations pattern (B/W)2 Halftone pattern (B/W)3 Background dot print
Item/Display Content Setting range Default valueA PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1 - 2 2B MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1C PAPER MFT Paper feed tray
selectionManual paper feed 1 2
(CS1)CS1 Tray 1 2CS2 Tray 2 3CS3 Tray 3 4CS4 Tray 4 5
D PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0 0 (PLAIN)HEAVY Heavy paper 1
E TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner save
not set. 0 0 (OFF)ON set. 1
Pattern No. Content1 B/W2 Service chart (B/W)
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 70
64-6Purpose Operation test/checkFunction (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)SectionOperation/Procedure1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.Change the set values with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.The test print (self print) is performed.
Print pattern of Item A
65
65-1Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis-
play section) detection coordinates.Section Operation panel sectionOperation/ProcedureTouch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of thescreen.When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts tothe simulation sub number entry menu.In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu.
65-2Purpose Operation check/testFunction (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD dis-
play section) detection coordinates.SectionOperation/ProcedureTouch the touch panel.The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) ofthe touched position is displayed in real time.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default valueA PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1 1B MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1C PAPER MFT Paper feed tray
selectionManual paper feed 1 2
(CS1)CS1 Tray 1 2CS2 Tray 2 3CS3 Tray 3 4CS4 Tray 4 5
D PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0 0 (PLAIN)HEAVY Heavy paper 1
E TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner save
not set. 0 0 (OFF)ON set. 1
Pattern No. Content1 B/W
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 71
65-5Purpose Operation check/testFunction (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key
input.SectionOperation/ProcedurePress the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed onthe screen.If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next keyis displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"is displayed.<Check target key>
66
66-1Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2
- 150) on the LCD to allow changing thesoft SW while checking with the LCD.
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value of [SW NO] iscleared.
2) Press [DATA] button.The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.* When [SW NO] button is pressed, the display returns to the
initial screen.3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
10-key.* [1] [0]
[0] [1]4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
setting is saved.After saving the setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the nor-mal display.
66-2Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to enter a country code and set the
default value for the country code.Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-02, the following
screen is displayed.* When [DEST CODE] button is pressed, the display is shifted
to the country code list screen.* The currently set country code is displayed in the column of
"PRESENT:".2) Enter the country code (8 digits) with 10-key([0]/[1]). The
entered country code is displayed in the column of "NEW:" and[SET] key becomes active.* When [C] key is pressed, the column of “NEW:” is cleared.
3) When [SET] button is pressed after entering the country code,[EXECUTE] button becomes active. The country code is dis-played in the column of "PRESENT:", and the column of"NEW:" is cleared.
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and[YES] and [NO] buttons become active. The country name isdisplayed on the tile line.
5) When [YES] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the soft SWcorresponding to the country code is initialized.
6) After completion of initialization of the soft SW, [EXECUTE],[YES], and [NO] buttons become inactive.
Operation/Procedure (Shifting to the country page)* When [DEST CODE] button is pressed on the initial screen, the
display is shifted to the country code list screen.Use scroll keys to select the country select page.
Country code list
JOB STATUSSYSTEM SETTINGSHOME123456789AUDIT CLEAR0PROGRAMCLEARSTOPCLEAR ALL/RESETSTART (MONO)
JAPAN 00000000U.S.A. 10110101AUSTRALIA 00001001U.K. 10110100FRANCE 00111101GERMANY 00000100SWEDEN 10100101NEWZEALAND 01111110CHINA 00100110SINGAPORE 10011100TW 11111110MIDDLEANDNEAREAST 11111101SLOVAKIA 11111100OTHER3 11111011FINLAND 00111100NORWAY 10000010DENMARK 00110001NETHERLANDS 01111011ITALY 01011001SWITZERLAND 10100110AUSTRIA 00001010INDONESIA 01010100THAILAND 10101001MALAYSIA 01101100INDIA 01010011PHILIPPINES 10001001HONGKONG 01010000RUSSIA 10111000SOUTHAFRICA 10011111SPAIN 10100000PORTUGUESE 10001011LUXEMBURG 01101001BELGIUM 00001111CZECH 00101110HUNGARY 01010001
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 72
66-3Purpose Operation test/CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the EEPROM
and the SDRAM on the MODEM controllerand display the result.
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-03, the following
screen is displayed.* Select the page of memory check item with the scroll key.
2) When the memory check item button is selected, the display isshifted to the memory check screen.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and thememory check of the selected item is started.
4) After completion of memory check, [EXECUTE] button returnsto the normal display and the result of memory check is dis-played.
Memory check status
Check item
The number in < > indicates the line.
66-4Purpose Operation test/CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to send the selected signals to the
line and the main unit speaker. (Send level:max.)
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-04, the screen on the
right is displayed. (Default, left upper selected.)* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page.
2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high-lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normaldisplay.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-nals are sent.
4) To end signal send:When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-nal send is interrupted.
Signal send table
66-5Purpose Operation test/CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal to the line
and the main unit speaker. (Send level: SoftSW setting) (For the kinds of send signals,refer to SIM66-04.)
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-05, the following
screen is displayed.* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page.
2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high-lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normaldisplay.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-nals are sent.
4) To end signal send:* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and
signal send is interrupted.
66-6Purpose Data output/CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to print the confidential registration
check table (BOX NO., BOX name, pass-code. (If there is no confidential registra-tion, no print is made.)
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
confidential checkable is printed.* If there is no confidential registration, no print is made even
though [EXECUTE] key is pressed.2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
66-7Purpose Data output/CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to output all image data saved in the
image memory. (Confidential data are alsooutputted.)
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all
image data saved in the image memory are outputted.2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
GREECE 01000110POLAND 10001010BRAZIL 00010110
NO CHECK No checkCHECKING During checkingOK Check complete OKNG A## Check complete NG Error occurring address or data
line is displayed for each item.
Check memory item Remark1 All Memory Device Check (once) All the items are checked
once.2 MODEM EEPROM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE13 MODEM EEPROM <1> (repeat) Repeat check in LINE14 MODEM SDRAM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE15 MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat) Repeat check in LINE1
NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V3426.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V3416.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V347.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V3312.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V177.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 11000.3 V21 ANSam RINGER No RBT
DP MAKE DP BRK NO MSG
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 73
66-8Purpose Operation test/CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound mes-
sages to the line and the speaker. (Sendlevel: Max.)
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-08, the following
screen is displayed.2) When the sound message button to be sent is selected, it is
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normaldisplay.
<Sound message table>
66-9Purpose Operation test/CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound message
to the line and the speaker. (Send level:Soft SW setting) * For details of sound messages, refer tothe sound message table of SIM66-08.
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-09, the following
screen is displayed.2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normaldisplay.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and asound message is sent.
4) To end signal send:When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-nal send is interrupted.
66-10Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX and image send
image data. (The confidential data are alsocleared.)
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] button.2) Press [YES] button.3) After completion of clearing, press [CA] key to reboot the
machine.
66-11Purpose Operation test/CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps
to the line and the speaker. (Send level:Max.)
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-11, the following
screen is displayed.2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normaldisplay.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and asound message is sent.
4) To end signal send:When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-nal send is interrupted.
300bps send signal table
66-12Purpose Operation test/CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps
to the line and the speaker. (Send level:Soft SW setting) * For the kings of send signals at 300bps,refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signaltable.
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-12, the following
screen is displayed.2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normaldisplay.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and asound message is sent.
4) To end signal send:When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-nal send is interrupted.
66-13Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-
14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can beregistered.)
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-13, the following
screen is displayed.* The number saved in the memory is displayed in the column
of [PRESENT:]. (If there is no data, [-------] is displayed.)2) Enter a number with 10-key.
The entered number is displayed in the column of [NEW:].After entering 20 digits, 10-key is disabled (no response). Only[C] key is enabled. (10-key [0] to [9], [*], [#], [C] key (back byone digit))
3) When [SET] key is pressed after completion of entry, theentered number is displayed (registered) in the column of[PRESENT:]. The column of [NEW:] becomes blank.
NONE (Mute) PAUSE (Pause melody)
MESSAGE1 (Message 1)
MESSAGE2 (Message 2)
MESSAGE3 (Message 3)
MESSAGE4 (Message 4)
MESSAGE5 (Massage 5)
MESSAGE6 (Message 6)
ALARM (Alarm) RINGER (Ringing sound (Speaker))
EXT.TEL.RINGER (External telephone call) NO SIGNAL 11111 11110 00000
010101 00001
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 74
66-14Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS)
send test and to adjust the make time.Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-14, the following
screen is displayed.2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time.3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The but-
ton returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
66-15Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS)
send test and to adjust the make time.Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-15, the following
screen is displayed.2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time.* The dial pulse in this example is up to 20 digits registered
with SIM66-13.3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The but-
ton returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
66-16Purpose AdjustmentFunction (Purpose) Used to execute the DTFM signal send test
and to adjust the send level.Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-16, the following
screen is displayed.2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
dial pulse signal is sent from the line by the setting of high/lowgroup of the signal send level.
3) To terminate the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button. The buttonreturns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
66-17Purpose Operation test/CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-17, the following
screen is displayed.2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
the previously set button returns to the normal display.3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
nals are sent.4) To stop signal sending:
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normaldisplay and signal sending is interrupted.
66-18Purpose Operation test/CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW set-ting)
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-18, the following
screen is displayed.2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
the previously set button returns to the normal display.3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
nals are sent.4) To stop signal sending:
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normaldisplay and signal sending is interrupted.
66-21Purpose CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to print the selected items (system
error, protocol monitor).Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When an item button to be printed is selected, it is highlighted
and the previously set button returns to the normal display.2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and printing is started.3) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
FAX information print content table
66-22Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set the handset sound volume.
(This simulation can be executed eventhough the handset setting is set to NO.When, however, the handset is notinstalled, the sound volume cannot bechecked.) (Japan model only)
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters the simulation, the number of the set
sound volume is displayed. (In this example, MIDDLE is set asthe default sound volume.)
2) Use 10-key to set the handset sound volume. (0: MIN 1:MID-DLE 2:MAX)
3) Press [EXECUTE] button to deliver the selected on-hold tone.* If, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume
cannot be checked. Execution is possible.4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and deliv-
ery of the on-hold tone is stopped.
PROTOCOL LINE 1 SYSTEM ERROR LINE 1
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 75
66-24Purpose Data clearFunction (Purpose) Used to clear the FAST save data.Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] button.2) Press [YES] button.
The FAST save data are cleared.3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] button returns
to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
66-29Purpose ClearFunction (Purpose) Used to initialize the telephone book data
(the one-touch registration table, the FTP/Desktop expansion table, the group expan-sion table, the program registration table,the interface memory box table, the metadata, InboundRouting, and the Documen-tAdmin table).
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] button.2) Press [YES] button.
The telephone book data area cleared.3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] button returns
to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
66-30Purpose Operation test/CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to display the TEL/LIU status change,
The display is highlighted by status change.Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-30, the following
screen is displayed.2) HS1, HS2, RHS, and EXHS are highlighted when the signal is
detected, and displayed normally when the signal is notdetected.
TEL/LIU status change item description
66-31Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to
TEL/LIU.Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-31, the following
screen is displayed.2) Change the port setting.
When a port is set to ON, the port display is highlighted.3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the changed setting is
reflected to the port which outputs to TEL/LIU.4) To terminate the process, press [EXECUTE] button again.
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
Port which outputs to TEL/LIU
66-32Purpose Operation test/CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to check the fixed data received from
the line and to display the result.Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] button to check the fixed data received from
the line. At that time, [EXECUTE] button is highlighted.* Fixed data check procedure• The data received from the line is checked of the following
fixed data status for minutes, then if they are in accord with“OK” is displayed on LCD, if not “NG” is displayed.
• The judgment is made in 2 minutes.Receive speed: 300BPSReceive data: 00HJudgment data: 100byte
2) After completion of check, [EXECUTE] button returns to thenormal display. The result is displayed as "OK" or "NG."
66-33Purpose Operation test/CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to execute detection of various sig-
nals with the line connected and to displaythe detection result. When a signal isdetected, the display is highlighted.
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-33, the following
screen is displayed.2) The signal to be checked can be selected from the two
options: "FNET" and "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF."3) When a signal is detected, "FNET" and "BUSY TONE CNG
CED DTMF" are highlighted. When a signal is not detected,they are normally displayed.
Signal used for signal detection check
(When "FNET" is selected)
(When "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF" is selected)
66-34Purpose Operation test/CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to execute the send test and display
the time required for sending image data inthe test. Used to execute send test and dis-play. (Unit: ms)
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) FAX send is performed.2) Enter the SIM 66-34 mode.
The send time in procedure 1) is displayed.
HS1 Polarity inversion signalHS2 Polarity inversion signalRHS Handset hook SWEXHS External telephone hook SW
CION MR EC S.
FNET
BUSY TONE CNG CED DTMF
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 76
66-36Purpose Operation test/CheckFunction (Purpose) Used to check send and receive data from
the MODEM controller to the MFP control-ler or the data line or the command lineindividually.
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-36, the following
screen is displayed.2) Operation check
Select an item to be checked on the screen.
MFP controller I/F check item table
66-39Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to check and change the destination
setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX.Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters the simulation, the currently set des-
tination button is highlighted. (In the default state, JAPAN is setas the destination.)
2) Select a destination button to set the destination. (In thisexample, USA/CANADA is selected.) The selected button ishighlighted and the previously selected button returns to thenormal display.* When the destination button is changed, the new destination
setting is saved to EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
Destination setting table
66-42Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to rewrite the program to power con-
trol installed in the FAX BOX.Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] button.[EXECUTE] button is highlighted
and YES] and [NO] buttons become active.2) Press [YES] button.
The power control program is rewritten.3) When rewriting of the power control program is normally com-
pleted, "OK" is displayed and [EXECUTE] button returns to thenormal display, and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
66-43Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to write the adjustment value into the
power control installed in the FAX BOX.Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-43, the following
screen is displayed.* Use scroll keys to select the select item of the power control
adjustment value.2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and writing
to the power control is executed. When writing is normallycompleted, "OK" is displayed. When it is failed, "NG" is dis-played.
3) After completion of writing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor-mal display.
Set range and default value of each set value
66-61Purpose SettingFunction (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW
(151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changingthe soft SW while checking with the LCD.
Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.2) Press [DATA] button.
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
10-key.* [1] [0]
[0] [1]4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
setting is saved.
66-62Purpose BackupFunction (Purpose) Used to import the FAX receive data into a
USB memory in PDF file type.Section FAXOperation/Procedure1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.2) Select data to be imported.3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Execute import of data selected in procedure 2).When the operation is completed normally, [COMPLETE] isdisplayed. In case of an abnormal end, [ERROR] is displayed.
MFP MDMC (DATA once)Data line Once
MFP MDMC (DATA once)Data line Once
MFP MDMC (DATA repeat)Data line Repeat
MFP MDMC (DATA repeat)Data line Repeat
MFP MDMC (CMD once)Command line Once
MFP MDMC (CMD once)Command line Once
MFP MDMC (CMD repeat)Command line Repeat
MFP MDMC (CMD repeat)Command line Repeat
JAPAN U.S.A/CANADA EUROPE AUSTRALIACHINA ASIA&OTHERS
Item Set range Default valueA CI_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 6B CI_CYCLE_MIN 1 to 254 10C CI_CYCLE_MAX 2 to 255 142D CI_COUNT 2 to 15 3E RES_3.3V_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 15F EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 225 240G RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 2H SON_TIMEOUT 1 to 127 20
Error display ContentERROR: NO USB MEMORY DEVICE No USB memory installedERROR: NO IMAGE DATA No image dataERROR Other errors
MX-M264U SIMULATION 6 – 77
67
67-17Purpose ResetFunction (Purpose) Printer resetSection PrinterOperation/Procedure1) Press [EXECUTE] key.2) Press [YES] key.
The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including theNIC setting.)
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to thenormal display.
67-45Purpose Adjustment/SetupFunction (Purpose) Used to adjust the printer image filter and
trapping.Section PrinterOperation/Procedure1) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/Display Content Setting range
Default value NOTE
A SHARPNESS: B/W PRINT
Monochrome print
0 - 4 2 The greater the set value is, the stronger the filer enhancement is. The smaller the set value is, the stronger the filter smoothness is.(0: Soft High, 1: Soft Low, 2: Center, 3: Sharp Low, 4: Sharp High)
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 1
MX-M264U[7] TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Error code and troubleshootingA. GeneralWhen a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum-able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machinedetects and displays it on the display section. This allows the userand the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble,this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops themachine to minimize the damage.
B. Function and purpose1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a
trouble.)2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is
stopped on detection of a trouble.)3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,improving the repair efficiency.)
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allowsto arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (Thisavoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con-sumable part.)
C. Self diag message kindsThe self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
D. Self diag operationThe machine always monitors its own state.When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation anddisplays the trouble message.A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life isnearly expired or is expired.When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be ormay not be stopped.The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed bythe LCD and lamp.Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-tion.Some warning messages of consumable parts are automaticallycleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-sages must be cleared by a simulation.
Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration, etc.)
Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Others -Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a consumable part, etc.)
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is stopped.
Others -
Monitors the machineconditions.
Detects/analyzesthe content.
Trouble/Warning
Trouble/Warning
Repair
Troubleshoot the cause.
Standby state
The machine is stopped.
The content is displayed.
Warning
Warning
Trouble
No
YES
Trouble
Reset
Replace or supplythe consumable part.
Cancel the self-diagnosticmessage with thediagnostic (test commands).
A consumablepart has reachedits lifetime
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 2
E. Breakdown sequence(1) Error code and operatable mode
Trouble contentJudg-ment block
Trouble code
(26cpm/31cpm/35cpm)
machine)
Operatable mode
Copy scan (including interrup-
tion)
Scan (Push)
Scan (Pull)
Scan-To
HDDPrint List
printFAX Send
FAX print
FAST Notifi-cation to host
FAX board trouble • FAX board breakdown
MFP F6 (00, 01, 04, 21, 30, 97, 98)
– – –
HDD trouble • SD card breakdown
E7 (07) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
• HDD breakdown E7 (03) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
• HDD-ASIC breakdown
E7 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Scanner communication trouble
• SCU communication error
A0 (02)E7 (80)
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Engine communication trouble
• PCU communication error
A0 (01)E7 (90)
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Option communication trouble
• ACU communication error
A0 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Backup battery voltage fall trouble
• Backup battery voltage fall
U1 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Operation disable trouble 1
• Controller fan motor trouble
L4 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Operation disable trouble 2
• External serial I/F communication error (RIC)
U7 (50, 51) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
• Memory error (included not installed the expansion RAM)
U2 (00, 05, 10, 11, 24, 40, 41, 42)
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 15
• Connection trouble (Model data discrepancy) (MFPC detection)
A0 (10, 11, 15, 20)E7 (60, 61, 65)
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
• Serial number data error
U2 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
• HDD registration data check sum error
U2 (50) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Operation disable trouble 3
• Memory check error when booting
E7 (96) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
• Image memory trouble, decode error
E7 (01, 49, 91, 92, 93, 94)
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Operation disable trouble 4
• Personal counter connection trouble
PC (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Power controller trouble
• Power controller error
L8 (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Special function trouble
• Watermark data error
U2 (60)P1 (00, 01, 02)
Laser trouble • LSU breakdown PCU E7 (20, 21, 28)L6 (10)
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
*10✕ ✕
Engine trouble 1 • Connection trouble (Model data discrepancy) (PCU detection)
A0 (21)E7 (50, 55)F1 (50, 95)
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 3
: Operation enabled ✕ : Operation disabled1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section. * However, it is valid
only when the escape tray setting has been made.9: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the black and white mode.
*10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.*11: The trouble display is "Display to a 2-line message." (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
15: FAST notification function (When in U2-22, trouble notification cannot be made. If there is no abnormality in the FAX software or theFAST data in U2-23, trouble notification can be made.)
Engine trouble 2 • PCU troubles (motor, fusing, etc.)
PCU F2 (40, 64, 70, 74)H2 (00, 01)H3 (00, 01)H4 (00, 01)H5 (01)L4 (01, 11, 31, 32, 35, 43, 44, 56)L8 (01, 02)U2 (90, 91)
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
*10✕ ✕
Paper feed tray 1 trouble
• Paper feed tray 1 breakdown
F3 (12) 3 3 3*10
3
Paper feed tray 2 trouble
• Paper feed tray 2 breakdown
F3 (22) 3 3 3*10
3
Paper feed tray 3 trouble
• Paper feed tray 3 breakdown
F3 (32, 42) 3 3 3*10
3
Staple trouble • Staple breakdown F1 (10) 4 4 4 4 4 4*10
4 4
Finisher trouble • After-process breakdown
F1 (00, 03, 15, 19, 20, 37)
4 4 4 4 4 4*10
4 4
Other troubles • Other troubles EE (EL, EU)Process control trouble
• Process control breakdown (PCU detection)
F2 (39, 58)*11
Operation disable trouble
• Connection trouble (Model data discrepancy) (SCU detection)
SCU A0 (22) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
SCU CPT ASIC trouble
• SCU CPT ASIC error
UC (02) 9 9 9 9 9
SCU ASIC trouble (SCU detection)
• SCU ASIC error (SCU detection)
UC (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Scanner trouble 1 • SCU EEPROM error
U2 (80, 81) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Scanner trouble 2 • Scanner section breakdown (mirror motor, lens, copy lamp)
L1 (00)L3 (00)
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
CCD trouble • CCD breakdown (shading, etc.)
E7 (10, 11, 14)
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Trouble contentJudg-ment block
Trouble code
(26cpm/31cpm/35cpm)
machine)
Operatable mode
Copy scan (including interrup-
tion)
Scan (Push)
Scan (Pull)
Scan-To
HDDPrint List
printFAX Send
FAX print
FAST Notifi-cation to host
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 4
(2) Trouble detection sequence and trouble cancel sequence when turning on the power
The process has priority when the power is turned ON with the MFP.When booting, two or more troubles in the list below may be detected. In this case, the trouble code of higher priority is displayed.
Process sequence Error code Content
First(Low priority)
Last(High priority)
U2 60 Watermark check error50 HDD user authentication data check sum error (SD card when no HDD is installed)30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency24 MFPC PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error10 MFPC PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error
A0 15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP)
U2 11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
E7 96 MFPC PWB DIMM memory check errorU1 01 Battery troubleE7 60 MFP connection troubleA0 04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM error
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCUU1 Saved in the MFPU2 Saved in each blockF3-12, 22 Saved in the PCU
(Trouble cancel sequence)When executing SIM 13, 14, 16
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, F3 trouble check
SIM13: U1 trouble cancelSIM14: H3, H4, H5
(Color mode inhibition) cancelSIM16: U2 trouble cancel
Each blockMFP eventmanager
Communication of trouble status[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
Trouble cancel command
When the power is turned on,check is made in each block.
Trouble cancel statusis communicated.
Trouble cancel(The trouble memory isinitialized.)
sim task
Trouble check is preformed in each block,and the result is sent to the MFP.
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 5
F. Error code list
Trouble code
Trouble content Trouble detection Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main code
Sub code
A0 01 PCU PWB ROM error MFP02 SCU PWB ROM error MFP04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM error MFP10 Color profile error MFP11 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - PCU) MFP15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware MFP20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP) MFP21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU) PCU22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU) SCU
E7 01 MFP image data error MFP03 HDD trouble MFP04 HDD-ASIC error MFP07 SD card error MFP10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU11 Shading error (White correction) SCU14 CCD-ASIC error SCU20 LSU laser detection error PCU21 LSU LD deterioration trouble PCU28 LSU control Asic connection error PCU49 Water Mark data error MFP50 PCU connection trouble PCU55 PCU PWB information sum error PCU60 MFP connection trouble MFP61 MFP connection trouble (PCU) MFP65 MFP EEPROM check sum error MFP80 MFP - SCU PWB communication error MFP90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error MFP91 FAX reception image data error MFP92 Copy image data error MFP93 Copy, image send, FAX, filing, print image data process error MFP94 Image file data process error (when importing file data) MFP96 MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error MFP
EE EL Auto developer adjustment trouble (Over-toner abnormality) PCUEU Auto developer adjustment trouble (Under-toner abnormality) PCU
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble PCU10 Staple operation trouble PCU15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble PCU19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F PCU20 Finisher alignment operation trouble R PCU29 Finisher cooling fan motor abnormality MFP37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU50 Main unit - Finisher combination error PCU95 Paper exit option configuration error PCU
F2 39 Process thermistor trouble PCU40 Toner density sensor trouble PCU58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble (HUD_M/TH_M) PCU64 Toner supply operation trouble PCU70 Improper toner cartridge detection PCU74 Toner cartridge CRUM error PCU
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble PCU32 Paper feed tray 3 lift operation trouble42 Paper feed tray 4 lift operation trouble
F6 00 MFPC PWB - FAX communication trouble MFP01 FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write error FAX04 FAX MODEM operation trouble FAX21 Improper combination of TEL/LIU PWB and FAX soft switch MFP30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (FAX detection) MFP97 Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the main machine MFP98 Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB destination and the main
machine destinationMFP
H2 00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM) PCU01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US) PCU
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 6
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU
H5 01 5-time continuous jams of POD1, POD2, or PPD2 PCUL1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCUL3 00 Scanner return trouble SCUL4 01 Main motor lock trouble PCU
11 Shift motor trouble PCU30 MFP fan motor trouble MFP31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble PCU32 Power source cooling fan trouble PCU35 Fusing cooling fan trouble PCU43 Paper exit cooling fan 2 trouble PCU44 Power cooling fan 2 trouble PCU56 Fusing cooling fan 2 trouble PCU
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCUL8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU
02 Full wave signal width abnormality PCU20 Power controller communication trouble MFP
P1 00 PCI communication error MFP01 PCI fan error MFP02 Plasma generating device error MFP
PC - Personal counter not detected MFPU1 01 Battery trouble MFPU2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFP
05 SD/MFPC PWB SRAM contents inconsistency MFP10 MFPC PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error MFP11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error MFP24 MFPC PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error MFP30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency MFP40 SD card system storage data area error MFP41 HDD system storage data area error MFP42 Machine adjustment data (system storage data area) error MFP50 HDD user authentication data check sum error
(SD card when no HDD is installed)MFP
60 Watermark check error MFP80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error SCU81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error SCU90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU
U7 50 MFPC PWB - Vendor machine communication error MFP51 Vendor machine error MFP
UC 02 CPT - ASIC error SCU20 DOCC ASIC error SCU
Trouble code
Trouble content Trouble detection Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main code
Sub code
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 7
G. Details of error codes and countermeasures
A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error
A0-02 SCU PWB ROM error
A0-04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM error
A0-10 Color profile error
A0-11 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - PCU)
A0-15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and programfirmware
A0-20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM dataversion (MFP)
A0-21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM dataversion (PCU)
A0-22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM dataversion (SCU)
E7-01 MFP image data error
E7-03 HDD trouble
E7-04 HDD-ASIC error
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
interruption of the power during the version-up operation, etc.PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up procedure again.Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
interruption of the power during the version-up operation, etc.SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up procedure again.Replace the SCU PWB.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM data
error.An error occurs during firmware upgrading for some reasons.
Check & Remedy Perform firmware upgrading again.
Trouble content Color profile errorDetail MFPCause The content of the color profile is abnormal.
Combination error between the MFPC PWB firmware and the color profile
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware collectively.Replace the MFPC PWB.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause Firmware combination error between the MFP and
the PCU.Check & Remedy Install the firmware in the all-firmware version-up
mode.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause Installation of the normal firmware was performed
with a security kit enable.Check & Remedy Stop installation of the normal firmware.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Trouble contentDetail SCUCause Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause Image data transfer error in the MFPC PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble.Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
of the MFPC PWB.Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFPC
PWB and HDD.HDD (error file management area) data abnormality (FAT breakage).MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of the MFPC PWB and HDD.Use SIM62-2, 3 to check read/write operations of the HDD.Replace the HDD.Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause HDD-ASIC trouble. (MFPC PWB trouble.)
An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when booting.
Check & Remedy Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 8
E7-07 SD card error
E7-10 Shading error (Black correction)
E7-11 Shading error (White correction)
E7-14 CCD-ASIC error
E7-20 LSU laser detection error
E7-21 LSU LD deterioration trouble
E7-28 LSU control Asic connection error
E7-49 Water Mark data error
E7-50 PCU connection trouble
E7-55 PCU PWB information sum error
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause SD card trouble or contact error
MFPC PWB trouble.Check & Remedy Replace the SD card.
Check the SD card socket.Replace the MFPC PWB.
Trouble contentDetail SCUCause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the
scanner lamp is turned OFF.Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.CCD unit abnormality.SCU PWB abnormality.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.Check the CCD unit.Check the SCU PWB.
Trouble contentDetail SCUCause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan
level when the scanner lamp is turned ON.Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate.Scanner lamp lighting trouble.Scanner lamp drive PWB troubleCCD unit abnormality.SCU PWB abnormality.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp unit.Check or replace the scanner lamp.Check or replace the scanner lamp drive PWB.Clean or replace the mirror, the lens, and the reference white board.Check or replace the CCD unit.Check or replace the SCU PWB.
Trouble contentDetail SCUCause SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the SCU PWB.Replace the SCU PWB.
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause Laser optical axis misalignment
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode trouble.LSU harness, connector troubleLSU trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.Check or replace the LSU control PWB.Check connection of the LSU harness.Replace the LSU.
Trouble content Laser troubleDetail PCUCause Laser deterioration, power reduction
Disconnection or improper connection of harness and connector between LD PWB and MFPC PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.Check connection of the harness of each PWB inside the LSU.Replace the MFPC PWB.Replace the LSU.
Trouble content Access error between the CPU in the PCU PWB and the LSU control ASIC.
Detail PCUCause Improper connection of the communication connector
between the PCU PWB and the MFPC PWB (interface PWB).Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the MFPC PWB (interface PWB)PCU PWB or MFPC PWB (interface PWB) trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness between the PCU PWB and the MFPC PWB (interface PWB).Replace the MFPC PWB.Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause Watermark data trouble.
HDD trouble.* When the wartermark data is not installed, U2-60
error occurs in booting.Check & Remedy Use SIM62-02/SIM62-03 to check HDD read/write.
If the result is NG, a remedy corresponding to E7-03 is required.Use SIM49-05 to update the watermark data. (Reinstallation)
Trouble content Unknown PWB identification information is detected in the PCU PWB.
Detail PCUCause A PWB/firmware which does not comply with the
machine specifications is connected.Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
LSU connection trouble.PCU PWB trouble.LSU trouble.
Trouble content PCU EEPROM PWB information sum error Detail PCUCause PCU EEPROM sum check error.
PCU EEPROM trouble.PCU EEPROM contact trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.Replace the PCU EEPROM.
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 9
E7-60 MFP connection trouble
E7-61 MFP connection trouble (PCU)
E7-65 MFP EEPROM check sum error
E7-80 MFP - SCU PWB communication error
E7-90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error
E7-91 FAX reception image data error
E7-92 Copy image data error
E7-93 Copy, image send, FAX, filing, printimage data process error
Trouble content Unknown PWB identification information is detected in the MFPC PWB.
Detail MFPCause A PWB/firmware which does not comply with the
machine specifications is connected. Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Trouble content MFP connection troubleCompatibility trouble between MFP - PCU
Detail MFPCause Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the
PCU.Check & Remedy Check the MFPC PWB.
Check the combination between the MFPC PWB and the PCU.
Trouble content EEPROM PWB information check sum errorDetail MFPCause EEPROM device trouble.
EEPROM device contact trouble.Device access error due to noises.
Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC PWB.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause SCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the SCU PWB and the MFPC PWB.Check the ground.Replace the SCU PWB.Replace the MFPC PWB.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB and the MFPC PWB.Check the ground.Replace the PCU PWB.Replace the MFPC PWB.
Trouble content An error of FAX reception image data process occurs.Detail MFPCause Image data process abnormality
HDD troubleSD card trouble or contact errorImage compression data corruptionMFPC PWB troubleDIMM memory trouble or contact errorFAX control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of the memory.Replace the HDD.Replace or check installation of the SD card.Replace the MFPC PWB.Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.Replace the FAX control PWB.
Trouble content An error of copy image data process occurs. (In Non ERDH)
Detail MFPCause Image data process abnormality
HDD troubleImage compression data corruptionMFPC PWB troubleDIMM memory trouble or contact error
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of the memory.Replace the HDD.Replace the MFPC PWB.Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
Trouble content An image data process error occurs in the following operation mode:• Copy (in ERDH)• Copy composing system function (Water mark)• When in image send• When filing documents• When displaying the preview• When printing with the GDI/PCL printer• Copy composing system function (Water mark)• When printing FAX send result table
Detail MFPCause Image data process abnormality
HDD troubleImage compression data corruptionMFPC PWB troubleDIMM memory trouble or contact error
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of the memory.Replace the HDD.Replace the MFPC PWB.Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 10
E7-94 Image file data process error (when importing file data)
E7-96 MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error
EE-EL Auto developer adjustment trouble(Over-toner abnormality)
EE-EU Auto developer adjustment trouble(Under-toner abnormality)
F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error
F1-03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble
F1-10 Staple operation trouble
F1-15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operationtrouble
F1-19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F
Trouble content File image process error (backup restore error) when importing filing data
Detail MFPCause Image data process abnormality
HDD troubleImage compression data corruptionMFPC PWB troubleDIMM memory trouble or contact error
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of the memory.Replace the HDD.Replace the MFPC PWB.Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
Trouble content MFPC PWB DIMM memory access troubleDetail MFPCause Memory data corruption occurs
MFPC PWB troubleDIMM memory trouble or contact error
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of the memory.Replace the MFPC PWB.DIMM memory socket checkReplace the DIMM memory.
Trouble content An abnormality occurred in execution of automatic developer adjustment.
Detail PCUCause Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
developing voltage error, toner concentration trouble, developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-2 to perform the auto developer adjustment.
Trouble content An abnormality occurred in execution of automatic developer adjustment.
Detail PCUCause Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
developing voltage error, toner concentration trouble, developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-2 to perform the auto developer adjustment.
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
between the finisher and the PCU PWB.Finisher control PWB trouble.PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the finisher and the PCU PWB.Replace the finisher control PWB.Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble
Harness and connector connection troubleHome position sensor troubleFinisher control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit roller lift motor.Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home position sensor.Replace the paper exit roller lift motor.Check connection of the connector and the harness.Replace the home position sensor.Replace the finisher control PWB.
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause Staple motor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble.Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple motor.Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home position sensor.Replace the staple motor.Check connection of the connector and the harness.Replace the home position sensor.Replace the finisher control PWB.
Trouble content Lift motor trouble.Detail PCUCause Paper exit tray lift motor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble.Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit tray lift motor.Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home position sensor.Replace the finisher control PWB.Replace the paper exit tray lift motor.Replace the home position sensor.
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Motor speed abnormality.Over-current to the motor.Finisher control PWB trouble.Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper alignment motor F.Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home position sensor.Replace the finisher control PWB.Replace the paper alignment motor F.Replace the home position sensor.
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 11
F1-20 Finisher alignment operation troubleR
F1-29 Finisher cooling fan motor abnormality
F1-37 Finisher data backup RAM error
F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error
F1-95 Paper exit option configuration error
F2-39 Process thermistor trouble
F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble
F2-58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble (HUD_M/TH_M)
F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble
F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Motor speed abnormality.Over-current to the motor.Finisher control PWB trouble.Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper alignment motor R.Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home position sensor.Replace the finisher control PWB.Replace the paper alignment motor R.Replace the home position sensor.
Trouble content Finisher cooling fan motor abnormalityDetail MFPCause Motor lock
Motor harness short/open.Finisher control PWB trouble.Harness/connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher cooling fan (FCF).Check connection from the finisher control PWB to the motor. Replace the finisher control PWB.Replace the fan motor.
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause Finisher control PWB trouble.
Malfunction due to noisesCheck & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.
Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10, Finisher control PWB DIP SW adjustment.)
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit
model is installed.Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher.Replace the finisher control PWB.
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause The paper exit option configuration is improper.
Check & Remedy Install a proper option.
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause Process thermistor trouble.
Process thermistor harness connection trouble.PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the process thermistor.Check connection of the process thermistor harness and the connector.Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.Developing unit trouble.PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.Check connection of the sensor connector and the harness.Replace the developing unit.Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause Temperature/humidity sensor trouble.
Process humidity sensor harness and connector connection troublePCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.Check connection of the temperature/humidity sensor harness and the connector.Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause Toner motor trouble.
Toner density sensor trouble.Connector/harness trouble.PCU PWB trouble.Toner cartridge trouble.Developing unit trouble.Toner transport pipe section trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.Replace the toner density sensor.Connector and harness check.Replace the PCU PWB.Replace the toner cartridge.Replace the developing unit.Check the toner transport pipe section.
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different specification.)Toner cartridge trouble.PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.Replace the PCU PWB.
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 12
F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error
F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble
F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble
F3-32 Paper feed tray 3 lift operation trouble
F3-42 Paper feed tray 4 lift operation trouble
F6-00 MFPC PWB - FAX communication trouble
F6-01 FAX control PWB EEPROM read/writeerror
F6-04 FAX MODEM operation trouble
F6-21 Improper combination of TEL/LIU PWB and FAX soft switch
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB and toner cartridge
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.Replace the PCU PWB.Check the connector and the harness between the PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.
Trouble content C1LUD is not turned ON within the specified time.Detail PCUCause C1LUD is not turned ON within the specified time.
C1LUD sensor trouble.Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble.PCU PWB trouble.Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector of C1LUD.Replace the lift-up unit.Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content C2LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.Detail PCUCause C2LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
C2LUD sensor trouble.Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble.PCU PWB trouble.Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of C2LUD.Replace the lift-up unit.Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content C3LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.Detail PCUCause C3LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
C3LUD sensor trouble.Paper feed tray 3 lift unit trouble.PCU PWB trouble.Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of C3LUD.Replace the lift-up unit.Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content C4LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.Detail PCUCause C4LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
C4LUD sensor trouble.Paper feed tray 4 lift unit trouble.PCU PWB trouble.Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of C4LUD.Replace the lift-up unit.Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content MFP - FAX communication establishment error / Framing / Parity / Protocol error
Section MFPCase 1 Cause FAX control PWB trouble.
Check and Remedy
Replace the FAX control PWB.
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB - MFPC PWB connector and harness trouble
Check and Remedy
Check the connector and the harness between the FAX control PWB and the MFPC PWB.
Case 3 Cause FAX control PWB - Mother board connector and harness trouble
Check and Remedy
Check the connector and the harness between the FAX control PWB and the mother board.
Case 4 Cause FAX control PWB ROM trouble / ROM pin breakageCheck and Remedy
Check the ROM of the FAX control PWB.
Trouble content FAX control PWB EEPROM access error (Read and write)
Section FAXCase 1 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM trouble
Check and Remedy
Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to insure that EEPROM can be accessed.
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM access circuit troubleCheck and Remedy
Replace the FAX control PWB.
Trouble content FAX control PWB MODEM chip operation troubleSection FAXCase 1 Cause FAX MODEM chip operation trouble.
Check and remedy
Replace the FAX control PWB.
Case 2 Cause The FAX MODEM chip cannot be accessed.Check and Remedy
Replace the FAX control PWB.
Trouble content Incompatibility between the TEL/LIU PWB and the FAX control PWB information (soft switch)
Section MFPCase 1 Cause The destination of the TEL/LIU PWB installed is
improper.Check and Remedy
Check the destination of the TEL/LIU PWB.
Case 2 Cause TEL/LIU PWB trouble.Check and Remedy
Replace the TEL/LIU PWB.
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 13
F6-30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (FAX detection)
F6-97 Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the main machine
F6-98 Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB destination and the mainmachine destination
H2-00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM)
H2-01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US)
H3-00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM)
H3-01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (Read and write)
Section MFPCase 1 Cause Program writing trouble to the 1-chip microprocessor,
or no program data written.Check and Remedy
Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor program.
Case 2 Cause FAX 1-chip microprocessor circuit trouble.Check and Remedy
Replace the FAX control PWB.
Trouble content Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the main machine
Section MFPCase 1 Cause The FAX control PWB installed is improper.
FAX control PWB trouble.Check and Remedy
Install a proper FAX control PWB.Replace the FAX control PWB.
Trouble content Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB destination and the main machine destination
Section MFPCase 1 Cause Incompatibility between the destination information
written into the FAX control PWB EEPROM and that in the main machine (set with SIM26-6)
Check and Remedy
1) Check the destination of the FAX control PWB.2) Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6)
Trouble content Main thermistor open hardware detection troubleDetail PCUCause Main thermistor trouble
PCU PWB troubleThermistor connector and harness connection troubleFusing section connector connection troubleFusing unit not installed
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.Replace the thermistor.Replace the PCU PWB.Check connection of the thermistor connector and the harness.Check the connector in the fusing section.
Trouble content Sub thermistor open hardware detection troubleDetail PCUCause Sub thermistor trouble
PCU PWB troubleThermistor connector and harness connection troubleFusing section connector connection troubleFusing unit not installed
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.Replace the thermistor.Replace the PCU PWB.Check connection of the thermistor connector and the harness.Check the connector in the fusing section.
Trouble content Main heater lamp abnormally high temperature software detection trouble
Detail PCUCause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Main thermistor troublePCU PWB troubleThermistor connector and harness connection troublePower unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp.Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.Replace the thermistor.Replace the PCU PWB.Check connection of the thermistor connector and the harness.Replace the power unit.
Trouble content Sub heater lamp abnormally high temperature software detection trouble
Detail PCUCause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Sub thermistor troublePCU PWB troubleThermistor connector and harness connection troublePower unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp.Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.Replace the thermistor.Replace the PCU PWB.Check connection of the thermistor connector and the harness.Replace the power unit.
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 14
H4-00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM)
H4-01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US)
H5-01 5-time continuous jams of POD1,POD2, or PPD2
L1-00 Scanner feed trouble
L3-00 Scanner return trouble
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified level within the specified time from turning ON the power relay.
Detail PCUCause Main thermistor trouble.
Main heater lamp trouble.PCU PWB trouble.Thermostat trouble.Connector, harness connection trouble.HL control PWB trouble.Power unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp.Replace the thermistor.Replace the heater lamp.Replace the PCU PWB.Replace the thermostat.Check connection of the connector and the harness.Replace the HL control PWB.Replace the power unit.
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified level within the specified time from turning ON the power relay.
Detail PCUCause Sub thermistor trouble.
Sub heater lamp trouble.PCU PWB trouble.Thermostat trouble.Connector, harness connection trouble.HL control PWB trouble.Power unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater lamp.Replace the thermistor.Replace the heater lamp.Replace the PCU PWB.Replace the thermostat.Check connection of the connector and the harness.Replace the HL control PWB.Replace the power unit.
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper
remains.)POD1/POD2/PPD2 sensor troubleFusing unit installation troublePOD1/POD2/PPD2 sensor connector and harness connection troublePCU PWB troubleFusing unit, drive section trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the POD1/POD2/PPD2 sensor.Check installation of the fusing unit.Replace the fusing unit.Check paper around the fusing unit section.Check connection of the POD1/POD2/PPD2 sensor connector and the harness.Replace the PCU PWB.Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Trouble content Scanner feed is not completed within the specified time.
Detail SCUCause Scanner unit trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.Scanner control PWB trouble.Harness and connector connection trouble.Scanner home position sensor trouble.Scanner motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.Replace the scanner unit.Replace the SCU PWB.Check connection of the connectors and the harness.Replace the scanner home position sensor.Replace the scanner motor.
Trouble content Scanner return is not completed within the specified time.
Detail SCUCause Scanner unit trouble
SCU PWB troubleScanner control PWB troubleHarness and connector connection troubleScanner home position sensor troubleScanner motor trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.Replace the scanner unit.Replace the SCU PWB.Check connection of the connectors and the harness.Replace the scanner home position sensor.Replace the scanner motor.
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 15
L4-01 Main motor lock trouble
L4-11 Shift motor trouble
L4-30 MFP fan motor trouble
L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble
L4-32 Power source cooling fan trouble
L4-35 Fusing cooling fan trouble
L4-43 Paper exit cooling fan 2 trouble
L4-44 Power cooling fan 2 trouble
L4-56 Fusing cooling fan 2 trouble
L6-10 Polygon motor trouble
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the main motor.
Detail PCUCause Main motor lock trouble
Harness and connector connection troublePCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the main motor lock.Replace the main motor.Check connection of the connectors and the harness.Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content No change in the shifter home position sensor signal is detected in the operation of the shifter initializing.
Detail PCUCause Shift motor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.Shifter home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the shift operation.Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the shifter home position sensor.Replace the shift motor.Replace the PCU PWB.Check connection of the connector and the harness.Replace the shifter home position sensor.
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the MFP fan motor.
Detail MFPCause Fan motor trouble.
Harness connection trouble between the MFPC PWB and the fan motor. MFP circuit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the fan.Check the harness and the connector between the MFPC PWB and the fan motor.
Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected.Detail PCUCause Paper exit cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB troubleConnection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the fan.Replace the paper exit cooling fan.Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected.Detail PCUCause Power cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.Replace the power cooling fan.Replace the PCU PWB.Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected.Detail PCUCause Fusing cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.Replace the fusing cooling fan.Replace the PCU PWB.Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected.Detail PCUCause Paper exit cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the fan.Replace the PCU PWB.Check the connector and the harness.Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Trouble content The lock signal is detected while the power cooling fan is operating.
Detail PCUCause Power cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.Replace the power cooling fan.Replace the PCU PWB.Check the connector and the harness.
Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected.Detail PCUCause Fusing cooling fan 2 trouble
PCU PWB trouble.Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.Replace the fusing cooling fan.Replace the PCU PWB.Check the connector and the harness.
Trouble content The polygon motor does not reach the specified RPM within the specified time after starting rotation of the polygon motor.
Detail PCUCause Polygon motor trouble.
LSU mother PWB trouble.Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon motor.Check connection of the connector and the harness.Replace the LSU.Replace the LSU mother PWB.
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 16
L8-01 Full wave signal detection error
L8-02 Full wave signal width abnormality
L8-20 Power controller communication trouble
P1-00 PCI communication error
P1-01 PCI fan error
P1-02 Plasma generating device error
PC-- Personal counter not detected
U1-01 Battery trouble
U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
U2-05 SD/MFPC PWB SRAM contents inconsistency
Trouble content The full wave signal is not detected.Detail PCUCause PCU PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.Replace the power unit.Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Trouble content The full wave signal frequency is judged as abnormal. (The detected freauency is over 65Hz or below 45Hz.)
Detail PCUCause PCU PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.Harness trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.Replace the power unit.Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Trouble content Communication establishment error / Framing / Parity / Protocol error
Detail MFPCause PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connector connection
trouble.Broken connector pin of the PCU PWB of the MFPC PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.Check connector connection between the PCU PWB and the MFPC PWB.Check the ground of the main unit.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause Communication error between the MFPC PWB and
the PCI.Connection failure of connectors and harness between the MFPC PWB and the PCI.MFPC PWB trouble.PCI control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and connectors between the MFPC PWB and the PCI.Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary. (Refer to the necessary procedures after replacement of the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the procedures.)Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if necessary.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause The PCI fan operation signal is not detected.
PCI fan trouble.PCI control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and harness between the PCI fan and the PCI control PWB.Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if necessary.Check the PCI fan, and replace if necessary.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause Connection failure of connectors and harness
between the plasma generating device and the PCI control PWB.Plasma generating device trouble.PCI control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and harness between the plasma generating device and the PCI control PWB.Replace the plasma generating device.Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if necessary.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause The personal counter is not installed.
The personal counter is not detected.SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.Replace the SCU PWB.
Trouble content RTC backup battery voltage fallDetail MFP
Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life2) Battery circuit abnormality
Check and Remedy
Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about 2.5V or above.Replace the battery.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
EEPROM socket contact troubleMFPC PWB troubleStrong external noises.
Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC PWB EEPROM.Replace the MFPC PWB.(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the works.)Check the power environment.
Trouble content The SD card or the MFPC PWB installed is improper. (Erroneous detection of account management data)
Detail MFPCause The SD card was replaced.
The MFPC PWB was replaced.SD card troubleMFPC PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Refer to the pages on the necessary works after replacing the SD and the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the works.Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 17
U2-10 MFPC PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error
U2-11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error
U2-24 MFPC PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error
U2-30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency
U2-40 SD card system storage data area error
U2-41 HDD system storage data area error
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause SRAM user index information (user authentication
basic data) check sum error.MFPC PWB SRAM trouble.MFPC PWB trouble.Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.(Index information data in the HDD are transferred to the SRAM.)Replace the MFPC PWB.(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the works.)
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
EEPROM socket contact troubleMFPC PWB troubleStrong external noises.
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The previous writing data (about the latest 8 sheets) are written into the EEPROM.)Replace the MFPC PWB.(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the works.)
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause MFPC PWB SRAM trouble
MFPC PWB troubleStrong external noises.
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The check sum error detection data are calculated again to reset the proper check sum data.)Replace the MFPC PWB.(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the works.)
Trouble content Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved in the PCU PWB and that in the MFPC PWB.
Detail MFPCause When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFPC PWB,
the EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before replacement is not mounted on the new PWB.MFPC PWB troublePCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set.Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted on the new PWB.Replace the MFPC PWB.(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the works.)Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause A file error occurs in the SD card system storage data
partition.SD card troubleMFPC PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power, and the backup data in the HDD are written into the SD card and the machine is automatically booted.Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.Check the SD card, and replace if necessary.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause A file error occurs in the HDD system saved data
area, disabling backup of the saved file of the machine adjustment values in the SD card.HDD troubleMFPC PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary.Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.When replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB, refer to the chapter of "Necessary works and procedures of HDD and MFPC PWB replacement."
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 18
U2-42 Machine adjustment data (systemstorage data area) error
U2-50 HDD*1 user authentication data checksum error (SD card when no HDD isinstalled)
*1: SD card when no HDD is installed.
U2-60 Watermark check error
U2-80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
U2-81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
U2-90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause The saved file of the machine adjustment values in
the SD card and the HDD cannot be found or is broken.Both of the SD card set data and the HDD system saved data area are broken.HDD troubleMFPC PWB troubleSD card trouble
Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary.Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.Check the SD card, and replace if necessary.When replacing the HDD, the MFPC PWB, and the SD card, refer to the chapter of "Necessary works and procedures of HDD, MFPC PWB, and SD card replacement."Use SIM to adjust the machine again and set the adjustment values.
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause HDD trouble*1
MFPC PWB troubleStrong external noises.
Check & Remedy Check the data related to the check sum error (address book, image send system registration data (senders record, meta data)) and register again.Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble.Replace the HDD*1.Replace the MFPC PWB.(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the works.)*1
Trouble contentDetail MFPCause Watermark data trouble
HDD troubleMFPC PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble.Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data.Replace the HDD.Replace the MFPC PWB.(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and perform the works.)
Trouble contentDetail SCUCause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble
SCU PWB troubleSCU PWB EEPROM socket connection trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.Replace the SCU PWB.Check connection of the SCU PWB EEPROM socket.Check the SIM adjustment value of the following items, and adjust again if they are improper.• Scanner-related adjustments• Touch panel-related adjustmentsUse SIM16 to cancel the trouble.To avoid missing of the counter data and the adjustment values, use this simulation to save the counter data and the adjustment values. (If there is a printer option, use SIM22-01 to save the counter data and the adjustment values.)
Trouble contentDetail SCUCause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.SCU PWB trouble.EEPROM socket contact trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.Replace the SCU PWB.Check contact of the EEPROM socket.Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum error detection data are calculated again to reset the proper check sum data.)To avoid missing of the counter data and the adjustment values, use this simulation to save the counter data and the adjustment values. (If there is a printer option, use SIM22-01 to save the counter data and the adjustment values.)
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
PCU PWB troubleEEPROM socket contact trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.Check the SIM adjustment values of the engine, and adjust again if they are improper.Replace the PCU PWB.Check contact of the EEPROM socket.Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.To avoid missing of the counter data and the adjustment values, use this simulation to save the counter data and the adjustment values. (If there is a printer option, use SIM22-01 to save the counter data and the adjustment values.)
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 19
U2-91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
U7-50 MFPC PWB - Vendor machine communication error
U7-51 Vendor machine error
UC-02 CPT - ASIC error
UC-20 DOCC ASIC error
Trouble contentDetail PCUCause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
PCU PWB troubleEEPROM socket contact trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.Replace the PCU PWB.Check contact of the EEPROM socket.Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum error detection data are calculated again to reset the proper check sum data.)To avoid missing of the counter data and the adjustment values, use this simulation to save the counter data and the adjustment values. (If there is a printer option, use SIM22-01 to save the counter data and the adjustment values.)
Trouble content Communication error between the MFP and the serial vendor.
Detail MFPCause Improper setting of the vendor machine specifications
(SIM26-3).Vendor machine trouble.MFPC PWB trouble.Connector, harness connection trouble.Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.Check the connector and the harness in the communication line.Change the specifications of the vendor machine (SIM26-3).Replace the MFPC PWB.
Trouble contentDetail MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor)Cause Serial vendor machine trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.Check & Remedy Err.XX is displayed on the operation panel of the
vendor. (XX is the detail code.)Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail code. Check the connector and the harness in the communication line.
Trouble content Access error to the CPT-ASIC (The ASIC does not operate normally.)
Detail SCUCause BtoB connector connection trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.CPT-ASIC trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the BtoB connector.Replace the SCU PWB or Option PWB.
Trouble content Access error to the DOCC-ASIC (The ASIC does not operate normally.)
Detail SCUCause BtoB connector connection trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.DOCC-ASIC trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the BtoB connector.Replace the SCU PWB or Option PWB.
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 20
(1) Descriptions on E7-91 - 94 errorsTwo-digit numbers with double parentheses are added to E7-91 - 94 error codes recorded in SIM22-6 indicate the detailed contents of theerrors.The number in each digit has its own meaning.(Example) E7-91(**)The upper digit of the added code indicates the job kind at the occurrence of the error.
*1: Added code without generating
The lower digit of the added code indicates the kind and the content of the abnormality or the result of the automatic memory check executedwhen the abnormality is detected.
: Added code indicating that the memory and its peripheral must be focused for check in case of an error.: Added code indicating that doubtful sections are in a wider range such as the memory, PWB's, HDD, etc.
—: Added code without generating
Error code
The upper digit of the added code
Image type
Job kind at the occurrence of the error
E7-91 0* Other• FAX (Internet FAX)
reception print (Other than long size images)
*11* JPEG *12* JBIG *13* Mxx1ch4* Mxx4ch5* Other
• FAX (Internet FAX) reception print (Long size images)
*16* JPEG *17* JBIG *18* Mxx1ch9* Mxx4ch
A* - F* Not Used *1E7-92 0* Other
• OC copy (in Non ERDH)
*11* JPEG2* JBIG *13* Mxx1ch *14* Mxx4ch
5* - F* Not Used *1E7-93 0* Other
• Copy print (in ERDH)• Copy composing system
function (Custom Stamp, Water mark)
*11* JPEG2* JBIG3* Mxx1ch4* Mxx4ch5* Other
• Image send• Document filing• Preview display
*16* JPEG7* JBIG8* Mxx1ch9* Mxx4chA* Other
• GDI/PCL printer print• Copy composing system
function (Custom Stamp, Water mark)
*1B* JPEGC* JBIGD* Mxx1ch *1E* Mxx4chF* Not Used *1
E7-94 0* Other
• Backup restore (Filing data import)
*11* JPEG2* JBIG *13* Mxx1ch *14* Mxx4ch *1
5* - F* Not Used *1
Lower digit of the added code Kind/Content of the error*1 *9 *A *B *C *D *E *F
Memory verify
NG—
Huffman code error
Restart marker error
Improper marker error
Head decoding error detection
(ASIC detection)
Head decoding error detection (CPU detection)
Other abnormal
terminationThe upper digit of the
added code
Error detection circuit
1*, 6*, B* JPEG — —2*, 7*, C* JBIG — — — —3*, 8*, D* Mxx1ch — — — — — —4*, 9*, E* Mxx4ch — — — — — —
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 21
(2) Countermeasures in case of E7-91 - 94In case of E7-9x (11), E7-9x (21), E7-9x (31), E7-9x (41)
NOTE: Since the automatic memory check executed when E7-91 - 94 occurs is a simplified check, it cannot detect an abnormality with abso-lute certainty.If the added code is (*1), there may be a memory abnormality. Even if it is not (*1), however, it cannot be said that there is no abnormal-ity around the memory.
Other added codes
NOTE: When there is an abnormality around the HDD, E7-03 may occur.If error E7-91 - 94 as well as E7-03 occurs, there is a high possibility that the error can be removed by replacing the HDD and theMFPC PWB.
(3) Countermeasures against the case where nothing is displayed when the machine is booted[Trouble content]If nothing is displayed when the machine is booted, the error code cannot be checked and the cause is hard to identify.One of the causes may be an abnormality in the boot program of the SD card. To check that, the following method is used.[Check method]Check to confirm that the LED (red) upper the CPU heat sink on the MFPC PWB shown in the figure below is lighted when the power is sup-plied.If the LED is lighted, it is judged as an abnormality of the SD card.
[Countermeasures]1) Replace the SD card with a new one. (Be sure to use a service part.)2) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.3) Use SIIM66-62 to backup the FAX reception data from the HDD to a USB memory device. (If there is no FAX reception data, this proce-
dure is not required.) (The FAX reception data are backed up in the PDF format. Supply the date to the user.)4) Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX and image send memory. (Ensure consistency between the HDD data and the image related memory.)
Cause In case of E7-91 - 94, the DIMM memory (DRAM) is automatically read/written to perform a simplified check. If an abnormality is detected in that case, the added code becomes (*1).Therefore, there is a strong possibility that an abnormality lies around the memory.
Check and remedy • Check the installing state of the DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to insure that there is no abnormality. (Disconnect and connect the DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to check to insure that there is no error occurring again.)
• Use SIM60-01 (Memory read/write check) to check to insure that no error occurs.• Replace the DIMM memory.• Replace the MFPC PWB.
Cause Mostly because the data inputted to the ASIC for decoding are broken for some reason.There is an abnormality in the process of read/write of the process data in the memory or the hard disk.A great noise unexpectedly generated may be the cause.For the cases of FAX or Internet FAX reception data, when broken data are saved, printing is performed every time when the machine is booted, generating an error repeatedly. (E7-91)(To clear the received data, execute SIM66-10.)
Check and remedy • Check the DIMM memory, the MFPC PWB, and the HDD to insure that there is no abnormality.• When the job at occurrence of an error is FAX (E7-91), check the installing state of the FAX control PWB and the SC CARD PWB.• Perform SIM60-01 (Memory read/write check) to insure that there is no NG.• Perform SIM62-02 and SIM62-03 (HDD read/write check) to insure that there is no NG. (It is not required, however, when the job at
occurrence of an error is FAX.)• Check the installing state of the DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to insure that there is no abnormality. (Disconnect and connect the
DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to check to insure that there is no error occurring again.)• Replace the HDD.• Replace the FAX control PWB.• Replace the DIMM memory.• Replace the MFPC PWB.• Replace the SD card.
SD Card
Red LED
Heat sink (CPU)
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 22
(4) Relation between the MFPC PWB LED status and errorsWhen the machine cannot be booted, check the LED status of the MFPC PWB to presume the error content and its cause.
<Process content and LED display>
* : LED ON / : LED OFF
<When an error occurs>
* In case of an error, the LED's flash as shown in the above table.* : LED ON / : LED OFF
LED status (Lighting) Process operation content Cause for halt during operationCPU initial setting Reus ASIC troubleMemory adjustment Memory and its peripheral circuit troubleMemory check Memory and its peripheral circuit trouble
– –Program memory development Memory-related troubleInterruption-related initialization Reus ASIC troublePCIe initialization PCIe and its peripheral circuit trouble (SoC/ACRE, etc.)Basic device initialization Reus ASIC troubleSD card initializationSATA initialization
Reus ASIC troubleSD card troubleHDD trouble
OS initialization (1) Reus ASIC troubleTimer enabling Reus ASIC troubleSerial driver enablingI2C driver enabling
Reus ASIC trouble
LCD initialization Reus ASIC troubleImage process IP initialization Reus ASIC troubleOS initialization (2) Reus ASIC troubleMain process Reus ASIC trouble
LED status (Flashing) Error content CauseNonsupport memory Memory troubleNonsupport memory (access speed) Memory troubleNonsupport memory controller Memory troubleDDR-PHY setting error Reus ASIC troubleInterruption handler process error Reus ASIC troubleMemory check error Memory troubleMemory combination error Memory trouble
LED No. D25/D24/D23/D223 / 2 / 1 / 0
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 23
2. JAM and troubleshootingA. JAM code list(1) Main unit
(2) Finisher
(3) RSPF
JAM code JAM contentNO_JAM_CAUSE No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.TRAY1 Cassette 1 paper feed JAM
(C1PFD not-reached JAM)C1PFD_S1 C1PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)TRAY2 Cassette 2 paper feed JAM
(C2PFD not-reached JAM)C2PFD_N3 C2PFD not-reached JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper)C2PFD_N4 C2PFD not-reached JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper)C2PFD_S2 C2PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper) C2PFD_S3 C2PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper)C2PFD_S4 C2PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper)TRAY3 Cassette 3 paper feed JAM
(C3PFD not-reached JAM)C3PFD_N4 C3PFD not-reached JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper)C3PFD_S3 C3PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper) C3PFD_S4 C3PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper) TRAY4 Cassette 4 paper feed JAM
(C4PFD not-reached JAM)C4PFD_S4 C4PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper)MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM
(PPD1 not-reached)PPD1_N2 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)PPD1_N3 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper)PPD1_N4 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper)PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)PPD1_S2 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)PPD1_S3 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper)PPD1_S4 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper)PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)POSD_N POSD not-reached JAMPOSD_S POSD remaining JAMPOD1_N POD1 not-reached JAMPOD1_S POD1 remaining JAM POD2_N POD2 not-reached JAMPOD2_S POD2 remaining JAMPOD3_N POD3 not-reached JAMPOD3_S POD3 remaining JAMAPPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAMAPPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAMDRUM Drum lock detectionFUSER Fuser winding detectionPRI_JAM Image preparation wait timeoutFIN_ERR Finisher communication abnormality detectionMTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAMSIZE_ILG Size illegal JAMSTOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)NO_MATCH Parameter no matching
JAM code JAM contentFPPD1_N Finisher inlet port not-reached JAMFPPD1_S Finisher inlet port remaining JAMFIN_TIME Finisher paper early reaching JAMFSTPD_S Finisher paper exit remaining JAMFSTPL Finisher staple JAMFPRD_N Finisher compiler not-reached JAMFPRD_S Finisher compiler remaining JAM
JAM code JAM contentSPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAMSPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAMSPPD2_N SPPD2 not-reached JAMSPPD2_S SPPD2 remaining JAMSPPD3_N SPPD3 not-reached JAMSPPD3_S SPPD3 remaining JAMSPPD4_N SPPD4 not-reached JAMSPPD4_S SPPD4 remaining JAMSPPD5_N SPPD5 not-reached JAMSPPD5_S SPPD5 remaining JAMSPSD_SCN Exposure start notification timer endSPPD2_NR SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAMSPPD2_SR SPPD2 reverse remaining JAMP_SHORT Short size JAMSDFS_S Overlap feed detection jam/accompanied feed jamICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 24
3. Image send communication report codeA. Outline and code system descriptionsAfter completion of communication, the communication reporttable, the communication management table, and the protocol aredescribed on the communication report column.The communication report code is composed as follows:Communication report: XX (XXXX)The upper 2 digits of the communication report code:Communication report code of 00 – 99 (Refer to communicationreport main code.)The lower 4 digits of the communication report code:Used by the serviceman.The upper 2 digits: Communication report sub code 1 (Refer tocommunication report sub code 1.)The lower 2 digits: Communication report sub code 2 (Refer tocommunication report sub code 2.)
CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 and sub code 2are in hexadecimal notation. (The others are in decimalnotation.)
CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 is not used in thethese models.
B. Details(1) Communication report main code
CAUTION: For report codes 16 – 31, V.34 MODE COMMUNICA-TION.
Report code
Final receive signal (Send side) Final receive signal (Receive side)
0 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal1 NSF, DIS (SID), (SUB), NSS, DCS2 CFR (PWD), (SEP), NSC, DTC3 FTT EOP4 MCF EOM5 PIP, PIN MPS6 RTN, RTP PRI-Q7 No signal, DCN DCN8 PPR PPS-EOP9 PPS-EOM10 PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL11 RNR RR12 CTR CTC13 ERR EOR-Q14 PPS-PRI-Q16 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal17 NSF, DIS SID, SUB, NSS, DCS18 CFR PWD, SEP, NSC, DTC19 FTT PPS-EOP20 MCF PPS-EOM21 PIP, PIN PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL22 RTN, RTP PRI-Q23 No signal, DCN DCN24 PPR25 RNR RR26 CTR CTC27 ERR EOR-Q28 PPS-PRI-Q29 V.8 Phase-1 V.8 Phase-130 V.8 Phase-2 V.8 Phase-231 V.8 Phase-3 V.8 Phase-3
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 25
Report code (Communication
result)
Display in the column of result Content of communication interruption
0 – 31 Refer to “previous table”. Depends on the point of communication interruption. For 16 or later, V.34 mode communication.33 BUSY The calling side cannot establish connection with the remote party.34 CANCEL A communication interruption command is made during sending/receiving. The interruption key is pressed for
interruption of input. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>35 NG35 XXXX Power is failed during sending/receiving. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>36 (No record paper)37 (Record paper jam)38 MEM. FULL Memory over during reception. <Receive/Polling>
Print is not made during reception in acting reception inhibit. <Receive/Polling>39 (Number of paper
unmatched)40 (Relay not received)41 LENGTH OVER The send data length of one page exceeds the limit (2m) in sending. <Send/Bulletin board>42 LENGTH OVER The receive data length of one page exceeds the limit. <Receive/Polling>43 (Communication) (OK) Speaking before data transmission44 ORIGINAL ERROR A document jam occurs in direct sending. <Send>45 (Picture quality error)46 NO RESPONSE The FAX signal from the remote party is not detected within T1 time. <Send/Polling>
(When in recall, however, the recall setting in case of a communication error is valid.)47 TX DECODE ERROR A decode error occurs in the FAX board. <Send/Bulletin board>48 OK Normal end of communication
OK REPLY RECEIVE OK in Internet FAX send with reception confirmation.49 NO RX POLL The called side does not have polling function in polling reception. <Polling>
The called side has no data to send. <Polling>50 RX POLL FAIL In polling reception, DCN is received for DTC. <Polling>
In polling sending, there is no send data. <Bulletin board>51 PASS # NG In poling sending, the allow number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
In polling sending, the system number is not matched. <Bulletin board>52 (No confidential function in
remote party)In confidential sending, the remote party does not have confidential function. <Send>(Including other company's machines)1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
53 (Confidential not received) 1) In confidential sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>54 (Confidential BOX NO NG) 1) In confidential reception, a confidential box number which is not registered is specified.55 (No relay function in
remote party)In relay command sending, the remote machine has no relay function. <Send>(Including other company's machine)1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
56 NO REL RX 1) In relay command sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>2) In relay command reception, a remote station number which is not registered is specified. <Receive>3) In F code relay broadcasting, an F code relay command is received.<Receive>
57 (Relay ID unmatched) 1) In relay command reception, the relay ID does not match. <Receive>58 REJECTED In reception, data are sent from a remote machine of receive inhibit number. <Receive>
(Not rejected in the bulletin board send or the F code bulletin board send.)59 RX NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), the remote machine has no DIS bit 47 (polling function). <Polling>
In F code polling (calling), the called side has no send data. (DIS bit 9 is 0.)<Polling>60 NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), DCN is received for SEP. <Polling>
In bulletin board, there is no send data for SEP. <Bulletin board>61 RX POLL # NG In bulletin board, the sub address (bulletin board number (SEP)) is not matched. <Bulletin board>62 F POLL PASS # NG In bulleting board, the pass code (PWD) is not matched. <Bulletin board>63 NO F FUNC In F code sending, the remote machine has no DIS bit 49 (sub address function). <Send>
(Check that the remote machine conforms to F code.)64 NO F-CODE In F code sending : <Send>
1) DCN is received for SUB. --- Check the box number.2) DCN is received for SID. --- Check the box number and pass code.
In F code receiving : <Receive>"F code relay broadcasting" or "F code confidential reception" is "Inhibited with soft SW."
67 F PASS # NG In F code receiving, the pass code (SID) is not matched. <Receive>68 BOX NO. NG In F code reception, a box number which is not registered is specified. (SUB is not matched.) <Receive>69 MEMORY OVER Memory over in quick online sending <Send>70 (JOB MEMORY OVER) In PC-FAX reservation, the number of remote parties is exceeded. <Send>71 NG71 XXXX *1 In PC-FAX reservation, data sent from PC includes some errors. <Send>72 (NG72 XXXX) *1 In department management setting on the machine side:
• In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, a department number which is not registered on the machine side is specified. <Send>
• In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the department number is not specified. <Send>73 NG73 XXXX *1 In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the use quantity limit is exceeded. <Send>74 NG74 XXXX *1 When reserving specified filing in document filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX;
• The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and the pass-code from PC-XXX does not match with it. <Send>
• The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and no pass-code is specified by PC-XXX. <Send>
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 26
*1: For a job status result in "Display in the column of result," "NG XXXX" is displayed. " " is the code number. For a communication result, "Communication error (XXXX)" is displayed.
*2: The error code of Scan To USB is specified only in the job log.• When the communication result is OK, the communication sub code 1 and the communication sub code 2 are "0000."• Errors in ( ) are not used.
75 NG75 XXXX *1 • Reservation cannot be made due to machine busy. (Reservation of PC-FAX cannot be accepted.)• When "PC-FAX or PC-internet FAX send inhibit" is set on the machine side.
76 NG76 XXXX *1 Reserved with receive confirmation request in PC-Internet FAX, but the Internet FAX sender is not registered on the machine side. <Send>
77 NG77 XXXX *1 In reserving specified filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the machine has no filing function.78 NG78 XXXX *1 The filing function is inhibited on the machine side when filing specification is reserved by PC-FAX or PC-
Internet FAX.79 NG79 XXXX *1 An authentication error occurs when PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX is reserved.80 NG80 XXXX *1 NIC connect failure (network abnormality)
• Check for disconnection of cables.• A network trouble (CE-XX) occurs.• The port is set to DISABLE.• Authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled.• When an error other than the communication result code 93 or 94 in D-SMTP send (including error
response of 5XX)81 NG REPORT In Internet FAX send, reply of receive confirmation of the remote machine is not normal. (Including PC-Internet
FAX). • Error of the disposition-modifier.• The disposition modifier is not in an error, and the disposition type is other than displayed, dispatched, or
processed. 82 NO REPORT In Internet FAX send, time-out occurs in waiting for receive confirmation from the remote machine. (Including
PC-Internet FAX).• In a case where send confirmation wait time-out time is other than 0, when send confirmation reply from an
Internet FAX destination is not received.• Recalls of the set number of recalls are performed, but send confirmation reply from an internet FAX
destination is not received.83 NG LIMIT In E-mail/FTP, Internet FAX send, the send data size exceeds the upper limit of send data.84 REJECTED In e-mail receive, a sender is registered in receive reject address/domain. <Receive>85 NG85 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with POP3 server.
• Header acquisition error.• Time-out during mail receive
86 RECEIVED In e-mail receive, an unsupported attached file is received.Only the TIFF-F type is supported for attached files.• The TIFF-F type of the attached file cannot be recognized.• There is no attached file.
87 NG87 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.• Memory over
88 NG88 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.• Cannot be stored in memory.• The number of items of acting receive data is the maximum, and an additional data cannot be stored.
89 NG89 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with the mail server.• Time-out occurs during e-mail receive.
90 NG90 XXXX *1 After reservation by re-operation of document filing, conversion for image send cannot be made.91 NG91 XXXX *1 *2 Data cannot be written to the memory device when Scan To USB is executed.
• The memory device is disconnected during writing to the memory device.• An error occurs due to a memory device trouble.
92 NG92 XXXX *1 *2 The USB device memory overflows during writing data into the memory device when "Scan to USB" is executed.
93 NG93 XXXX *1 When error in D-SMTP send (with recall)• An error response of 4XX occurs during communication with the SMTP server.• Time out occurs after establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
94 NG94 XXXX *1 When busy in D-SMTP sendTime out occurs during establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
95 NG95 XXXX *1 When the path is too long in execution of Scan To USB.96 NG96 XXXX *1 When the normal process is not executed in the secure mail sending.98 NG98 XXXX *1 The copy inhibit pattern is detected when scanning a document.99 NG99 XXXX *1 A document which is inhibited to be copied such as a banknote is scanned.
Report code (Communication
result)
Display in the column of result Content of communication interruption
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 27
(2) Communication report sub code 1The communication report sub code 1 (upper 2 digits) are always indicated as "00."
(3) Communication report sub code 2
Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive00 When the conditions after 01 do not apply. Send/Receive01 Send length over Send02 EOL time up Receive03 Carrier detection time up Receive04 Time up of the communication start command from the machine side Receive05 Time up in phase C (8 min) Send06 Memory image decode error Receive07 Memory image decode error Send08 Time up between frames in phase C (Report code is 0 or 16.) Send/Receive09 Not used —10 Not used —11 Polarity reversion detection Receive12 Invalid command reception Receive13 Time up (1-minute timer/6-second time) Receive14 PUT error Receive15 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Receive16 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Receive17 Command receive time-up from MFP controller Receive18 Not used —19 Not used —20 Polarity reversion detection Send21 Invalid command reception Send22 Fallback retry number over Send23 Command retry number resend over Send24 Time up (T5 timer) Send25 Time up (T5 timer) in V.34 mode Send26 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Send27 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Send28 When sending the FSK signal, no response of send completion is sent back from the MODEM chip within a certain time.
(V.34, other than V.34)Send
29 Not used —30 A communication error is generated between MFP controller and Modem controller. (Report code is 0 or 16.) —31 DC current not detected (busy) Send32 Dial tone not detected (busy) Send33 Busy tone detection (busy) Send34 T0 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send35 T1 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send36 In dialing, polarity reversion detection (Remote machine not responding) Send37 Calling is not made (busy)<Collision detected (including CNG detection)> Send38 Not used —60 In resend of document filed data, an error occurs in decoding or coding. Resend61 In resend of document filed data, setting to inhibit resolution conversion is made. (The resolution after resend is set to be
Enlarged.)Resend
62 In resend of document filed data, rotation setting is made for data which cannot be rotated. Resend63 In resend of document filed data, data cannot be stored in HD after conversion of resolution for resend. Resend64 In resending data of document file, during conversion for resending, the number of IMS management pages exceeds the
upper limit (999). (IT occurs in OSA Scan to FTP also, resulting in memory over.)Resend OSAScanToFTP
70 E-mail header acquisition error E-mail receive71 Time out occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive72 Receive reject occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive73 Network communication cannot be made due to port disable. Network send74 An authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled. Network send75 In the setting of SSL communication, when SSL communication is tried but the server side does not support SSL. Network send76 There is no image in network communication (transfer). Network send80 There is no attached file in received e-mail. E-mail receive81 The attached file of received e-mail is not of TIFF type which is supported. E-mail receive82 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized.
ID errorE-mail receive
83 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized.Endian error
E-mail receive
84 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized.Version error
E-mail receive
85 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized.Tag data error
E-mail receive
86 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized.Tag parameter error
E-mail receive
87 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized.Header size error
E-mail receive
MX-M264U TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 28
When the sub code 2 is "08" or "30" and the communication report is "OK," the report code is "00" or "16."
4. Dial toneWhen shipping from the factory, the dial tone detection when sending is set to Enable (changed from OFF to ON). When installing this machine,be sure to check and confirm that the dial tone is properly detected and the auto dial sending is enabled.
Check to confirm that the continuous buzzer sound is heard when the on-hook key is pressed. (Press the on-hook key again to cancel thebuzzer sound.)If facsimile communication cannot be executed normally through the IP telephone line, try the general telephone line.
88 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized.Data error
E-mail receive
90 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. Memory over.Cannot be stored in memory.
E-mail receive
91 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.The file size is too great to be stored in memory.
E-mail receive
92 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.Cannot be stored in memory.
E-mail receive
Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive
MX-M264U FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 1
MX-M264U[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE
1. OutlineA. Cases where update is requiredROM update is required in the following cases:1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance.2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the
machine.3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for
repair to the machine.4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be
repaired.
B. Notes for update(1) Relationship between each ROM and updateBefore execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’sinstalled in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinationsof each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.
C. Update procedures and kinds of firmwareThere are following methods of update of the firmware.1) Update method using SIM 49-12) Update method using FTP3) Update method using the Web page4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three
methods.)Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such aspower-off during updating, etc., and when retries of thesemethods are failed, the method 4) is employed.
Firmware typesThe firmware type can be displayed by SIM22-5.Use SIM22-5 to check the firmware type.
2. Update procedureA. Update method using SIM 49-1For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media orUSB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
*1:• Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.• The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for storing the firmware data.• The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.
+
USB memory
Firmware.sfu
Firmware.sfu
Firmware.sfu
Adapter
Firmware.sfu
USB Host
The machine detects the mediaand executes the program automatically.
Media
MX-M264U FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 2
Execution of the firmware by SIM49-011) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware
into the main unit. (Be sure to use the USB I/F on the operationpanel.)
2) Enter the SIM49-01.Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers tothe update screen.
* The number of key changes according to the number of thesfu file in the media or USB memory inserted.
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry tothe SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICECONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on thescreen. Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK]key to open the file. If the media have not been inserted and[OK] key is pushed, the next screen does not appear and thescreen waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USBmemory is pulled out on the file list screen, the error isdetected by the [FILE] key pressing, and the first screenappears.
3) Current version number and the version number to be updatedwill be shown for each firmware respectively.
4) Press [ALL] key.All the firmware programs are selected.
* Normally select all the firmwares and execute updating.* In this case, firmwares which do not exist on the machine
side are ignored.To update a certain firmware only, select the firmware withthe firmware display key.
* If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] key is gray outand cannot be pressed.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. “ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]”becomes clear. Press [YES] key to start the update of selectedfiremware.
The progress is displayed on right side of "FIRMWAREUPDATE" title by 20 steps.
At this time, only the progress gauge is displayed on thescreen, and the version and the firmware selection key are notdisplayed.
6) If the update is normal completion, following screen is dis-played.
Press [OK] key. (The machine is rebooted.)Go to SIM22-05 and confirm the firmware has upgraded suc-cessfully.
7) If the update is not normal completion, following screen is dis-played.
MX-M264U FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 3
B. Firmware update using FTPFTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
C. Firmware update using the Web pageAn Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to updatethe firmware.1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.
3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firm-ware to the machine. Update processing begins. While pro-cessing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..."appears.
4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the[Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.The browser will shift to the following screen.
"Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-tion." will be displayed.
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53
Firmware.sfu
Machine 1
Machine 2 Machine 4
Machine 310.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
MX-XXXX
MX-M264U FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 4
D. Firmware update using the CN update function (There are three methods.)
(1) OutlineThe update method using the DIP SW of the MFP PWB is calledthe CN update.
a. FunctionThere are the following three functions in the CN update mode.1) Firmware update function
This function is used to update the firmware by transferringdata from the PC which is connected to the MFP PWB, theSCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and various optionsby means of a USB memory or USB cable.This is basically the same as SIM49-01, but differs in the fol-lowing points:When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in asection other than the boot program for some reasons duringfirmware update operation of other method than the CNupdate, this method can be used to update the firmware.If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the SDcard must be replaced with a new one having the normal bootprogram.If the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormalityin the boot program.If the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" isnot displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormal-ity in the main program.
2) Firmware version check function(The method to check the firmware version by using SIM22-5is easier than this method. Therefore, it is not described in thismanual.)
3) ROM making function(This function is not used in the market, and not described inthis manual.)
b. PurposeThis function is used in the following cases:1) When an error occurs during firmware update operation other
than the CN update.When the power is shut down or an error occurs in a sectionother than the boot program for some reasons during firmwareupdate operation of other method than the CN update, thismethod can be used to update the firmware.If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the SDcard must be replaced with a new one having the normal bootprogram.If an error occurs in the boot program, this method cannot beused. In such a case, the SD card must be replaced with a newone having the normal boot program.
c. DIP-SW used in the CN update modeTo enter the CN update mode, turn ON the UPDATE DIP-SW onthe MFP PWB and boot the machine. When terminating the CN update mode, reset UPDATE DIP-SW toOFF (normal mode).
d. Keys used in the CN update modeThe following five keys are used for operations in the CN updatemode. Be careful that the functions of the keys differ those in thenormal mode.
Key name Functions in the CN update mode[OK] key Executes the selected function or item.[MENU] key Selects a menu.[BACK] key Selects a menu.
(Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)[UP] key Selects an item.[DOWN] key Selects an item.
LOGOUTHOME
IMAGE SEND
JOB STATUS PRINTREADYDATA
DATALINE
SYSTEMSETTINGS
[DOWN] key [BACK] key
[MENU] key [OK] key
[UP] key
MX-M264U FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 5
(2) Operating proceduresa. Firmware update functionThis function is used to revise the firmware by using the USB mem-ory for the MFP PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAXPWB, and each option.It is basically same as SIM 49-01, but differs in the following points.1) The update target ROM is automatically selected.2) When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a
section other than the boot program for some reasons duringfirmware update operation of other method than the CNupdate.If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, thismethod cannot be used. On that case, the SD card must bereplaced with a new one having the normal boot program.
When the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" isnot displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality inthe main program (SD card).
a-1. Necessary items1) Insert the SD card to the MFP PWB of the machine. 2) USB memory with the firmware file (SFU) saved in it.
NOTE: Save the firmware file in the main directory or in a one-levellower directory.
a-2. Procedures1) Turn OFF the power, and remove the cabinet and the MFP
PWB cover.2) Turn ON the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. (Tilt it to the
PWB side.)3) Install the USB memory into the USB port.
USB memory installing position
4) Turn ON the power.5) Check to confirm that the machine starts booting. (It takes
more than ten seconds to display the menu.)
6) Select the firmware update mode.Select the update mode with [MENU] key and [BACK] key.
7) Press [OK] key.The firmware file saved in the USB memory is retrieved, andthe file selection menu is displayed.
8) Select the firmware file (SFU).Select the target firmware file (SFU) with [UP] key and[DOWN] key.When [OK] key is pressed with a directory name (the head: ">D") displayed, the menu goes to the one-stage lower directory.When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower-stage directory, themenu returns to the original upper directory.
9) Press [OK] key.The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. It takes about oneminute.
10) After completion of reading, the firmware update process iscontinued.
* The abbreviated name of the firmware which is underupdate process is indicated on the right upper corner of thedisplay.
* During the update process, the display may flash instanta-neously. It is a normal operation.
11) Check the update result.Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to display the results of all thefirmware programs.
OK: Update is completed successfully.NG: Update is failed.Not Update: Update is not executed.
12) Turn OFF the power.13) Turn OFF the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. (Set the
DIP-SW to the normal mode.)14) Turn ON the power, and check to confirm that the machine
boots up normally.Check to confirm that the boot animation is displayed.Check to confirm that "Copying is enabled" is displayed on thecopier basic menu.
15) Check to confirm the version of each firmware with SIM22-5.16) Attach the MFP PWB cover and the cabinet.
USB port
Update Program InitPlease wait
Version CheckConf : 00050000
Display when booting is completed
Firm UpdateFrom USB Memory
Display of the firmware update mode
Firm Update> F 0100P000.sfu
Display of file selection
Firm UpdateReading Data
Display of file reading
Firm Update IcuMWriting Data
Display of the firmware update process
Firm Update IcuMResult : OK
Firm Update IcuMResult : Not Update
Display of the firmware update result
Firm Update IcuMResult : NG
MX-M264U MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
MX-M264U[9] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance list26cpm machine✕: Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.) : Cleaning : Replace ✩: Lubricate
Whencalling
75k
150k
225k
300k
375k
450k
525k
600k
675k
750k Remark
Monochrome supply
Process section
DrumCleaner bladeSeal F/R ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Drum frame unit (Toner reception sheet)
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Usable for three PM cycles
MC unitSeparation pawl unitStar ring Packed with the drum.
Developing section
DeveloperToner filterDV blade ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
DV side sheet F ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
DV side sheet R ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Toner sensor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Toner cartridge
BK User replacement for every toner empty.
Transfer section
Transfer unit
Transfer roller unit –Gear – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ –
Fusing section
Upper heat rollerLower heat rollerFusing separation pawl (Upper)Upper cleaning pad ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Thermistor cleaning pad
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Fusing separation pawl (Lower)ThermistorFusing gear ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Upper heat roller bearing
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Fusing bearing (Lower)
✕ ✩ ✕ ✕ ✩ ✕ ✕ ✩
Paper guidePaper feed/Transport/Paper exit sections
Paper feed Pickup roller ✕ Part replacement reference: 100K or 1 year of use
Separation sheet ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Part replacement reference: 100K or 1 year of use
Transport rollers ✕
Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Transport paper guidesSensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Others Ozone filterGear ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ When checking, apply to the
necessary positions. (Specified positions)
Optical system
Mirror/Lens/Reflector/CCDTable glass/SPF glassScanner lampRails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Drive belt/drive wire ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
MX-M264U MAINTENANCE 9 – 2
31/35cpm machine✕: Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.) : Cleaning : Replace ✩: Lubricate
RSPF Paper feed section/Transport section
Paper feed roller Replacement reference: Replace according to the SPF paper feed counter value.SPF section roller: 100K or 1 year of useWhen replacing the paper feed roller, apply grease to the paper feed shaft. (GP-501MR)
Pickup rollerSeparation roller
Torque limiter SPF (for separation)
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference: Replace according to the SPF paper feed counter value.SPF section torque limiter: 400K or 2 years of useWhen replacing the paper feed roller, apply grease to the paper feed shaft. (GP-501MR)
Takeup torque limiter (for takeup)
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Transport rollersSensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Scanning plateDrive section
Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Other OC mat
Whencalling
100k
150k
200k
300k
400k
450k
500k
600k
700k
750k Remark
Monochrome supply
Process section
Drum ✕ ✕ ✕
Cleaner blade ✕ ✕ ✕
Seal F/R ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Drum frame unit (Toner reception sheet)
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Usable for three PM cycles
MC unit ✕ ✕ ✕
Separation pawl unit ✕ ✕ ✕
Star ring Packed with the drum.Developing section
Developer ✕ ✕ ✕
Toner filter ✕ ✕ ✕
DV blade ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
DV side sheet F ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
DV side sheet R ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Toner sensor ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –Toner cartridge
BK User replacement for every toner empty.
Transfer section
Transfer unit
Transfer roller unit –Gear – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ –
Fusing section
Upper heat rollerLower heat rollerFusing separation pawl (Upper)Upper cleaning pad ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Thermistor cleaning pad
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Fusing separation pawl (Lower)ThermistorFusing gear ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Upper heat roller bearing
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Fusing bearing (Lower)
✕ ✩ ✕ ✕ ✩ ✕ ✕ ✩
Paper guide
Whencalling
75k
150k
225k
300k
375k
450k
525k
600k
675k
750k Remark
MX-M264U MAINTENANCE 9 – 3
2. Other related itemsA. Counter clear
*: When maintenance message is displayed, replace consumption part reaching the number of sheets of maintenance, then clear the replaced part's counter only.
Paper feed/Transport/Paper exit sections
Paper feed Pickup roller ✕ – – – Part replacement reference: 100K or 1 year of use
Separation sheet ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – Part replacement reference: 100K or 1 year of use
Transport rollers ✕ – – –Gears ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –Discharge brush ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –Transport paper guides
– – –
Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –Others Ozone filter – – –
Gear ✩ ✩ – ✩ ✩ ✩ – ✩ ✩ ✩ – When checking, apply to the necessary positions. (Specified positions)
Optical system
Mirror/Lens/Reflector/CCD
– – –
Table glass/SPF glass – – –Scanner lamp – – –Rails ✩ ✩ – ✩ ✩ ✩ – ✩ ✩ ✩ –Drive belt/drive wire ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –
RSPF Paper feed section/Transport section
Paper feed roller – – – Replacement reference: Replace according to the SPF paper feed counter value.SPF section roller: 100K or 1 year of useWhen replacing the paper feed roller, apply grease to the paper feed shaft. (GP-501MR)
Pickup roller – – –Separation roller – – –
Torque limiter SPF (for separation)
✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – Replacement reference: Replace according to the SPF paper feed counter value.SPF section torque limiter: 400K or 2 years of useWhen replacing the paper feed roller, apply grease to the paper feed shaft. (GP-501MR)
Takeup torque limiter (for takeup)
✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –Transport rollers – – –Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –Scanning plate – – –
Drive section
Gears ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ –
Other OC mat – – –
Item SIM RemarksMaintenance cycle setting SIM 21-1Jam/trouble counter clear SIM 24-1Paper feed counter clear SIM 24-2Scan/Stapler/Stamp counter clear SIM 24-3Maintenance counter clear SIM 24-4 *Developing counter clear SIM 24-5 At developer replacementCopy counter clear SIM 24-6Printer/other counter clear SIM 24-9FAX counter clear SIM 24-10Scanner mode counter clear SIM 24-15
Whencalling
100k
150k
200k
300k
400k
450k
500k
600k
700k
750k Remark
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 1
MX-M264U[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Unit Parts1. Process unit A. Drum
B. Drum section (1) Main charger(2) Cleaning blade(3) Drum frame unit(4) Moquette F/R(5) Separation pawl
2. Developing unit
A. DeveloperB. Toner filter unitC. DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet RD. DV bladeE. Toner sensor
3. Fusing section
A. ThermostatB. ThermistorC. Paper guideD. Fusing separation pawl (lower)E. Lower heat rollerF. Heater lampG. Upper cleaning padH. Fusing separation pawl (upper)I. Upper heat rollerJ. Thermistor cleaning pad
4. Optical section
A. Table glass, SPF glassB. Drive belt, Drive wireC. RailsD. Mirror, Reflector, Scanner lampE. Lens, CCDF. LED PWB, LED driver PWB
5. Paper feed section
A. Upper 500 sheets tray paper feed
(1) Paper feed roller/pickup roller
(2) Separation sheet(3) Lift unit
B. Lower 500 sheets tray paper feed
(1) Paper feed roller/pickup roller
(2) Separation sheet(3) Lift unit(4) Transport clutch(5) Paper feed clutch(6) Transport roller(7) Solenoid(8) Sensor PWB
C. Paper feed solenoidD. Tray sensor PWBE. Manual P-in sensor/Manual empty sensorF. Multi manual
paper feed(1) Paper feed roller/
pickup roller(2) Reverse sensor(3) Separation sheet(4) Clutch/solenoid
6. Side door unit A. Transport roller unitB. Transport rollerC. DUP transport rollerD. DUP motor
7. 1st paper exit unit
A. Cooling fanB. Transport/Exit roller
8. Laser unit A. LSU9. Power unit A. Power source10. PWB A. SCN PWB
B. PCU PWBC. MFPC PWBD. Second interface PWB
11. Ozone filter12. Transport section
A. Transport roller
13. Operation section
A. Operation panel unitB. USB I/F PWBC. KEY PWBD. LVDS PWB, LCD, Touch panel
14. RSPF A. RSPF unit (1) Document pickup roller, Paper feed roller
(2) Separation roller, Torque limiter SPF
(3) Take-up torque limiter(4) Discharge brush(5) Registration roller(6) OC mat
B. RSPF paper feed tray unitC. RSPF transport
unit(1) Transport roller 2,
Transport roller 3, Paper exit roller
(2) Scan plate
Unit Parts
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 2
1. Process unitNote for servicing the OPC drums1. Prevention of oily dirt attachmentNote• Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC drum
surface. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.)• When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum with the
protection sheet and hold the protection sheet.If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough carenot to touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from bothedges of the OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached tothe cleaning blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning blademay flip.)
CountermeasuresIf a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously,perform the following countermeasures.1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt.2) Apply Kynar powder to prevent blade flip.Check methodCheck to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oilydirt and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the follow-ing method.• Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality inthe image.
2. Prior exposure preventionNote• Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.• Do not expose the unit to light for a long time.• Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using
paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)CountermeasuresIf the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (priorexposure), perform the following countermeasures.1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular densityarea in the previously exposed section.
2) Damages due to prior exposure may be recovered by keepingthe OPC drum for several hours. If, however, image are notrecovered, replace the OPC drum.
A. Drum
CAUTION: When installing the process unit in the main unit afterreplacing the drum, process unit may not be able toinstall by reason of the drum drive coupling position.In this case, rotate the drum about 45 degrees andinstall again.
B. Drum section(1) Main charger
(2) Cleaning blade
5mm
5mm
21
43
1 2
4
3
1
1
2
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 3
(3) Drum frame unit
(4) Moquette F/R
CAUTION: If it disturbs the blade movement, replace it and attachnew one.
(5) Separation pawlDisassembly * Hold the tip of the separation pawl and remove it.
Assembly * Press the center of the separation pawl and install it.
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 4
2. Developing sectionA. Developer
Turn the MG roller to discharge developer.
B. Toner filter unitWith the guide AS (cover) removed, replace it.When replacing, clean the guide AS.
C. DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R
DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R attachment reference
D. DV blade
DV blade attachment reference
00.5 0 0.5
0
0.3
0
0.3
Projection edgereference
Projection edgereference
Moltedgereference
Moltedgereference
00.5
[Cross-section]
0
0.5
Bumpreference
Rib reference
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 5
E. Toner sensor• Clean the sensor only after removing used DV when replacing
DV.• Without removing the MG roller, clean the sensor surface with
waste cloth in the arrow direction to remove toner.
3. Fusing section
A. ThermostatCAUTION: When securing the lamp harness and the thermostat,
the tightening torque of the screw (4 positions) is 6-9kgs.
B. Thermistor
C. Paper guide
1
2
3
1
1
1
2
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 6
D. Fusing separation pawl (lower)
E. Lower heat roller
F. Heater lamp
G. Upper cleaning pad
12
2
3
4
4
5
6
2
1
3
3
1
2
1
2
2
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 7
H. Fusing separation pawl (upper)
I. Upper heat roller
J. Thermistor cleaning pad
4. Optical sectionA. Table glass, SPF glass1) Remove the glass holder. and the table glass. Remove the
table glass, and the SPF glass.
2) Clean the both surfaces of the table glass, and the SPF glass.
B. Drive belt, Drive wire1) Remove the table glass.2) Check the tension of the drive belt and the drive wire. Check to
confirm that the drive wire in the winding pulley is wound with-out clearance.
2
22
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
3
3
1
45
2
3
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 8
CAUTION: Wind the drive wire in the sequence of 1 to 7 as shownin the figure below and fix it.When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift themirror unit to the vicinity of the home position, and wind7 turns as shown in the figure, and fix the 8th turn with ascrew. Then wind two turns furthermore around the pul-ley.
C. Rails1) Remove the table glass.2) Grease each rail.
CAUTION: Be careful not to allow grease to come in contact withdrive wires.If grease contacts drive wires, clean wires thoroughly.
D. Mirror, Reflector, Scanner lamp1) Remove the table glass.2) Clean the No. 2 mirror, and the No. 3 mirror.
3) Clean the reflector, the scanner lamp, and the No. 2 mirror.
E. Lens, CCD1) Remove the table glass.2) Remove the dark box, and the cover.
3) Clean the lens, and the CCD.
8910 7 1
8 9 1071
2
1
2
6
5
7
4
3
4
3
5
67
1
12
3
1
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 9
F. LED PWB, LED driver PWB1) Remove the table glass.2) Shift the lamp unit to the notch section of the scanner base
plate.
3) Turn over the sheet.
CAUTION: When attaching the sheet to the original position, insertthe L-shape sections into the inside of the metal plateand attach the center portion to the metal plate withdouble-stick tape.
4) Remove the lamp guide. Disconnect the connector from theLED driver PWB.
5) Remove the scanner lamp, and the LED PWB. Disconnect theconnector from the LED PWB.
6) Remove the harness holder, and remove the flat cable fromthe LED driver PWB. Remove the LED driver PWB.
5. Paper feed section
A. Upper 500 sheets tray paper feed(1) Paper feed roller/pickup roller
1
1
2
21
3
1
A Paper feed rollerB Pickup rollerC Separation sheet
1
2
3
34
A
C
B
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 10
CAUTION: With the toner cartridge installed, do not tilt or shake thedeveloper cartridge.
3
1
2
When replacing, be careful not to adhere conduction grease (black) to the drive section.
Slightly apply grease GE676 (UKOG-0013QSZZ) to the drum boss.
1
2
1
2
4
3
4
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 11
(2) Separation sheet
* Slightly apply grease GP501MR (UKOG-0012QSZZ) around theaxis. One rice grain for each.Grease should not come out when assembling.
(3) Lift unit
B. Lower 500 sheets tray paper feed(1) Paper feed roller/pickup roller
1
1
2
2
3
3
1) 1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
2
4
4
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 12
(2) Separation sheet
* Slightly apply grease GP501MR (UKOG-0012QSZZ) around theaxis. One rice grain for each.Grease should not come out when assembling.
(3) Lift unit
(4) Transport clutch
(5) Paper feed clutch
(6) Transport roller
1
2
1
1
1
2
3
2
1
3
1
3
2
1
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 13
(7) Solenoid
(8) Sensor PWB
C. Paper feed solenoid
D. Tray sensor PWB
E. Manual P-in sensor/Manual empty sensor
F. Multi manual paper feed(1) Paper feed roller/pickup roller
12
3
1
23
3
1
32
3
1
2
A
B
5
6
1 2
43
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 14
Installation * Install so that the cam transmit arm (1) comes underthe roller arm (2).
(2) Reverse sensor
(3) Separation sheet
* Slightly apply grease GP501MR (UKOG-0012QSZZ) around theaxis. One rice grain for each.
(4) Clutch/solenoidClutch
Solenoid
Clutch
1
2
2
14
3
LOCK
1
32
1)
2)
3)
2
1
1
2
2
3
1
2
A
A
A A
A
A
A
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 15
6. Side door unitA. Transport roller unit
* Check that two springs are securely inserted into the transferroller unit bosses.
B. Transport roller
C. DUP transport roller
41
23
3
1
2
1
2
3
1
1
12
1
1
2
33
4
2
33
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
3
2
2
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 16
7. 1st paper exit unitA. Cooling fan
B. Transport/Exit roller
2
1 11
1
1
3
4
5
5
2
2
1
1
1
1
3
4
2
5
1
2
3
2
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 17
CAUTION: Check to confirm that the solenoid shaft is in the gatebracket, and fix with the screw.
1
2
2
1
1
2
11
1
2
1
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 18
8. Laser unitCAUTION: Do not disassemble the LSU unit.
A. LSU1) Turn OFF the machine power, and disconnect the power plug
from the power outlet.2) Remove the left cabinet and exit tray.3) Disconnect the LSU connector, and remove the securing
screws to remove the LSU.
9. Power unitA. Power source
CAUTION: Disconnect the connector, and remove the unit.
2
3
2
1
1
11
2
11
1
12
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 19
10. PWBA. SCN PWB
B. PCU PWB
C. MFPC PWB
D. Second interface PWB1
12
2
11
12
2
2
2
33
1
11
1
1
1
11
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
3
12
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 20
11. Ozone filter 12. Transport sectionA. Transport roller
2
1 11
1
2
2
3
3
1
2
1
21
1
13
2
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 21
13. Operation sectionA. Operation panel unit1) Remove the front cabinet upper.2) Remove the operation panel base plate.
3) Remove the operation panel unit.
B. USB I/F PWB1) Remove the USB I/F PWB.
C. KEY PWB1) Remove the Mylar, the earth sheet, and remove the KEY
PWB.
CAUTION: When installing, be careful of the overlapping sequenceof the Mylar and the earth sheet.
D. LVDS PWB, LCD, Touch panel1) Remove the screw, disconnect the connector, and remove the
LVDS PWB.
CAUTION: When installing, be careful of the overlapping sequenceof the earth sheet.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the LCD holder.
CAUTION: When installing, be careful of the overlapping sequenceof the earth sheet.
1
1
2
1
1
1
13
1
2
31
1
2
31
54
1
4
4
2
11
2
1
2
3 4
3
3
3
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 22
3) Remove the holder, and remove the LCD.
CAUTION: Use enough care not to put finger prints on the LCD sur-face.
4) Remove the touch panel.
CAUTION: Use enough care not to put finger prints on the touchpanel surface.
14. RSPFA. RSPF unit1) Remove the rear upper cabinet.2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the harness guide.
3) Remove the RSPF unit from the machine.
(1) Document pickup roller, Paper feed roller1) Open the paper feed unit, and remove the cover.
2) Remove the holder, and remove the document pickup roller,and the paper feed roller.
(2) Separation roller, Torque limiter SPF1) Open the paper feed unit, and remove the cover.
1
2
2
2
2
1
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 23
2) Remove the holder, and remove the separation roller.
3) Remove the torque limiter SPF.
(3) Take-up torque limiter1) Remove the one-way coupling, the belt, and the pulley.
Remove the E-ring. Pull out the shaft, and remove the bearing,the holder, and the take-up torque limiter.
(4) Discharge brush1) Open the document tray, and remove the discharge brush.
CAUTION: When replacing the discharge brush, attach a newbrush to the reference.
(5) Registration roller1) Open the paper feed unit, and clean the registration roller.
(6) OC mat1) Open the RSPF unit, and clean the OC mat.
B. RSPF paper feed tray unit1) Turn over the left upper corner of the OC mat.
2
1
8
1 2 3 4
3
5
6
7
Character edge reference
Squareholereference
1mm 1mm
0 - 0.5mm
1
2
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 24
2) Remove the front cabinet.
3) Remove the rear cabinet.
4) Disconnect the connector from the RSPF driver PWB. Removethe holder, and remove the RSPF paper feed tray unit.
C. RSPF transport unit1) Remove the paper feed tray unit.2) Remove the earth wire. Disconnect the connector from the
RSPF driver PWB.
3) Remove the RSPF transport unit.
1
2
1
1
12
3
4
2
1
31
2
2
1
11
1
1
1
MX-M264U DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 25
(1) Transport roller 2, Transport roller 3, Paper exit roller
1) Clean the transport roller 2, the transport roller 3, and thepaper exit roller
(2) Scan plate1) Clean the scan plate.
MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 1
MX-M264U[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING
1. HDD/SD card memory mapA. HDD partitionOption HDD installedHDD size = 160GB (Actual size 149GB)
B. HDD data contentsOption HDD installed
No. File system Stored data NOTEI-1 Image data Image data (ERDH/Temporary storage) 1000 documents, 3000 imagesI-2 Image data Image data (Document filing) 3000 documents, 20000 imagesI-3 Image data Not available Not usedI-4 Image data FAX/Internet Fax receive imagesL-1 Not available System storage data (Address book, image send system registration data (sender's
information, meta data, etc.), FSS collection data)S-1 Universal Download font
User macroDatabase system fileSystem logSystem setting data (Backup)
S-2 Universal Document filing (Database)Job log (Database)Job completion list
S-3 Universal Not available Not usedS-4 Universal Not available Not usedS-5 Universal Spool area for printerS-6 Universal Application work area (User file used in USB direct print)S-7 Universal Not available Not usedS-8 Universal Not available Not usedS-9 Universal Data backup when installing DSK (User data (Address book, account information))S-10 Universal e-manual
WatermarkL-2 Universal Not available Not used
Outertracks
Innertracks
offset(GB)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 [GB]
[GB]
[I-1] 14GB
[I-2] 72GB
[S-1] 2.5GB
[S-5] 16GB
[S-6] 4GB
[S-9] 6GB
[S-3] 2GB Not used
[S-7] 2GB Not used
[L-2] 1GB
[S-8] 16GB Not used
[S-10] 8GB
[S-4] 2GB Not used
[I-3] 1GBNot used
[I-4] 1GB [L-1] 1GB
[S-2]0.5GB
MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 2
C. SD card partitionOption HDD installedSD card size = 4GB (Actual size 3.6GB)
Option HDD uninstalledSD card size = 8GB (Actual size 7.2GB)
D. SD card data contentsOption HDD installed
No. File system Stored data NOTEL-101 Not available ICU firmware (Boot/Main)
Boot animationBoot (CN Update mode)ARM9 firmwarelang.sfu (language data)graph.sfu (Animation data)
S-101 Universal fontweb helpspdlOption FontROM
S-102 Universal Same as above (Mirror)S-105 Universal Setting value data file (System setting/SIM setting data (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)S-103 Universal Key operator setting storage data
FEP leaning data (Japanese/Chinese)Firmware update data (differential between new and old) (For FSS)Account management information/User authentication data
I-101 Image data FAX/Internet Fax receive images (for backup) (HDD 1-4 area data backup)
0 100
0
1
2
3
200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 [MB]
[GB]
[L-101] 500MB
[S-102] 500MB
[I-101] 1GB
[S-103] 924MB
[S-101] 500MB
[S-105]100MB
[MB]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
[GB]
200 300 400 500 600 700 800 9000 100
[S-103] 924MB
[S-104]200MB
[I-101] 500MB [I-102] 500MB
[L-101] 500MB [S-101] 200MB [S-102] 200MB [S-105]100MB
[I-103] 4GB
MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 3
Option HDD uninstalled
No. File system Stored data NOTEL-101 Not available ICU firmware (Boot/Main)
Boot animationBoot (CN Update mode)ARM9 firmwarelang.sfu (language data)graph.sfu (Animation data)
S-101 Universal fontweb helpspdlOption FontROM
S-102 Universal S-101 area data backup (mirror)S-105 Universal Setting value data file (System setting/SIM setting data (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)S-103 Universal Key operator setting storage data
IMS job management dataFAX reception data (For power shut off and paper empty)FEP leaning data (Japanese/Chinese)Firmware update data (differential between new and old) (For FSS)Account management information/User authentication dataSystem log
S-104 Universal S-105 area data backup (mirror)I-101 Image data FAX/Internet Fax receive imagesI-102 Image data FAX/Internet Fax receive images (Backup) Not used when an option
HDD is installed. I-103 Image data ERDH work
MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 4
2. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB, HDD and the SD CardA. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)CAUTION: Registered user information will not be recovered if the MFP PWB is affected by U2-05 trouble. (*1)1) Attach the flash ROM, the memory, the EEPROM, the SD card etc. of the MFP PWB on the service parts MFP PWB and install it to the
main unit.
CAUTION: Ground your body with grounding band during the work.2) When U2 trouble occurs, use SIM16 to cancel it.3) Set as follows after restarting the main unit.
At this timing, F6-21 may occur. Whether it may occur or not, go to execute procedure 1.(1) Set the appropriate country code by Sim66-02 (clear the software switches related to FAX).
CAUTION: Make sure to execute even if the fax option is not installed on the machine.
B. Procedures necessary for HDD replacementNote for HDD replacement• Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data backup is possible before
replacement, perform data backup and then replace the HDD.• If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up.• The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD.Contents of this chapter• HDD storage data and backup• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be backed up• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD• Reinstall and update procedures of Operation Manual data saved in HDD• Reinstall and update procedures of watermark data.
(1) HDD storage data and backupSome HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other data cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other storagedata cannot.If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to theHDD storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD.
a. HDD storage data list
*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-3 and USB memory.*2: Watermark data cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-5 and USB memory.
No. Data kindBefore installation
(When shipping from the factory)
After installation (After use by
users)
Enable/Disable of
data backupBackup means
Enable/Disable of
data reinstall
Data reinstall procedures
Reinstall operator
1 e-Manual Available Available Disable *1 Enable Sim49-3 Service2 Address book Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 /
Device cloning / Storage backup
Enable Sim56-2 /Device cloning / Storage backup
Service
3 Image send series registration data (Sender’s information, meta data, etc.)
Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Device cloning / Storage backup
Enable Sim56-2 /Device cloning / Storage backup
Service
4 User authenticationAccount management
Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 Enable Sim56-2 Service
5 Japanese FEP dictionary (Learning)
Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
6 Chinese FEP dictionary (Learning)
Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
7 JOB LOG Not available Available Enable Perform with WEB PAGE.
Disable —
8 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —9 New N/A (FSS) information Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
10 User font (Added) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform withWEB PAGE.
Service or User
11 User macro Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform withWEB PAGE.
12 Document filing Not available Available Enable Perform with WEB PAGE.
Enable Perform withWEB PAGE.
13 Some of system setting data
Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Device cloning / Storage backup
Enable Sim56-2 /Device cloning / Storage backup
Service
14 Watermark Available Available Disable *2 Enable Sim49-5 Service15 FAX reception data Not available Available Enable Sim66-62 Disable — —
MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 5
(2) Replacement procedures when HDD data can be backed up
a. Work contents and procedures
(3) Replacement procedures when the HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown
a. Display when HDD breakdownWhen a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03is popped up.In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDDmust be replaced.
b. Work contents and procedures
With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factoryshipping.
Procedures
When a new HDD(blank HDD, service part) is used, or when a HDD which
is normal but a program error occurs in it is used.
When a used HDD(used in the same model) is used *
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (Servicing)Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB memory.)(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 (Address book, Image send series registration data, User authentication data))
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User or servicing)Back up the data to PC with Web page.(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 7, 10, 14 (Document filing data, JOB LOG data))
Step 3 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup data are given to the user.)
Step 4 Replace the HDD.Step 5 Boot the complex machine.
Formatting is automatically performed.
Boot the complex machine.
Step 6 The trouble code, U2-05, is displayed. Cancel with SIM16.
Step 7 Since a blank HDD is automatically formatted, there is no need to perform formatting procedure with SIM.
Use SIM62-1 to format the HDD.
Step 8 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between the HDD data and the image related memory and to prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet Fax models.)
Step 9 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.Step 10 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed. Use SIM49-5 to
install the watermark data to the HDD. After booting the machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
Step 11 Import the data backed up in Step 1.Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup to import.(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 (Address book, Image send series registration data, User authentication data))
Step 12 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in Step 2.Import enable data: Document filing data, User font, Use macro(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be imported.)
Procedures
When a new HDD(blank HDD, service part) is used, or when a HDD which
is normal but a program error occurs in it is used.
When a used HDD(used in the same model) is used *
Step 1 Install a HDD to the machine, and boot the complex machine.
Formatting is automatically performed.
Install a HDD to the machine, and boot the complex machine.
Step 2 The trouble code, U2-05, is displayed. Cancel with SIM16.
Step 3 Since a blank HDD is automatically formatted, there is no need to perform formatting procedure with SIM.
Use Sim62-1 to format the HDD.
Step 4 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup data are given to the user.)
Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between the HDD data and the image related memory and to prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet Fax models.)
Step 6 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.Step 7 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed. Use SIM49-5 to
install the watermark data to the HDD. After booting the machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 6
(4) Reinstall and update procedures of the HDD storage Operation Manual data
1) Obtain the Operation Manual data.Download the Operation Manual data from the utility menu onthe web site (Tech-DS home page).Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changingthe file hierarchy.To upload to the complex machine, files of "**_pdf_fax.idx" and"**_pdf.idx" and "version.txt" as well as the Operation Manualdata (**.pdf) are required. When the downloaded files are cop-ied without changing the file hierarchy, these files also are cop-ied.
NOTE: When data are uploaded from the USB memory to theHDD, if there are some data in the HDD, the files in thememory are compared with the files in the HDD and onlythe files which satisfy the following conditions are writteninto the HDD.• The file size is different.• The time stamp is different.• The file exists only in the USB memory.
CAUTION: The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installedto another machine. If installed, the adjustment data willbe overwritten and a trouble may be generated.
2) Enter the SIM49-3 mode.
3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.• When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STOR-
ANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK]button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu1.
4) Select the folder of the Operation Manual data. (The screenshifts to the Operation Manual data install menu.)The current version and the update version are displayed.
5) Press [EXECUTE] button.[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttonsare changed from gray-out to active display.
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected Operation Manualis installed.When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In caseof an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.
(5) Watermark data reinstall and update procedures1) Obtain the watermark data.
Download the watermark data from the utility menu on the website (Tech-DS home page).Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changingthe file hierarchy.
NOTE: When data are uploaded from the USB memory to theHDD, if there are some data in the HDD, the files in thememory are compared with the files in the HDD and onlythe files which satisfy the following conditions are writteninto the HDD.• The file size is different.• The time stamp is different.• The file exists only in the USB memory.
2) Enter the SIM49-5 mode.
3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.• When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STOR-
ANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK]button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu1.
4) Select the folder of the watermark data. (The screen shifts tothe watermark data install menu.)The current version and the update version are displayed.
5) Press [EXECUTE] button.[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttonsare changed from gray-out to active display.
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected watermark dataare installed.When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In caseof an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.
MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 7
C. Procedures necessary for SD card replacement(1) SD card data and backupSome SD card storage data can be backed up, and some data cannot. Some SD card storage data can be reinstalled, and some data cannot.If the SD card operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the SD card referringto the storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the SD card.The SD card includes the following data.SD card backup Option HDD installed
1) Use SIM56-02 to backup the SD card data to the USB mem-ory.
2) When the operation panel home screen has been customized,backup the SD card data by using the device cloning function.
3) When there are some FAX/Internet Fax data received, useSIM66-62 to backup the image data to the USB memory in thePDF file type, and give the PDF file to the user. (The data can-not be restored to the machine.)
4) Replace the SD card with a new one. 5) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.6) Use SIM66-10 to clear the image send memory. (This is in
order to obtain consistency between the HDD data and theimage related memory.)
7) Use SIM56-02 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).
8) Restore the data backed up in procedure 2) by using thedevice cloning function.
CAUTION: When replacing the SD card, be sure to use only thespecified SD card supplied as a service part.The firmware required for booting must be includedin the SD card used in this machine. The commer-cially available SD cards have no such data.
NOTE: MEMO: When U2-40 error occurs, if the error cannot becanceled by SIM16, or when E7-07 error occurs, there maybe some trouble in the SD card.
CAUTION: The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installedto another machine. If installed, the adjustment data willbe overwritten and a trouble may be generated.
Partition number Stored data Enable/Disable
of data backup Backup means Enable/Disable of data reinstall
Data reinstall procedures
L-101 ICU firmware data ICU firmware (Boot/Main)lang.sfugraph.sfuBoot animationBoot (CN)ARM9 firmware
Disable Enable SIM49-1(BOOT cannot be installed again.)
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install)
font Disable Enable SIM49-1web help Disable Enable SIM49-1spdl Disable Enable SIM49-1Option FontROM Disable Enble SIM49-1
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror)
Same as above Disable Enable SIM49-1
S-105 System data Setting value data file (System setting/SIM setting data (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
Disable SIM56-2 Enable SIM56-2
S-103 User data System setting data Enable sim56-02 Enable SIM56-2Key operator custom setting data (Data changed from the default)
Enable System setting -data backup - device cloning
Enable System setting - data backup - device cloning
FEP learning data (Japanese/Chinese)
Disable Disable
Firmware update data (differential between new and old) (For FSS)
Disable Disable
Account management information/User authentication data
Enable sim56-02 Enable SIM56-2
Home screen customize data Enable System setting - data backup - device cloning
Enable System setting - data backup - device cloning
I-101 FAX reception data FAX/Internet Fax reception image data
Enable SIM66-62 Disable
MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 8
SD card backupOption HDD uninstalled
1) Use SIM56-02 to backup the SD card data to the USB mem-ory.
2) When the address book has been registered, use the storagebackup function to backup the address book data.
3) When the operation panel home screen has been customized,backup the SD card data by using the device cloning function.
4) When there are some FAX/Internet Fax data received, useSIM66-62 to backup the image data to the USB memory in thePDF file type, and give the PDF file to the user. (The data can-not be restored to the machine.)
5) Replace the SD card with a new one.6) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.7) Use SIM66-10 to clear the image send memory.8) Use SIM56-02 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).9) Restore the address book data backed up in the procedure 2).
By using the storage backup function.10) Restore the data backed up in procedure 3) by using the
device cloning function.
CAUTION: When replacing the SD card, be sure to use only thespecified SD card supplied as a service part.The firmware required for booting must be includedin the SD card used in this machine. The commer-cially available SD cards have no such data.
NOTE: When U2-40 error occurs, if the error cannot be canceledby SIM16, or when E7-07 error occurs, there may be sometrouble in the SD card.
CAUTION: The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installedto another machine. If installed, the adjustment data willbe overwritten and a trouble may be generated.
Partition number Stored data Enable/Disable of
data backup Backup means Enable/Disable of data reinstall
Data reinstall procedures
L-101 ICU firmware data ICU firmware (Boot/Main)lang.sfugraph.sfuBoot animationBoot (CN)ARM9 firmware
Disable Enable SIM49-1(BOOT cannot be installed again.)
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install)
font Disable Enable SIM49-1web help Disable Enable SIM49-1spdl Disable Enable SIM49-1Option FontROM Disable Enable SIM49-1
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror)
Same as above Disable Enable SIM49-1
S-105 System data Setting value data file (System setting/SIM setting data (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
Disable SIM56-2 Enable SIM56-2
S-103 User data System setting data Enable sim56-02 Enable SIM56-2Key operator custom setting data (Data changed from the default)
Enable System setting -data backup - device cloning
Enable System setting - data backup - device cloning
FAX reception data (For power shut off and paper empty)
Disable Disable
FEP learning data (Japanese/Chinese)
Disable Disable
Firmware update data (differential between new and old) (For FSS)
Disable Disable
Account management information/User authentication data
Enable sim56-02 Enable SIM56-2
Home screen customize data Enable System setting - data backup - device cloning
Enable System setting - data backup - device cloning
Address Data Enable System setting - data backup - storage backup
Enable System setting - data backup - storage backup
I-101 FAX reception data FAX/Internet Fax reception image data
Enable SIM66-62 Disable
I-102 FAX reception data FAX/Internet Fax reception image data (Backup)
Enable SIM66-62 Disable
MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 9
3. HDD/SD card SIM format operationThe relations between SIM62/66 and formatted (deleted) data are as follows:*1: Physical format ("0" is written to the all area.)*2: Logical format (Only the management area is initialized.)*3: Nothing is done.
SIM66-10 FAX image memory clearHDD
SD Card
SIM62-1 Hard disk formatHDD
SD Card
SIM62-8 Hard disk format (Excluding the system area)HDD
SD Card
SIM62-10 Job complete list (Job log data) deleteHDD
SD Card
Partition number Partition
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *3I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *3I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *2L-1 System storage data *3S-1 User data 1 *3S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *3S-3 Redial information of the address book *3S-5 Printer spooler *3S-6 Application work *3S-9 DSK data save *3
Partition number Partition
I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *2L-101 ICU firmware *3S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3S-103 User data 2 *3S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)*3
Partition number Partition
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *1I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *1I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1L-1 System storage data *1S-1 User data 1 *1S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *1S-5 Printer spooler *1S-6 Application work *1S-9 DSK data save *1
Partition number Partition
L-101 ICU firmware *3S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)*3
S-103 User data 2 *1I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1
Partition number Partition
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *1I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *1I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1L-1 System storage data *3S-1 User data 1 *1S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *1S-5 Printer spooler *1S-6 Application work *1S-9 DSK data save *1
Partition number Partition
I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1L-101 ICU firmware *3S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3S-103 User data 2 *1S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)*3
Partition number Partition
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *3I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *3I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3L-1 System storage data *3S-1 User data 1 *3S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *2S-5 Printer spooler *3S-6 Application work *2S-9 DSK data save *3
Partition number Partition
I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3L-101 ICU firmware *3S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3S-103 User data 2 *3S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)*3
MX-M264U VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 10
SIM62-11 Document filing data deleteHDD
SD Card
SIM62-13 Hard disk format (Manual area only)HDD
SD Card
Partition number Partition
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *2I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *2I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3L-1 System storage data *3S-1 User data 1 *3S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *3S-5 Printer spooler *2S-6 Application work *3S-9 DSK data save *3
Partition number Partition
I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3L-101 ICU firmware *3S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3S-103 User data 2 *3S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)*3
Partition number Partition
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *3I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *3I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3L-1 System storage data *3S-1 User data 1 *3S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *2S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *3S-5 Printer spooler *3S-6 Application work *3S-9 DSK data save *3
Partition number Partition
I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3L-101 ICU firmware *3S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3S-103 User data 2 *3S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)*3
MX-M264U SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 1
MX-M264U[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE
1. GeneralThe following functions are available on the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
*1: This may be useful for troubleshooting when a trouble occurs. When submission of the log data file is requested in order to troubleshoot,use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the client PC.
2. Details and operation proceduresA. Procedures to enter the Hidden Web page
exclusively used for the serviceman1) Boot a browser program.2) Enter the specified
URL (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/service_login.html) and enter theservicing page menu.Default password: "service"
NOTE: The password can be optionally changed in the PasswordSetting menu.If the password is changed and forgotten, use SIM24-31 toreset the password to the default.
B. Password Setting
* The password can be optionally changed in the following proce-dures.
1) Enter a new password.2) Enter the new password again to make confirmation.3) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
Menu/Item Function and contentPassword Setting Used to set the password to enter the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.Output of Test Page Used to print out the test page (system setting contents).Font/Form Download Used to download Font/Form.
Font/Form of PCL and PostScript, macro, and other resources are downloaded to the HDD and controlled. (PS, PCL5 only)
Device Cloning Used to import/export the system setting information in XML format. By importing the export file to the other device, the setting values and setting contents of the device can be copied to another device. This function is useful to set the same setting to two or more machines efficiently.
Filing Data Backup Used to import/export the document filing data in the unit of folder.User Control Used to shift to the user mode. After log in, the screen is shifted to the setting screen of user management.User Control 2 Used to set the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group by authority of the serviceman.
(Select among preset items.)Job Log Save Job Log Used to save the Job Log.
View Job Log Used to display the Job Log.Update of Firmware Used to update the firmware version.Syslog*1 Administration Settings Used to set the Log Type. (Set to the default.)
Storage/Send Settings Keep all the items selected.Save/ Delete Syslog Used to save or delete the log data.View Syslog Used to display the log data.
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-M264U SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 2
C. Output of Test Page
1) Click "Print" button of an item or report to be printed.When there is a list of items for selection, select one of theitems in the pull-down menu list, and click "Print" button.The list is printed out.
D. Font/Form Download
(1) Download of Font, Form, and Macro1) Select "Resource Type" from the pull-down menu list.
(Example: PCL/PostScript Font/Form or Macro)2) Click "Refer" button to select a target file.3) Click "Download" button.4) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
The file is downloaded to the HDD.The list of the downloaded files and the use percentage of theHDD are displayed.
(2) Delete of downloaded font Procedures to delete a file separately1) Select a file to be deleted from the list of the downloaded files,
and click "Delete" button.2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press
Yes key.3) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
The file in the HDD is deleted.
(3) Procedures to delete all the files at a time1) Click "Initialize" button.2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press
OK key.3) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
NOTE: By the Write-Protect Setting function, the downloaded filescan be set to write protect.
E. Device Cloning
(1) Export1) Select an item to be backed up.2) Click "Execute" button.
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (File name: *****.bin)When the password is set, the set password must be enteredwhen importing.
(2) Import1) Import from a file: Click "Refer" button to select the back-up
file. (File name: *****.bin)2) Click "Execute" button to execute import.
If the password is set when exporting, the password must beentered.
3) Reboot the machine.
F. Filing Data Backup
(1) Export1) Select the folder to be backed up.
The list display conditions can be specified by changing theindex and the number of display items on the pull-down menu.
2) Click "Execute" button.Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (Filename: *****.bin)
3) Click "Update" button.
(2) Import1) Click "Refer" button to select a target file. (File name: *****.bin)2) Click "Execute" button.
The target file is imported.3) Click "Update" button.
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-M264U SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 3
G. User Control 1
1) Enter the password to log in.Default Password: adminThe screen is shifted to the setting menu of user management.
H. User Control 2
1) Select the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite OperationGroup. (The Pages Limit Group and the Favorite OperationGroup must be set in advance.)(Example of use)The use sets the conditions for servicing work by using thePages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group functionsin advance, and the serviceman selects the set conditions inthis mode for servicing work.
I. Job Log(1) Save Job Log
1) Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the JobLog to save it.
(2) View Job Log
1) Select a Jog Log item to be displayed. (In the default setting,all the items are selected. Remove check marks of the itemswhich are not to be displayed.)
2) Click "Show" (display) button.The Jog Log is displayed.
J. Update of Firmware
1) Click "Refer" button to select a firmware file.2) After selecting a firmware file, click "Execute" button.
The firmware data are sent to the machine, and update of thefirmware is processed.
During the process, the message of "Firmware Update, now pro-cessing..." is displayed.
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-M264U SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 4
K. SyslogThere are following functions in the Syslog mode.This function is provided to acquire the detailed Syslog to trouble-shoot when a trouble occurs.When submission of the log data file is requested for troubleshoot-ing, use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the cli-ent PC.
(1) Administration Settings/ Log Type SettingSet to the default.
(2) Storage/Send SettingsKeep all the items selected.
(3) Save/ Delete Syslog
When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the saveposition and save it.When deleting, click "Delete" button.Check to confirm that the confirmation message is displayed, andpress OK key.
(4) View Syslog
1) Select a Syslog item to be displayed.2) Click "Show" button.
The Syslog is displayed.
Syslog Administration Settings Log Type Setting (Set to the default.)Storage/Send Settings Set all the items selected.Save/ Delete Syslog Log data save, deleteView Syslog Log data display
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-M264U SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 5
L. FSS (Field Support System) Setting1) Set the following items.
• Use Proxy Server: Yes/No• Setting of Scheduled Polling: Allow/Inhibit• Interval of Scheduled Polling: 1 - 60 min• Setting of Manual Polling: Allow/Inhibit• Status Notification: On/Off
2) Click the Submit (Registration) button.
MX-XXXX
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 1
MX-M264U[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagramA. System block diagram
LCD
TOUCH
PANEL
LVDS
PWB
PWB
CCD
PNC
AUDITOR
ORS-PD
ORS_LED
OCSW
SCANNERUNIT
OPTION
OPERAT
IONUNIT
USBCNPWB
LEDDRIVERPWB
PWB
SCN
LEDPWB
RSPFPWB
SPPD3
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD4
SOCD
SCOV
SPED
SRRC
SPUM
SPRS
SPWS
SPLS
2
SPLS
1
STMPS
SPFM
RSPFUNIT
PWB
MFPC
OPTION
HDD
WH_S
CN
OPEPWB
OPTION
PWB
PCU
PSFM1
PSFM2
FUFM2
FUFM1
OPTION
FAX2
C1LUM
C1P
UC
C1P
US
DSW_C
2
C2P
ED
C2LUD
C2P
FD
PAPERFEED2UNIT
RRC
PSPS
C1P
ED
C1LUD
C1P
FD
PAPERFE
ED1UNIT
C2LUM
C2P
UC
C2P
US
C1S
SC2S
S
MANUALPA
PERUNIT
MTO
P1
MTO
P2
MPFS
PPD1
MPLD
1
MPWD
MPED
MPLD
2
TFD1
TH_R
A
TCS
ADUM
POSD
APPD1
DSW_R
MM
PWB
HV CO
INVE
NDER
OPTION
MHPS
MIM
LSUUNIT
PWB
LSU
PM
C4LUM
C4P
US
C4P
UC
C4S
S
PAPERFE
ED3UNIT
C3P
FD
C3LUD
C3P
ED
DSW_C
3
C3S
S
C3P
UC
C3P
US
WH_D
ESK
PAPERFE
ED4UNIT
C4P
FD
C4LUD
C4P
ED
DSW_C
4
CPFM
PTRC1
PTRC2
WH
OPTION
DESKUNIT
OPTION
FUSER
UNIT
TH_U
M
TH_U
S
HL_UM
HL_US
TFD3
POD3
POGS2
OPTION
RIGHTDERIVERYUNIT
WH
ACIN
200V
only
REAC
TOR
PWB
PCI
PCI
OPTION
DCPS
WHSW
FINISHER
INNER
FINSHER
OPTION
(Standardequipm
ent
forJapanmodel)
OPTION Pow
erSup
plyUN
OPTION
MSW
(Standardequipm
entfor
Japanmodel)
OPTION TFD2
POD2
DSW_P
OC
DERIVERY2UNIT
(Standardequipm
ent
forJapanmodel)
(Stand
ardeq
uipm
entfor
Japa
nmod
el)
FAX1
(Jap
anmod
elon
ly)
POD1
SHPOS
POGS1
OSM
POM
31cpm/35cpm
machine
only
C3LUMCRUM
HUD_R
A
TNM
DERIVERY1UNIT
POFM2
POFM1
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 2
B. PCU PWB
RightpaperexitUnit(Optional)
Shifter-Motor
SCANCntPWB
InnerFinisher
SHPOS;ShifterHPSensor
CPLDWriter
CN1
CN2
CN3
CN4
CN6
CN7
FUFM;FuserUNCoolingFanMotor(x2)
POD1;PoutSensor
CN28
PICWriter
Coin
CN27
Vender
POM;PaperOutputMotor
CN26
CN9
Debug/Log
CN25
CN8
POGS1;PoutGateSolenoid1
CN24
ADUM;AutoDuplexMotor
PSPS;PaperSeParateSolenoid
CN10
CN23
POFM;PaperOutCoolingFanMotor(x2)
Polygon-Motor
InterLockSW
CN22
FuserThermister
(x2Analog)
CN12
CN21
LD-PWB
POSD;POUTSwitchingPassDetector
LSU-UN
Mainbodypaperfeedload
MPED:MultiPapertrayEmptysensor
TrayFullSensor
PPD1:PaperPassDetectSensor
C1SS:CassetteDetector
C1LUM:LiftUpMotor
CN13
APPD1:ADUPaperPassSensor
DefogHeater(WH)
CN20
CN17
CN15
HVU
81NC
91NC
CN16
41NC
MAIN-Motor
MaincassetteUnit
C1PUC;Cassette1PickUpClutch
DVUnit
C1PED;PaperEmpty
RRC;ResistRollerClutch
TonerControlSensor
C1PFD;PaperFeedDetector
C1PUS;PickUpSolenoid
C2SS; CasetteDetectorToner-Motor
Temp/Humidity
CRUM
DSW_C2;DoorDetector
Sensor
C2PFD;PaperFeedDetector
C2PED;PaperEmpty
Multi-stepcassetteUnit(Optional)
C2LUD;LiftUpDetector
CPFM;CasettePaperFeedMotor
C2PUC;PickUpClutch
C2PUS;PickUpSolenoid
PSFM;PowerSupplyUNCoolingFanMotor
C2LUM;LiftUpMotor
(x2)
PTRC2:Verticaltransportrollercluch2
OP-UPcassette
OP-LOcassette
C3PFD;PaperFeedDetector
C4PFD;PaperFeedDetector
C3PED;PaperEmpty
C4PED;PaperEmpty
C3LUD;LiftUpDetector
C4LUD;LiftUpDetector
C3SS;CasetteDetector
C4SS;CasetteDetector
DWS_C3;DoorDetector
DSW_C4;DoorDetector
C3PUC;PickUpClutch
C4PUC;PickUpClutch
C3PUS;PickUpSolenoid
C4PUS;PickUpSolenoid
C3LUM;LiftUpMotor
C4LUM;LiftUpMotor
PTRC1:Verticaltransportrollercluch1
MFP-PWB
PowerSupply
2ndPaperOutsensor
PaperOUTCoversensor
PCU-PWB
RightPaperOUTTrayFullSensor
PoutGateSolenoid2
RightPaperOUTsensor
2ndPaperOUTTrayFullSensor
Reset
ResetIC
CPU
H8S/2373I2CBus
EEPROM
64kbits
POF
AddressBus(0..20)
16Mbits
DataBus(0..15)
FlashROM
Expanded
SRAM
CPLD
I/OASIC
PIC
MTOP1:MultifeedtrayPositionSensor1
MTOP2:MultifeedtrayPositionSensor2
MPLD1:MFTPaperLengthSensor1
MPLD2:MFTPaperLengthSensor2
MPWS:MFTPaperWidthSensor(Analog)
MPFS:MultifeedtrayPickUpSolenoid
ManufeedUnit
2ndcassetteUnit
CSinterfacePWB
C1LUD;LiftUpDetector
1Mbits
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 3
C. MFP control PWB
Reu
sASIC
DDR2/3
LocalB
us
LCDC
FPDLink
Trans
SCNIF
SATA
SPI/S
D
EtherMAC
10/100/1G
USB2.0
Device
USB2.0
Host
SATA
CN
SD
Socket
SDHC
4GB/8GB
DDR3OnB
ord
2GB
FLA
SHDIMM
(DSKopt.)
DIMM
SOCKETCPLD
Non-interru
ptionarea
(ONwhenLA
Nstandby)
I2C
(2/3ch)
EtherPHY
10/100/1G
LANJA
CK
RJ45
USBDev
Type-BCN
RTC
FPDLINK
Receiver
I2C
(1/3ch)
FAX(2nd)
CN
UART
(11ch)
UART
(1ch)
HDD2.5'
160G
B
DSUBCN
(RIC
&PCI)
EEPROM
256kb
I2C
(3/3ch)
MFPCPWB
PIC PCUMothe
rPWB
INT
(1/3ch)
INT
(1/4ch)
USBHost
Type-ACN
DDR3-800
GMIISDHC Class6
6MB/Sec
Interrup
tionarea
(OFFwhe
nLA
Nstan
dby)
I2C
360K
Hz
LocalB
us
I2C
360K
Hz
INT(Sleep)
USB2.0Device
480M
bps
SATAgen2
3.0G
bps
USBHost
TYPE-A
CN
(Front)
I2C95KHz
SerialC
N1
(Vender)
SerialC
N2
(Debug)
PCIe
Clock
Gen
GPIO
Slide
SW
UART(1ch)
UART(1ch)
UART(2ch)
CN Update
LVDS
LDI/F
POF
LVDS
USB2.0Host
480M
bps
UART(1ch)
UART
UART
USB2.0Host
480M
bps
LVDS
LVDS
RS232C
Level
Converter
SerialI/F
1Gbps
3.0G
bps
INT
(3/3ch)
INT
(2/3ch)
INT(W
aleU
p)
INT
(nFAX12_P
IC_INT)
nFAX12_P
IC_INT
UART(1ch)
UART(1ch)
SCNCN
PWM
FANCN
USBCN
ICCARD
Reader
(Option)
Key
Boa
rd(Option)
UART
(1ch)
FAX(1st)
CNU
ART
(2ch)
SCNCN
SRAM
512K
B
USBHUB
4port
LSUIF
H8S
H8S
SCN
PWB
CCDPWB
OPEPWB
PCUMotherCN
SATA
PWRCN
LDCNPOWERCN
INT5V
24,5,3.3V_
FAX
LDPWB
toSCU
Japa
n:Stand
ardeq
uipm
ent
Excep
tJap
an:
Option
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 4
D. Scanner control PWB
24V
CPUCLKSCNcnt
AFE_CS 16
16
AD_CLK clkRGB
AFE_CSTG 32bit bus LSU-mother
SH, 1, etc.
Serial 2 systems Image data
CS3RSPF UN
CTRL_A10V
CTRL_A5V
CTRL_A3.3V CS4
CPUCLK
CS0 or CS6
CS2 CS0
RSPF Poweruart, etc.
CS5
SEL_A/B/CSensors
I2C or analog
I2CMFPC
LED kind detectionPNL_SEL0PNL_SEL1
CCFT CPU PNL_SEL0/CCFT PNL_SEL1
nLCD_DISP(ON/OFF)
Image data
LCD Power
OP-KEY PWB/KEYIN
5VPWM
5VONINFO_LEDNPWRSWPOW_LEDWU_LEDNWU_KEY5VO
/BZR 24V
CPU12V
3.3V
5VCPU
SC_ACK
PCU_REQ
(Main unit side)CCD-F
3.3V
SCNASIC
line buf(8Mx16bit)
LVDS ICTx28bit
CPUH8S/2373
E2PROM
IO ASIC
SRAM F-ROM(DIMM)
KEY CON
BUFFER
TrTrTrTrTrTrTr
AFE
Timing generator
Oscillator
BUFFER
5V/3.3V
3.3V
10V
10V/5V/3V
line buf(8Mx16bit)
12 5V12 10V
5 3.3V
19.661MHz
MOTORDRIVER
Mirror.Motor
HC151
Touch panel
Rx28bit
1.5V3.3V
Buzzer
LED matrix
Document sizelight reception
LVDS PWB
IPD/IDOCC
ORS LED
CL F-ROM(ONboard)
5VP
24VPD
24VPD
CLKDRIVER
5VN
24V
PCU
5VN
SPED5VPW
5VN
Sensors other than SPED
5VO
LED drivecircuit
5VPD
Powersupply
24VPD
5VPWM
5VO
12V
Orditer(TBD)
5VPD
24V
5VPWM
151 other ICs
5VPWM or5VO
5VO(Spare)
5VN
24V
5VO5VN
WU_LED (Reset key LED)POW_LED (Main power LED)
INFO_LED (FAX reception LED)
WU_KEY (Reset key)
5VN
5VO5VO5VO
To LSU-mother
To LSU-mother
To LSU-mother
3.3V
12V
USB CN PWB
7.0 inch LCD
LEDbacklight
PWRSW (Soft SW)
10-key, etc.
1.8V
3line color CCD
5VN
DCDC3.3V
OCSW
MHPsensor
MOTORDRIVER
Rx FPD Link35bit
1.2V
3.3V
FET 24V
5VNFET
LEDDRIVER
3.3V 5VDCDC3.3V
CPLD
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 5
E. Operation unit
FH28
-60S
-0.5SH(05)
FX16S-41S
-0.5SH
CN4
CN1
FPC
60Pin
R[7:0]
FPDLinc
Differen
tialsigna
lTCLK
41Pin
41Pin
G[7:0]
VP38
6Differen
tialsigna
lTX_O
UT0
B[7:0]
IC1
Differen
tialsigna
lTX_O
UT1
Differen
tialsigna
lTX_O
UT2
CK
Differen
tialsigna
lTX_O
UT3
Hsync
Vsync
ENAB
3.3V
_LVDS
MOD3
RSTB
STBYB
/CCFT
SHLR
UPDN
RB10
DITH
DISP_out
nLCD_D
ISP
Vcom
RV1-V10
10VA
R12
40N00
1B-TR-FE
IC5
10VA
24V
10VA
R12
83K00
2C-TR
PST8427UR
3.3V
IC2
IC6
-7VGL
3.3V
RSTB
3.3V
TPC81
24PST84
27UR
QB3
IC4
15VGH
VGL_
EN
3.3V
RP13
1S33
1D-E2-F
PST8427UR
ICB1
ICB3
S3B
-PH-SM
MAX16
822
LVDS_E
N3.3V
Interface
conn
ector
CN2
ICB2
LED_A
24V
3.3V
_LVDS
PST84
27UR
LED_K
ICB5
RP13
1S33
1D-E2-F
CCFT
3.3V
_LVDS
ICB4
3.3V
+5V
5227
1-04
69CCFT
DISP_out
CN3
/YL(Y1)
/YL(Y1)
XH(X1)
XH(X1)
/XL(X2)
/XL(X2)
YH(Y2)
YH(Y2)
SM11
B-GHS-TB
CN1
CN
CN
Hom
eLE
D
Hom
ekey
IC10
-key
etc.
Buzzer
Pow
erSW
CN
Pow
erLE
D
Pow
er-saving
SW
Pow
er-saving
LED
CN
CN
SHIELD
1CN1
GND
D1+
D1-
VBUS1
CN
CN
nINFO_L
ED
CN3
USBconnectorPWB
Wire
harness
Touchpanel
KEYPWB
MFPCPWB
OPEUN
SCN_CNT_PWB
70LVDSHPWB
70LCDUN
FFC
Wire
harness
Wire
harness
Gam
ma
circuit
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 6
F. FAX section(1) MX-FX11
TEL/LIU
Con
nector
FAXIMAGE
MEMORY
(Not
mou
nt)
FLA
SHROM
16Mbit
LIUEXPWB
FAXMAIN
PWB
MJ1
(LINE)
MJ2
(TEL)
OFFfock
detection
Srelay
Si3019
Si305
6
SiliconDAA
Si305
6CHIP
SET CI
Detection
Polarity
inversion
Detection
(Notmount)
Spe
aker
FAXASIC
MB87
F49
30
MODEM
MMD5020
PIC
microcompu
ter
PIC16
F69
0
CPU
SH7706
MFPIF
Con
nector
With
secure
locking
device
BM30
B-
SHLD
S
JTAG
Con
nector
14pin
(Not
mou
nt)
Log
Con
nector
(Not
mou
nt)
Operationin1W
/7W
energy-savemode
Crystal
Resonator
24.576MHz
Crystal
Resonator
14.7456M
Hz
Speaker
Conne
ctor
S02
B-
PASK
STATUSLE
D_0
STATUSLE
D_1
(Not
mou
nt)
voltage
level
Voltage
Reg
ulator
NJU
7772F
18
Pow
erAmplifier
LM4819
Volum
eChange
BU40
66NJM
3414
voltage
level
Filter
+24
VDetection
+24V
+12V
CIF
iter
CIF
i ter
Filter
voltage
level
RHS-
+5V
2
ECON
MRON
EXHS-
SON2
SON1
AFE_C
LKAFE_R
ES-
ASPCLK
ABITCLK
ARXD
ATXD
BSPCLK
BBITCLK
BRXD
BTXD
SPK(analog)
RGDT-
(CIdetection)
HDMUTE-
SI3_R
ES-
TELID
CI2-
CI-
HS1-
HS2-
CION
150V
ON
MSGMUTE
CID-
+5V
2
+12
+24
+5V
A
+5V
A BZ
EN_S
PKON-
EN_B
ZON-
VOLA
VOLB
VOLC
VOLD
SPMUTE-
3.3V
1.8V
MDM3.3V
RESET-
3.3V
+5V
+5V
A
MDM3.3V
+3.3V
+24V
MON_24V
-
+24V
+5V
+3.3V
+5V
2
RES_FAX-
FAX_R
XD(D)+
FAX_R
XD(D)-
FAX_T
XD(D)+
FAX_T
XD(D)-
FAX_C
TS(D)-
FAX_R
TS(D)-
FAX_R
XD(CS)+
FAX_R
XD(CS)-
FAX_T
XD(CS)+
FAX_T
XD(CS)-
FAX_C
TS(CS)-
FAX_R
TS(CS)-
FLV
PP
Version
ID
CNCT_F
AX-
3.3V
1.9V
PICPGM_E
N
WUP_F
AX-
TELID2
16bit
16bit
16bit
16bit
16bit
16bit
JTAG
UART
UART
Dow
nloa
d
Spred
Spectrum
CY25811S
XCT
PROGRAM
FLA
SHROM
16Mb
VHIM29
LV16
B-1Q
WORK
MEMORY
SDRAM
64Mbit
A3
64S40ETP-
G6
RESETIC
BD45
285G
Voltage
Reg
ulator
R11
73S001B
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 7
G. FAX (Option)
TEL/LIU
Con
nector
FAXIMAGE
MEMORY
(Not
mou
nt)
FLA
SHROM
16Mbit
LIUEXPWB
FAXMAIN
PWB
MJ1
(LINE)
MJ2
(TEL)
OFFfock
detection
Srelay
Si301
9Si305
6
SiliconDAA
Si305
6CHIP
SET CI
Detection
Polarity
inversion
Detection
(Notmount)
Spe
aker
FAXASIC
MB87
F49
30
MODEM
MMD50
20
PIC
microcompu
ter
PIC16
F69
0
CPU
SH7706
MFPIF
Connector
With
secure
locking
device
BM30B-
SHLD
S
JTAG
Con
nector
14pin
(Not
mou
nt)
Log
Con
nector
(Not
mou
nt)
Operationin1W
/7W
energy-savemode
Crystal
Reson
ator
24.576
MHz
Crystal
Reson
ator
14.745
6MHz
Speaker
Conne
ctor
S02
B-
PASK
STATUSLE
D_0
STATUSLE
D_1
(Not
mou
nt)
voltage
level
Voltage
Reg
ulator
NJU
7772
F18
Pow
erAmplifier
LM48
19
Volum
eCha
nge
BU40
66NJM
3414
voltage
level
Filter
+24
VDetection
+24
V
+12
VCIF
iter
CIF
i ter
Filter
voltage
level
RHS-
+5V
2
ECON
MRON
EXHS-
SON2
SON1
AFE_C
LKAFE_R
ES-
ASPCLK
ABITCLK
ARXD
ATXD
BSPCLK
BBITCLK
BRXD
BTXD
SPK(analog)
RGDT-
(CId
etection)
HDMUTE-
SI3_R
ES-
TELID
CI2-
CI-
HS1-
HS2-
CION
150V
ON
MSGMUTE
CID-
+5V
2
+12
+24
+5V
A
+5V
A BZ
EN_S
PKON-
EN_B
ZON-
VOLA
VOLB
VOLC
VOLD
SPMUTE-
3.3V
1.8V
MDM3.3V
RESET-
3.3V
+5V
+5V
A
MDM3.3V
+3.3V
+24V
MON_24V
-
+24V
+5V
+3.3V
+5V
2
RES_FAX-
FAX_R
XD(D)+
FAX_R
XD(D)-
FAX_T
XD(D)+
FAX_T
XD(D)-
FAX_C
TS(D)-
FAX_R
TS(D)-
FAX_R
XD(CS)+
FAX_R
XD(CS)-
FAX_T
XD(CS)+
FAX_T
XD(CS)-
FAX_C
TS(CS)-
FAX_R
TS(CS)-
FLV
PP
Version
ID
CNCT_F
AX-
3.3V
1.9V
PICPGM_E
N
WUP_F
AX-
TELID2
16bit
16bit
16bit
16bit
16bit
16bit
JTAG
UART
UART
Dow
nloa
d
Spred
Spectrum
CY25811S
XCT
PROGRAM
FLA
SHROM
16Mb
VHIM
29LV
16B-1Q
WORK
MEMORY
SDRAM
64Mbit
A3
64S40
ETP-
G6
RESETIC
BD45
285G
Voltage
Reg
ulator
R11
73S00
1B
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 8
2. Power line diagramA. AC power line diagram(1) AC power line diagram (120V)
HL_
PR
HLO
UT_1
GND
HLO
UT_2
24V
WH_C
NT
MAIN
POWERSW
Voltage
Conversion
5VO
5VL
Voltage
Conversion
24V
12V
5VN
3.3V
MAIN
GND
6
2
FUSINGUNIT
HL1
T1
T2 HL2
6
2
G
14
T1
GND
G
41
T2
FW
Generating
Circuit
T3.15
A/250
V
SUB
DCPOWERSUPPLY
ni-ev iLtuo-ev iL
Neu
tral-in Live-W
HNeu
tral-W
H
650W
ACIN
Live
tuo -la rtueN
lartueN
THERMOSTAT1
THERMOSTAT2
NO
WARMHEAT
ERSET(OPTION)
T2.0A
H/250
VF4
F3
T2.0A
H/250
V
NC
SCN
HEAT
ER
SCNUNIT
WHPWB
WH-SW1
WH-SW1
F00
3F00
3
F1
T20
A25
0V
F1
T20
A25
0V
F030
T8A
H25
0V
F030
T8A
H25
0V
~
~
+ -
~
~
+ -
F40
1
F3.15
A/250
V
F40
1
Z00
1Z00
1
RY1
RY1
560W
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 9
(2) AC power line diagram (230V)
HLO
UT_1
HL_PR
HLO
UT_2
GND
WH_C
NT
24V
Rea
ctor
ACIN
MAIN
POWERSW
Voltage
Conversion
5VO
5VL
Voltage
Conversion
24V
12V
5VN
3.3V
HL1
FUSINGUNIT
2
6
GND
MAIN
HL2
T2
T1
G
2
64
G
GND
T1
41
T2
1
SUB
T3.15AH/250V
FW
Gen
erating
Circuit
Live-out
DCPOWERSUPPLY
560W
650W
Neutral-W
HLive-W
H
Neutral-in
Live-in
Live
Neutral
Neutral-PCI
Live-PCI
Neutral-out
NO
WARMHEAT
ERSET(OPTION)
NC
T2.0A
H/250V
F3
F4
T2.0A
H/250V
SCN
HEAT
ER
SCNUNIT
WHPWB
N/F
PCIS
ET(OPTION)
PCID
CPOWERSUPPLY
Voltage
Conversion
24V(PCI)
THERMOSTAT1
THERMOSTAT2
RY1
RY1
~
~
+ -
~
~
+ -
Z001
Z001
T3.15A/250V
F1
T3.15A/250V
F1
F401
F2A
H/250V
F401
F2A
H/250V
F1
T10A250V
F1
T10A250V
WH-SW1
WH-SW1
RV1
RV1
F2
T10A250V
F2
T10A250V
~
~
+ -
~
~
+ -
F030
T5A
H250V
F030
T5A
H250V
F00
3F00
3
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 10
B. DC power line diagram
6.3A
6.3A
HL(AC)RY
PCUPWB
LDPWB
LD
FINISHER
OPTION
HV
INT24Vmotors
24V1fan,clutch,solenoid,
other
5VHD
3.3V
FET
(PCUH8S
control)
CTRL_24VPD
24VPD
12V
DCDC
A5V
24V2
3.3V
DCDC
IPD1.2V
DCDC
CTRL_A3.3V
CTRL_A5V
DCDC
1.5V
5VN
24V1
24V1
24V2
12V
3.3V
5VO
POF_
SCN(PCUPICcontrol)
FET
/BZR
5VNseriessensor
5VNPDseriessensor
5VO
5VL
5VO
5VL
24V1
3.3V
INT5V
(5V_LD)
3.3V
12V
5VL
5VO
24V2
24V1
INT24V
5VN
5VNPD
I/OASIC
CPLD
COIN
VENDOR,
DESK
PIC
1.9V
G-Array
1.8V
FAX_W
UP(PIC
control)
POF(toPCUPIC)
OFF_C
NT
(PCUPIC
control)
RY_C
NT
(PCUPIC
control)
ARM11
UART
POF_
MFP
C(PCUPICcontrol)
REQ
_PIC
(PCUPICcontrol)
REQ
_PIC_INT(PCUPICcontrol)
5VPD
5VN
5VO
A3.3V
A10V
A5V
24VPDmotors
24VPDclutch,
solenoid,other
5VPDseriessensor
DFopen/close
Docum
entsetsensor
PCUPIC
control
5VO_D
uty
5VPD
24VPD
PCUPIC
control
A10V
A3.3V
WU_LED(Reset
keyLE
D)
POW_L
ED(M
ainpo
wer
LED)
5VO
INFO
_LED
(FAX
receptionLE
D)
5VN
WU_K
EY(Resetkey)
PWRSW
(SoftS
W)
LDO
BZR
3.3V
_LCD
INT24V
NETWORK/U
SB
DCDC 1.8V
FET
PGM(BLM)
Polygonmotor
MIM(STM)
Scannermotor
3-term
inal
Reg
Usedinthe2-speedcontrolFAN.
FW
(fromDCPWB)
LSUFM
LSUfan
3.3V
5VO
24V1
24V1
INT5V
INT24V
5VO_D
uty
5VO_D
uty
5VPDseriessensor
INTERLO
CKSW
(FSSW)
24V1
DSW
INT24V
USB_H
UB
USB
(CARDReader/FrontUSB
/KEYBOARD)
DCPWB
5VO
5VO
5VN
FET
INT5V
SCNcntPWB
5VN
5VN
H8S
24V1
OPTION
MFPCPWB
FAXUN
SH7706
DCDC
H8S
12V
CCDPWB
PIC
CTRL_A10V
DCDC
FET
ARM9
3.3V
_ON
1.8V
_ON
1.27V_O
N
5VL
DCDC
3.3V
_ECO
1.5V
_ECO
1.27V_E
C
DCDC
DCDC
DCDC
0.75V_E
CO
HDD(2.5")
CTRL_5V
PD
RSPFDRIVERPWB
3.3V
seriessensor
3.3V
5VO_D
uty
7.0INCHPANELUN
7.0OPPWB(KEYPWB)
24V2
PCUPIC
control
7.0LVDSPWB
PCUPIC
control
PCUPIC
control
PCUPIC
control
PCUPIC
control
12V
3.3V
ANYKEY
24V
Backlight
LEDDRIVER
LCD(7.0)
Touch
panel
LDO
3.3V
5VN
DCCNT1
DCCNT2
DCDC
DCDC
DCDC
DCDC
KEYCON
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 11
3. Actual wiring chartA. LSU section
6 4N
C0 1
NC
MFPFM_LD
821
nFAN_C
NCT
MFPFM_P
WM
7 22
PWM
BD_H
SYNC
6 23
BD_H
SYNC
D-GND
524
D-GND
nREQ_P
IC_INT
425
NREQ_P
IC_INT
MPU_INTRO_N
326
MPU_INTRO_N
nRES_P
IC22
7NRST_P
ICMPU_P
RINTST_N
128
MPU_P
RINTST_N
nPOF_M
FPC
029
NPOF_M
FPC
LAN_C
NT
9101
WOLA
N_O
NPICVPPON
8111
PICVPPON
nWU_FAX
7121
NWU_FAX12_LAN
RXD_P
IC61
31RXD_P
ICPHDR-12V
S-2
MPU_S
IF_R
xD51
41MPU_S
IF_R
XCN52
TXD_P
IC41
51TXD_P
ICD-GND
1MPU_S
IF_T
xD31
61MPU_S
IF_T
XBD_H
SYNC_N
2nC
LR_P
IC21
7 1NCLR
_PIC
LDD_LDEN1_N
3MPU_S
IF_C
LK11
81MPU_S
IF_C
LKLD
D_S
H1_N
4nR
EQ_P
IC01
91NREQ_P
ICD-GND
5MPU_S
IF_R
ST
902
MPU_S
IF_R
ST
LDD_LDERR_N
9PWM(PGC)
812
PICPGC_R
SVPWM
LVDS_LD1P
6RD
RD
nCTS_P
CU
722
nCTS_P
CU
LVDS_LD1M
8WH
WH
RxD
_PCU
632
RXD_P
CU
D-GND
7SH
SH
RTS_P
CU
542
nRTS_P
CU
D-GND
10TxD
_PCU
452
TXD_P
CU
D-GND
D-GND
11RES_P
CU
362
nRES_P
CU
12D-GND
272
D-GND
B12
B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
182
D-GND
TB-
ZM
F82T
B-Z
MF82
CN12
LD_D
A4
D-GND
2INT5V
1
2-29
2173
-5(AMP)
6POLYCLK
PM_LD/
5/LOCK
PM_D
8GND
3GND
24V
724
V17
9228
-5
PHNR-03-H/BU03
P-TR-P-H/03K
R-6H-PC
2922
50-3
TFD1
39
TFD1
3TFD1
GND
20 1
D-GND
2D-GND
5VN
121
5VN
15V
NLS
UFM_V
11(NC)
03XR-6H-P
GP1S
73P
LSUFM_LD
14(NC)
GND
13(NC)
B14
B-PHDSS-B
PHDR-14V
S-2
Polygon
motor
5
Paperexittray
unit
3 4
MFPCPWB
PCUPWB
1 2
Paperexittray
paperempty
detector
21 3
/STA
RT
PM_C
LK
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
PHDR-12V
S-2
JP1 2
GND
1nB
D3
nENB
8nS
/H9
GND
4nLDERR
7DT_P
5DT_N
6GND
VREF
11GND
12VCC
S12
B-PHDSS-B
LDPWB
10
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 12
B. Operation section
CN2
FPC
CN4
CN1
PHDR-30V
S-1
PHDR-16V
S-2
CN45
CN5
SCANDATA0-
1SCANDATA0+
3DGND
2SCANDATA1-
7SCANDATA1+
9DGND
8SCANDATA2-
13SCANDATA2+
15DGND
14SCANCLK
OUT-
19SCANCLK
OUT+
21DGND
20SCANDATA3-
25SCANDATA3+
27DGND
26(NC)
B16B-PHDSS-B
CN11
DGND
29SH
SH
LCD_D
ATA3+
30PK
LCD_D
ATA3-
28WH
WH
DGND
23SH
SH
LCD_C
LK+
24PK
LCD_C
LK-
22WH
WH
DGND
17SH
SH
FX16S-41S
-0.5SV
FX16S-41S
-0.5SH
CN3
FPC
LCD_D
ATA2+
18PK
FX16M1-41P-HC
FX16M1-41P-HC
LCD_D
ATA2-
16WH
WH
DGND
11SH
SH
LCD_D
ATA1+
12PK
LCD_D
ATA1-
10WH
WH
52271-0469
DGND
5SH
SH
LCD_D
ATA0+
6PK
LCD_D
ATA0-
4WH
WH
CN4
B30B-PHDSS-B
S3B
-PH-SM4-TB
(NC)
(NC)
CN35
nLCD_D
ISP
8nR
ES_S
CN
7
PHR-6
TXD_S
CN
5RXD_S
CN
3nR
TS_S
CN
6nC
TS_S
CN
4DGND
9DGND
10DGND
1DGND
2
B6P
-PH-K-S
B10B-PHDSS-B
PHDR-10V
S-2
B34B-PHDSS-B
CN13
CN1
PHDR-34V
S-1
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
B26B-PHDSS-B
PHDR-26V
S-1
ZER-16V
-S
nPOF_S
CN
1 2nS
PED
3D-GND
4SMP-06V
-NC/SMR-06V
-N
PAP-03V
-SCN1
5 6D-GND
7D-GND
nPOW_L
ED
8nP
OW_L
ED
B03B-PASK-1
F-GND
nWU_L
ED
9nW
U_L
ED
10
SRA-21T
-4SRA-21T
-4
+5V
O11 12
(NC)
B12B-PHDSS-B
PHDR-12V
S-2
BACKLIGHT
BHSMR-02V
S/B
HSR-02V
S-1
2VLE
D-
21
VLE
D+
1
2 2 33 2 1 1
LCD_A
3_P
28 2339 38 35 34 33 32ENAB
4
40
PCUPWB
MFPCPWB
SCNCNTPWB
37GND
36 35LC
D_A
3_M
5
LCD_C
LK_M
GND
LCD_A
2_P
6 7 8
nRTS_S
CN
GND
SCANDATA1-
GND
XH_X
1_CS
GND
GND
nRES_S
CN
/YL_
Y1_
INT
LCD_A
0_P
1
27 26 2514 1315
11
34GND
GND
nCTS_S
CN
27SP_C
LOSE_H
24RXD_S
CN
19KEYIN_N
H31 21 262523152
LCD_A
1_M
GND
35
LCD_A
0_M
LCDSEL0
_43H
17LC
DSEL1
_10H
16
LCD_A
2_P
613LC
D_A
3_P
GND
11 4GND
GND
7 10 8LC
D_A
2_M
SCANDATA2+
GND
3.3V
79SCANDATA2-
2
SCANCLK
OUT+
SCANDATA3+
SCANCLK
OUT-
3 6GND
SCANDATA0+
7.0inchOPERATIONUN
LCD7.0Unit
LVDSPWB
339
LCD_A
2_M
GND
16SCANDATA0-
nLCD
DISP
LCDSEL1
_10H
LCDSEL0
_43H
GND
LCD_A
3_P
LCD_A
3_M
GND
LCD_C
LK_P
2LCDmodule
141
GND
40nL
CD
DISP
3837 36
33LC
D_C
LK_P
31
NC
1329
LCD_A
2_M
34GND
1230
LCD_A
2_P
9 1131
GND
2910
32LC
D_C
LK_M
30
14
2628GND
LCD_A
1_P
2724
4
SCANDATA3-
GND
15GND
15
2511
SCANDATA1+
12
LCD_A
1_P
17LC
D_A
1_M
2218
/XL_
X2_
SDA
LCD_A
1_M
GND
/CCFT
GND
22 21
LCD_A
0_M
YH_Y
2_SCL
16
8 9
GND
10GND
GND
5V 5V
LCD_A
0_P
1923
LCD_A
0_M
2422 21 20 19
/CCFT
2120B0
G7
24V
GND
24V
36
24V
24V
33 35
5V29 32 34
GND
30 315V
2
2319
14
2825
24V
24V
9 8 6
27 37 4039
12 2 1
56
4138
18
GND
724
V24
V520
/XL_
X2_
SDA
XH_X
1_CS
17 16 15
YH_Y
2_SCL
/F3G
1
17
12LC
D_C
LK_M
2418
/YL_
Y1_
INT
8516 11
SEG2D
0
5V2
13
GND
/F2G
0
3/F1D
2
/BZR
4
GND
KEYPWB
3.3V
_EXT
14
SEG0L
EDBPR
5
GND
GND
GND
3
3
GND
1213 7 6
1013
GND
5V
14LC
D_A
3_M
2616
GND
9 8
145V5V
15G0
5V11
10
9
4
ORS-PDPWB
4 1
34
10 201612 1711 1514132
PDSEL1
VCONT(GND)
SC_T
EMP(GND)
GND
PD
45VGND
1 4 85 76 2218
SEG2
3.3V
A2119
/F1
32/SC_A
CK
/PCU_R
EQ
5VGND
/BZR
GND
5VO
5VO
PDSEL2
PDSEL1
5V
nHM_L
ED
PD
1
SPED-H
28 30
SEG1
/F3
GND
3PDSEL2
PDSEL0
USB
CONNECTOR
PWB
F-GND
nINFO_L
ED
GND
11
15V
O
SEG0(&12
V)
/KEYIN
nLCD_D
ISP
(NC)
29
GND
/F0(&nH
M_LED)
/F2
TXD_S
CN
33GND
205V
PWM
225V
0
18GND
nPOF_S
CN
7
2
POW_L
ED
12nP
WRSW
6nW
U_K
EY
2/KEYIN
91
26245V
2515
nINFO_F
AX_LED
6
23
3
5434
2
5 63
WU_L
ED
210
VLE
D-
VLE
D+
YH(Y2)
/XL(X2)
/YL(Y1)
XH(X1)
GND
GND
NC
3.3V
_LCD
3.3V
_LCD
3.3V
_LCD
3.3V
_LCD
HSYNC
VSYNC
GND
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
G6
G5
G4
G3
G2
G1
R7
R6
R5
R4
R3
L/R
GND
R2
R1
R0
U/D
PDSEL0
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
LCD_C
LK_P
LCD_A
1_P
LCD_A
0_P
nHM_K
EY
nWU_K
EY
nPWR_S
W
(NC)
BM16B-ZESS-TBT
SEG1L
EDCPR
TOUCHPANEL
nPOW_L
ED_P
LS
+5V
O_D
UTY
nPWR_S
WnW
U_K
EY
nINFO_F
AX_
CN6
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
PK
PK
PK
PK
PK
CK
FH12A-40S
-0.5SH(55)
LCDSEL1
_10H
LCDSEL0
_43H
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 13
C. Scanner section
12GND
GND
141
GND
11GND
AFE_R
DO
240
AFE_R
DO
1024
VAFE_W
RD
339
AFE_W
RD
95V
O4
388
24V
AFE_C
S5
37AFE_C
S7
5VB
636
/RES_C
CDAD
(NC)
612
VGND
735
GND
55V
A3.3V
834
A3.3V
43.3V
A3.3V
933
A3.3V
33.3V
A3.3V
1032
A3.3V
2GND
A3.3V
1131
A3.3V
1GND
A3.3V
1230
A3.3V
B12B-PHDSS
A3.3V
1329
A3.3V
PHDR-12V
S-2
GND
1428
GND
A5V
1527
A5V
A5V
1626
A5V
GND
1A5V
1725
A5V
GND
2GND
1824
GND
SPPD1
3A10V
1923
A10V
SPPD2
4A10V
2022
A10V
24VPD
5PHDR-28V
S-1
GND
2121
GND
24VPD
6RA-
2220
RA-
5V7
1SPPD1
RA+
2319
RA+
3.3V
82
SPPD2
GND
2418
GND
93
RB-
2517
RB-
SPFMA/
104
RB+
2616
RB+
SPFMB
115
SPFMB
GND
2715
GND
126
RC-
2814
RC-
SPFMO1
137
SPFMO1
RC+
2913
RC+
148
GND
3012
GND
159
CLK
-31
11CLK
-SPUMB
1610
SPUMB
CLK
+32
10CLK
+17
11GND
339
GND
SPUMO1
1812
SPUMO1
RD-
348
RD-
SPRS
1913
SPRS
RD+
357
RD+
STMPS
2014
STMPS
GND
366
GND
SRRC
2115
SRRC
RE-
375
RE-
SPFC
2216
SRRS
RE+
384
RE+
SPWS
2317
SPWS
GND
393
GND
2418
AFE_C
STG
402
AFE_C
STG
SELB
2519
GND
411
GND
SELC
2620
SELC
_FX16S-41S
-0.5SV
FX16M1-41P-HC
FX16M1-41P-HC
FX16S-41S
-0.5SV
SSELO
2721
SSELO
–28
22SPPD4
–29
23SPFMO2
SPPD3
3024
SPPD3
SPPD4
3125
5VPD
3226
5VPD
GND
3327
SPED
GND
3428
SOCD
B34B-PHDSS
B28B-PHDSS
PHDR-34V
S-1
EHR-3
S3B
-EH
MHPS
13
GND
GND
22
AFE_C
STG
5VPD
31
GND
5VB
1
B3B
-PH-K-S
VHPLG
217L5A
-1
5VO
2SOCD/
3 4
B4B
-PH-K-S
F-GND
F-GND
SRA-21T
-3SAA-21T
-3.5L
11
MIM_B
22
MIM_B
33
MIM_/B
44
MIM_/B
B4B
-PH-K-S
B4B
-PH-SM4-TB
RMOTS0920FCPZ
PHR-4
PHR-4
(NC)
1nA
_PNC
CN1
(NC)
2nA
_COPY
IDRV1
11
IDRV1
(NC)
3nA
_CA
IDRV2
22
IDRV2
(NC)
4nA
_READY
IDRV3
33
IDRV3
(NC)
5nA
_AUD
IDRV4
44
IDRV4
(NC)
65V
IDRV5
55
IDRV5
(NC)
7GND
CN-1
IDRV6
66
IDRV6
(NC)
824
V24
VPD
11
24VPD
24V
77
24V
(NC)
9/col
24VPD
22
24VPD
S7B
-PH-K-S
PHR-7
PHR-7
S7B
-PH-SM4-TB
(NC)
10nA
_TC
LAMP
33
LAMP
(NC)
1124
VGND
44
GND
12nP
NC-a
GND
55
GND
13GND
5597-05C
PB7F
5597-05A
PB
B13B-PH-K-S
PHR-13
179228-3
175489-3
5VC1
11
5VGND
22
/OCSW
(NC)
13.3V
/OCSW
33
GND
2GND
24V
4VHPLG
248N
L1-1
3CPU_R
XD
/SIZE_L
ED1
54
CPU_T
XD
/SIZE_L
ED2
65
RXD_M
FP_D
BB6B
-PH-K-S
24V
6TXD_M
FP_D
B/SIZE_L
ED1
BM06B-GHS-TBT
/SIZE_L
ED2
GND
SRA-21T
-4
F-GND
LEDPWB
LEDDRVPWB
AUDITOR
(OPTION)
OCSW
DRIVERPWB
RSPF
CCDPWB
ORSLEDPWB
SCNCNTPWB
MIM42HB
MHPS
MIM_A
MIM_/A
CN-7
CN-10
MIM_A
MIM_/A
AFE_S
CLK
AFE_S
CLK
/RES_C
CDAD
CN-3
SPFMA
SPFMA/
SPFMB/
SPUMA
SPUMA/
SPUMB/
SELA
_SELB
_
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
CN-2
CN-17
CN-8
CN-2
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
OR
(NC)
CN-15
CN-A
SPFMA
SPFMB/
SPUMA
SPUMA/
SPUMB/
SELA
SPED/
CN-I
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
CN-2
CN-16
CN-14
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 14
D. Manual feed, DV, Paper exit (1st, 2nd), Tray 1 section
292250-2
15CZ-6Y
(NC)
75V
N24
V15
24V
179228-2
(NC)
9PRTPD
/MPFS
14/MPFS
292250-2
(NC)
11D-GND
/MTOP1
13/MTOP1
D-GND
12D-GND
S3B
-PH-K-S
PHR-3
/MTOP2
11/MTOP2
179228-2
D-GND
1D-GND
D-GND
10D-GND
292250-3
SHPOS
5SHPOS
/MPLD
19
/MPLD
15V
NPD
35V
NPD
D-GND
8D-GND
GP1A
71L3
5VNPD
75V
NPD
/MPLD
26
/MPLD
2179228-3
D-GND
5D-GND
292250-3
5VNPD
45V
NPD
5VNPD
45V
NPD
BROWN
POD1
6POD1
3.3V
33.3V
GRAY
D-GND
2D-GND
MPWD
2MPWD
D-GND
1D-GND
179228-3
B15B-CZHK-B-1
S3B
-PH-K-S
SMR-03V
-N/S
MP-03V
-NC
FUFM_V
10FUFM_V
D-GND
13D-GND
PHR-3
FUFM_LD1
14FUFM_LD1
03KR-6H-P/BU03P-TR-P-H/03K
R-6H-P
S3B
-PH-K-S
D-GND
20SMR-03V
-N/S
MP-03V
-NC
/APPD1
19FUFM_V
12FUFM_V
5VNPD
18D-GND
15D-GND
03KR-6H-P
FUFM_LD2
16FUFM_LD2
(NC)
8D-GND
04KR-6H-P/BU04P-TR-P-H/PHNR-04-H
292250-3
PHDR-16V
S-2
B16B-PHDSS
/PPD1
17/PPD1
D-GND
D-GND
165V
NPD
5VNPD
15179228-3
VHPSG2481++-1
292250-3
/MPED
14D-GND
131
24V
5VN
122
/POGS1a
/C1S
S11
03XR-6H-P
VHPSG2481++-1
3/POGS1b
D-GND
10B3B
-PH-K-M
PHR-3-M
292250-2
02XR-6H-P
1INT24V
/C1LUM
9/C1LUM
2INT24V
3D-GND
8D-GND
4OSMB
520CZ-6H
F-GND
F-GND
6OSMXB
SRA-21T
-4SRA-21T
-4B6B
-PH-K-S
PHR-6
SMP-02V
-NC/SMR-02V
-N24V
124V
24V
/C1P
US
3/C1P
US
C1P
US
1INT24V
D-GND
5D-GND
2ADUMA
C1P
FD
7C1P
FD
3ADUMB
5VN
95V
NB6B
-PH-K-S
4ADUMXA
C1P
ED
11C1P
ED
D-GND
5ADUMXB
13C1LUD
C1P
FD
B5B
-PH-K-R
C1LUD
155V
NTray1transportdetector
PHR-5-R
DGND
17(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
C1P
ED
Tray1paperem
ptydetector
C1LUD
PHR-6
1INT24V
2 3POMB
4 5/POMB
B5B
-PAEK-1
PAP-05V
-E
ToHVPWB
SRA-01T
-3.2
(Japanmodelonly:Standardequipment)
52025-0811
/51010-0811
292250-3
179228-3
D-GND
2
POD2
2POD2
4
D-GND
1D-GND
DVSEL
18D-GND
5VNPD
35V
NPD
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
TCS
GP1S
Q73P
7D-GND
TCS
624V
45V
N
24V
8(NC)
N.C
DF3A
-3P-2DS
5TFD2
PHR-4
S4B
-PH-K-S
D-GND
10DSW_P
OC
5VN
8D-GND
TFD2
6POUT2B
_DET
TSHP-04V
-K
GP1S
Q44S
DF3-3S
-2C
9D-GND
D-GND
10D-GND
B10B-PASK-1
5VN
125V
N
292250-2
CRM_C
LK14
CRM_C
LCRM_D
T16
CRM_D
TPHDR-18V
S-2
179228-2
PAP-10V
-S
CN19
/C1P
UC
1124V
13SMP-03V
-NC/S
MR-03V
-N24V
14
/RRC
12B14B-PHDSS
PHDR-14V
S-2
2ndpaperexitunit
DVBS
8
1stpaperexitunit
1 1
35V
N
ADUmotor 1 21 2 3
2
Tray1cassetteunit
1 2 3
/C1S
SD-GND
Tray1liftmotor
Tray1paperemptydetector
Fusingfan2
Shiftermotor
PCUPWB
1 3 5 7 2 3 1
34
12
78
56 9
42 86 910
1011
1112
/APPD1
2
1313
141412
1D-GND
3
1515
1 21 2
24V
/MPFS
1 2 21
/MTOP1
D-GND
/MTOP2
D-GND
1 2 3
/MPLD
2D-GND
5VNPD
1 2 3
3.3V
MPWD
D-GND
1 2 3
D-GND
/APPD1
5VNPD
5VNPD
1
124V
1
1/C1P
UC
121 2
23
/RRC
3
/PPD1
42
(NC)
3
24V
23/C1S
S2
5D-GND
14
D-GND
2D-GND
4/MPED
52
/MPED
D-GND
35V
N
2 31 4
Registration
rollerclutch
1 2 3
Tray1paperfeedclutch
5 61Tray1pickupsolenoid
CassettesensorPWB
21 2
2 1
2 31
24
5VNPD
13
1 1
22
1
5 3
3
23 31
32
7 6
12
15
4 3
TCS
8 7D-GND
CRUM
34DVSEL
22
21
321
Fusingfan1
3
3
1
Tonerdensity
sensor
DVUNIT
4 3 2
6
24V
14
1/MPLD
12
D-GND
35V
NPD
1 2
Manualfeedtrayunit
75 63 4
PINK
CN28
DGND
DSW_P
OC
CN3
CN26
CN24
/POMA
POMA
OSMXA
OSMA
CN2
CN25
CN20
CN21
B20B-CZHK-B-1
CN18
DVSET
B18B-PHDSS
TSHR-04V
-K
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
DVSET
SRA-01T
-3.2
Paperexitcover
open/closedetectionSW
2ndpaperexitfull
detector
2ndpaperexit
detector
Paperexit
reversemotor
Paperexitgate
solenoid
1stpaperexit
detector
Shifterhome
position
1 2 75 63 4
SMP-02V
-BC/S
MR-02V
-B
SMP-07V
-NC/S
MR-07V
-N
05KR-6H-PC/BU05P-TR-P-H/05K
R-6H-PC
(NC)
(NC)
15KR-6H-PC/BU15P-TR-P-H/PHNR-15-H
SMP-02V
-NC/SMR-02V
-NManualpaperfeed
solenoid
Manualfeedpaper
lengthdetector2
Manualfeedpaper
lengthdetector1
Manualfeedpaper
lengthdetector
ADUtransportpath
detector2
Manualpaperfeed
paperentrydetector
Manualpaperfeed
paperemptydetector
Manualfeedtrayreductiondetector/
Manualfeedtrayextensiondetector2
Manualfeedtrayreductiondetector/
Manualfeedtrayextensiondetector1
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
03KR-6H-PB3B
-PH-K-S
Tray1upperlim
itdetector
CZHR-03V
-S/BU-03P
-TZ-S/CZHR-03V
-S
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 15
E. Right paper exit, ILSW, Fan, Finisher, CV section
CN1
1792
28-3
5VNPD
3POD3
2SMR-03V
-N/SMP-03V
-NC
D-GND
11
16
GP1S
Q73
P3
PSFM_LD1
35
PSFM_LD1
2P-GND
24
P-GND
1792
28-3
5VN
4TFD3
5SMR-03V
-N/SMP-03V
-NC
D-GND
61
13
GP1S
Q73
P3
PSFM_LD2
32
PSFM_LD2
2P-GND
21
P-GND
XARR-03V
F/XAP-03V
-1B6B
-PH-K-S
24V
71
24V
1/POGS2a
82
/POGS2a
2/POGS2b
93
/POGS2b
3
POUT2A
_DET
101
OZFM_V
D-GND
112
/OZFM_LD
B11
B-PASK-1
3D-GND
B3B
-PH-K-S
(NC)
(NC)
3 6INT24V
21
INT24
VD-GND
42
P-GND
/MM_D
65
/MM_D
MM_LD
87
MM_L
DSMR-02V
-N10
41
PHR-7
B7B
-PH-K-S
2Dsub1
5pin
JAC-15P
-3/JAC-15S
-3D-GND
11
PGND
15V
N3
15V
N2
+24V
2HUD_R
A5
2HUD_R
A3
/FIN_C
RDY
31
TxD
_FIN
D-GND
73
D-GND
4FIN_S
TS
43
RxD
_FIN
TH_R
A9
4TH_R
A5
/RES
55
/DTR_F
INB14B-PHDSS
PHDR-14V
S-2
ZHR-4
S4B
-ZR-SM3A
-TF
6N.C
67
/DSR_F
IN7
N.C
79
RES_F
IN8
N.C
811
/TRC_F
IN9
N.C
913
RES_F
INin
10N.C
1015
5VN
11/FIN_S
RDY
1117
GND
12FIN_C
MD
122
N.C
13+5V
1314
/FIN_D
ET
1415
F-GND
15PHDR-18V
S-2
TNMA
1TNMB
2F-GND
B2P
-VH
VHR-2N
SRA-21T
-3
31cpm/35cpm
machine
only
POFM_V
13
POFM_V
1POFM_LD1
22
POFM_LD1
2P-GND
31
P-GND
3POFM_V
4POFM_LD2
5P-GND
6Allde
stinations
3POFM_V
12
POFM_LD2
21
P-GND
3
124
V2
P-GND
3/CV_C
OPY
4/CV_C
OUNT
SMP-02V
-NC/SMR-02V
-N5
/CV_S
TART
24V
71
24V
16
/CV_C
A/PSPS
82
/PSPS
27
/CV_C
LCOPY
B8B-PH-K-S
PHR-8
8/CV_C
OLO
R1
9/CV_S
TAPLE
10/CV_C
OLO
R0
SMP-03V
-NC/SMR-03V
-N11
/CV_D
UPLE
X24V
11
24V
124
V12
5VN
P-GND
22
213
/CV_S
IZE0
INT24V
33
INT24V
3INT24
V14
/CV_S
IZE1
B3P-VH
VHR-3N
15/CV_S
IZE2
16/CV_S
IZE3
B16
B-PNDZS
Tonermotor
TOCOIN
VENDOR
B18
B-PHDSS
Mainmotor
D-GND
3 1TFD3
2
ToPSPWB
InterlockSW
1POD3
2D-GND
5VN
PCUPWB
35V
NPD
Rightpaperexitunitoption
Rightpaperexit
detector
Rightpaperexit
fulldetector
Rightpaperexitgate
selectsolenoid Paperexitcooling
fan1
Paperexitcooling
fan2
Processseparation
pawlsolenoid
Temperature
sensor/Humidity
sensor
/MM_C
LK
(NC)
(NC)
PHNR-03-H/BU03
P-TR-P-H/PHNR-03-H
PHNR-03-H/BU03
P-TR-P-H/PHNR-03-H
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
CN22
(NC)
CN23
CN9
CN15
/MM_C
LK
PSFM_V
PSFM_V
CN17
CN29
CN7
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
CN19
(NC)
PSFM_V
PSFM_V
TOFinisher
(OPTION)
Powersupplycooling
fan1(Side)
Powersupplycooling
fan2(Front)
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 16
F. DC power supply section, High voltage section
SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N
124V2
12
2
CN14
CN1
B1
17
nRY_C
NT
INT24V
211
SW24V
MHV
1DCCNT2
29
nOFF_C
NT
D-GND
49
DGND
#187[RD]
PS-187-R(RED)
FW
311
FW
TC_D
A6
3TCDA
413
HL_UM_out
DHVREM/
84
DHVREM
CN21
HLO
UT_2
515
HL_US_out
THV-REM/
106
THV-REM
MCCASE
16
17D-GND
128
DVBSPWM
27
19HL_PR
141
MHVREM
B2P
-VH-BL
VHR-2N-BL
B7B
-PH-K-S
PHR-7
PHDR-20V
S-2
B20B-PHDSS
165
THVREM
182
GBPWM
CN101
207
DVBSREM
GB
110
224
VCN11
PHDR-20V
S-2
PHR-11
B11B-PH-K-S
B2P
-VH
VHR-2N
24V1
11
24V
24V2
2B201
24V2
3THV
1THV
P-GND
42
P-GND
#187[W
H]
PS-187
P-GND
5 6CN301
B6P
-VH-B
VHR-6N
DHV
1DHV
312
V2
4D-GND
VHR-2N-BK
CN12
+12V
1CN401
+12V
2DVBS
1+5V
N3
55V
NGND
2+5V
N4
B2P
-VH-RD
VHR-2N-R
+3.3V
57
3.3V
+3.3V
68
3.3V
+3.3V
7D-GND
89
D-GND
910
D-GND
D-GND
10(NC)
11D-GND
12 13B13
B-PASK-1
PAP-13V
-SCN7
CN41
INT5V
181
INT5V
CN13
D-GND
162
DGND
5VL
1D-GND
143
DGND
5VL
224V
124
24V_F
AX
36
+5V
O+5V
O10
55V
O_F
AX
D-GND
4(NC)
VHR-10N
B10P-VH-B
3.3V
86
3.3V
_FAX
D-GND
53.3V
67
63.3V
48
B06
B-PASK-1
PAP-06V
-SB18B-PHDSS
PHDR-18V
S-2
PHR-8
B8B
-PH-K-S-B
CN47 1
DGND
2+5V
L3
+5V
L4
VHR-4N
B4P
-VH
CN1 1
24V2
212
V3
D-GND
45V
N5
3.3V
6VHR-6N
B6P
-VH
DCoutput
section
MHV
SOKETHOLDER
GB
- -
SCNCNTPWB
MFPCPWB
PSPWB
PCUPWB
ToFinishe
r
HVPWB
(ToDVDrawer)
TCHIGHVOLTAGE
HOLDER
MCCASE
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC) B
2P-VH-BK
(NC)
DGND
3.3V
_FAX
3.3V
_FAX
B20B-PHDSS
CN13
DVBSPWM/
MHVREM/
THVREM/
GBPWM/
DVBSREM/
D-GND
5VO
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
P-GND
/HL_PR
D-GND
HLO
UT_1
DCCNT1
(NC)
P-GND
CN16
CN13
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 17
G. AC power supply section, Fusing section
CN3
CN5
ELR
-02V
/ELP
-02V
/WH_C
NT
524V
3NC
1PAP-02V
-SB02B-PASK-1
B2P
3-VH
VHR-3N
B20B-PHDSS
PHDR-20V
S-2
JPN:O
PTION
CN1
CN4
EX100V
:OPTION
EX120V
:OPTION
VHR-3N-BK
B2P
3-VH
VHR-3N
CN2
EX200V
:OPTION
VHR-3N-R
B2P
3-VH-R
XLP
-02V
/XLR
-02V
XLP
-02V
/XLR
-02V
172074-7
orPS-187-R
1Live-W
H
1Live-W
H172074-1
orPS-187
XLP
-02V
/XLR
-02V
XLP
-02V
/XLR
-02V
CN4
Neutral-W
H1
(NC)
2(NC)
Live-W
H3
B2P
3-VH-B
VHR-3N
XLP
-02V
/XLR
-02V
XLP
-02V
/XLR
-02V
XLP
-02V
/XLR
-02V
CN1 1
Live
2(NC)
3Neu
tral
VLP
-03V
B03P-VL
SRA-51T
-4
CN5
ELR
-02V
/ELP
-02V
CN
Live-PCI
11
Neutral-in
(NC)
22
CN1
Neutral-PCI
33
Live-in
Live
1Live
B2P
3-VH-B
F-GND
2(NC)
Neu
tral
3Neu
tral
VLP
-03V
B03P-VL
SRA-51T
-4CN10
LiveR-out
1(NC)
2LiveR-in
3
B2P
3-VH-B-E
PS-250
CN2
14
Neutral-out
D1.25-M
3(Ni)
D1.25-M
3(Ni)
PS-250
12
Live-out
11
Live-in
CN6
VLR
-02V
/VLP
-02V
D1.25-M
3(Ni)
D1.25-M
3(Ni)
PS-250
-R(RED)
HEATER(L)
11
3Neutral-in
2PS-250
-R(RED)
VLP
-04V
B04P-VL
B02P-VL
VLP
-02V
CN7
VLR
-03V
/VLP
-03V
Neu
tralHLou
t11
(NC)
2Neu
tralHLou
t23
B2P
3-VH-RD
VHR-3N-R
03CK-6H-PC/BU03
P-TR-P-H/RHNR-3-H
292250-3
5VNPD
1D-GND
2POSD
3
TH_U
M4
D-GND
5TH_U
S6
D-GND
7B20B-CZHK-B-1
20CZ-6H
1 2
ACPWB
2
2Neu
tral_W
H
24V
3
1Neutral-W
H
1(N.C)
WH_C
NT
WH-CS2
WH-CS3
WH-CS4
SCANNERUNIT WH-SCN
WH-CS1
1 2 3Neu
tral_W
H
WHPWB(OPTION)
Neu
tral_W
H
Live_W
H
1 2 3Live_W
H
(N.C)
Live_W
H(N.C)
1
SW
IN(NEUTRAL)
SW
OUT(NEUTRAL)
SW
OUT(LIVE)
ACSW
1
2Live-W
H2
2Live-W
H1
Neutral-W
H
Neutral-W
H1
1
PCUPWB
2
2WH-N(SCAN)
21
WH-L(SCAN)
1
Live-W
H2
Fusingunit
PCI(option)
2
21
2Live-W
H2
1Neutral-W
H1
PSPWB
2Live-W
H2
1Neutral-W
H1
2Live-W
H
3
1Neutral-W
H2 1
Live-W
H2
1Neutral-W
H1
5VNPD
1D-GND
22
D-GND
25V
NPD
11
POSD
3
Fusingthermistormain
1TH_U
M1
2D-GND
2
POSD
3TH_U
S3
4D-GND
4
Fusingthermistorsub
THERMOSTAT1
HEATERLAMP1
3THERMOSTAT2
1
LIVE1
12
HL-OUTPUT1
21
PCUPWB
LIVE2
1
HEATERLAMP2
2N.C
23
HL-OUTPUT2
3
INLE
T
ACcord
ACcord
200Vseries
WH-N(PCI)
1WH-L(PCI)
Live-W
H2
(N.C)
3Live-W
H
1
2(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
B2P
3-VH-BK
CN13
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
Dehum
idifier
heater
SW
200V
seriesonly
B2P
3-VH-BK
VHR-3N-BK
(NC)
(NC)
HEATER(L)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
04CK-6H-PC/BU04
P-TR-P-H/RHNR-4-H
ADUtransport
pathdetector1
(Reactor)
CN21
SW
IN(LIVE)
100Vseries
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 18
H. Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4 section
CN5
(NC)
P-GND
11
P-GND
P-GND
124V
22
24V
24V
224
VB3B
-PH-K-S
5VN
33
5V5V
35V
PHR-3
24V
44
24V
24V
424V
C2P
US
55
PCS2#
LUM4
5LU
M4
C2LUM
66
LUM2#
PCS4
6PCS4
PTRC2
77
TRCL2#
Y3
7Y3
C2P
UC
88
PCL2#
PCL4
8PCL4
C4P
US
99
PCS4#
Y4
9Y4
(NC)
C4LUM
1010
LUM4#
LUM3
10LU
M3
C4P
UC
1111
PCL4#
TRCL3
11TRCL3
B3B
-PH-K-K
Y1B
1212
Y3
12PHR-3-BK
C3LUM
1313
LUM3#
PCS3
13PCS3
Y2
1414
Y4
CSSELB
14CSSELB
1515
CASSELA
#PCL3
15PCL3
PTRC1
1616
TRCL3#
CSSELC
16CASSELB
1717
CASSELB
#BI
17BI
292250-2
C3P
US
1818
PCS3#
AI
18AI
(NC)
CASSELC
1919
CASSELC
#/BI
19C3P
UC
2020
PCL3#
/AI
20/AI
B3B
-PH-K-E
PHR-3-BL
179228-2
CPFM_A
2121
AI#
21CPFM_B
2222
BI#
D-GND
22D-GND
2323
/AI#
D-GND
23D-GND
CPFM_X
B24
24/BI#
D-GND
24Y1A
2525
Y2
B24B-PUDSS-1
PUDP-24V
-SPUDP-24V
-SB24B-PUDSS-1
B3B
-PH-K-S
2626
OPCASSEL#
LUM3D
D-GND
2727
D-GND
(NC)
(NC)
N.C
D-GND
2828
D-GND
P-GND
B28B-PUDSS-1
PUDP-28V
-SPUDP-28V
-SB28B-PUDSS-1
B3B
-PH-K-R
PHR-3-R
PHR-3
PHR-6
B6B
-PH-K-S
179228-2
292250-2
PHR-3
PHR-8
SMP-02V
-NC/S
MR-02V
-N/PCS3
24V
PHR-5
CN5
/PCL2
1(NC)
2(NC)
24V
3
B3B
-PH-K-S
PHR-3
F-GND
F-GND
/TRCL2
1(NC)
2(NC)
24V
3
B3B
-PH-K-K
PHR-3-BK
2922
50-2
1792
28-2
PHR-6
B6B
-PH-K-S
PHR-3
D-GND
1PPD2
2(NC)
PHR-6
B6B
-PH-K-S
B3B
-PH-K-S
179228-2
5V3
292250-2
PAP2
4
(NC)
DRS4
DRS2
5
D-GND
D-GND
LUD2
6
PHR-3
/PCS2
724V
8
SMP-02V
-NC/S
MR-02V
-N
179228-2
292250-2
/PCS2
D-GND
24V
CSS4
PHR-8
SMP-02
V-BC
/SMR-02
V-B
B14B-PHDSS-B
PHDR-14V
S-2
24V
CSS2
1
/PCL4
(NC)
2(NC)
D-GND
3B3B
-PH-K-E
PHR-3-BL
179228-2
SMP-02
V-NC
/SMR-02
V-N
24V
/PCS4
B3B
-PH-K-S
B3B
-PH-K-S
LUM4D
LUM2D
1
N.C
(NC)
2(NC)
(NC)
P-GND
P-GND
3
PHR-3
B3B
-PH-K-R
PHR-3-R
PHR-3
Tray2cassetteunit(Standard)
Tray4cassetteunit(Option)
P-GND
N.C
D-GND
LUM3D
N.C
/PLC
3N.C
24V
/TRCL3
PAP3
5VPPD3
D-GND
24V
/PCS3
LUD3
DRS3
PPD4
D-GND
AI
BI
/AI
/BI
24V1
LUD4
DRS4
PAP4
5V
/PCL4
24V
CSS4
D-GND
LUM4D
P-GND
/PCS4
24V
Tray3cassetteunit(Option)
CassettesensorPWB
D-GND
PPD4
5V
DRS3
D-GND
DRS3
LUD3
DRS3
N.C
D-GND
Tray2liftmotor
CSS3
D-GND
Tray3liftmotor
PAP4
DRS4
LUD4
PPD3
5VPAP3
N.C
PCUPWB
StandardCasseteI/F
PWB
1 4
D-GND
PPD2
5VPAP2
DRS2
3
292250-2
1 2 2
CSS2
D-GND
LUM2D
N.C
P-GND
1
2
2
1
6 7
1
2
8 93
3
4 51
1 2N.C
21
12
3
13 1410 1124V
CSS3
24
11
15 16 17 181
20 21
32
2219 23
1 2
22
33
1D-GND
CassettesensorPWB
12
21
32
33
44
55
1 2 3
1 2
4 5
2
66
7 8
1
11
66
1
312
22
7
23
34
45
5
8
211
11
9 10
2
32
1
Tray4liftmotor
OptionCassete
I/FPWB
2
1
13 14
121
12
2
121
22
5 6DRS2
LUD2
1
33
2
D-GND
DRS2
D-GND
CassettesensorPWB
CN14
/OPCASSEL
CPFM_X
A
CASSELA
CN9
Tray3dooropen/close
detectionSW
Tray3pickup
solenoid
Tray4paperfeed
clutch
Tray4pickup
solenoid
Tray3paperfeed
clutch
Tray3vertical
transportclutch
Tray3presence
detectionSW
Traytransport
motor
B3B
-PH-K-S
Tray
4tra
nspo
rtde
tector
Tray
4pa
pere
mptyde
tector
Tray
4up
perlimitde
tector
Tray
3tra
nspo
rtde
tector
Tray
3pa
pere
mptyde
tector
Tray
3up
perlimitde
tector
N.C
DRS4
Tray4dooropen/close
detectionSW
Tray4presence
detectionSW
(NC)
CN4
B5B
-PH-K-S
B8B
-PH-K-S
CN8
CN1
CN7
CN2
CN3
CN9
P-GND
CSSELA
CSSELC
/BI
OPCASSEL
D-GND
Tray2vertical
transportclutch
Tray2paperfeed
clutch
Tray2presence
detector
Tray2dooropen/close
detectionSW
Tray2pickup
solenoid
B3B
-PH-K-S
B8B
-PH-K-S
CN1
CN7
CN8
CN2
CN3
Tray
2tra
nspo
rtde
tector
Tray
2pa
pere
mptyde
tector
Tray
2up
perlimitde
tector
OPCASSEL
CSSELA
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 19
I. USB, FAX, PCI, HDD section
CZHR-06V
-SSHLD
P-30V
-S-1(B)CN51
MJ1
1 2 3OPTION
4[USBHub
]
MJ-62
J-RD31
55
(NC)
6or
7 8F-GND
9SRA-21T
-4PALR
-06V
/PAP-06V
-SPAP-06V
-S/P
ALR
-06V
10 11 12MJ-64
J-RD31
513 14 15 16 17 18 19
MJ2
20 21BM15B-GHS-TBT
(LF)(SN)
USB-A
22GHR-15V
-SMJ-62
J-RD31
523 24 25 26 27
PAP-05V
-SB05
B-PASK-1
28 29 30BM30B-SHLD
S-G-TFT
SHLD
P-30V
-S-1(B)
BM30B-SHLD
S-G-TFT
MD-S63
50-90
TX25
-40P
-12S
T-H1E
TX24
-40R
-10S
T-H1E
S02
B-PASK-2(LF)(SN)
PAP-02V
-S
BU31
P-TCS-LE(LF)
31CSR-8PK
CN29
CN22
6SAT07
P-328
B-B5
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
CN50
B03
B-PASK
PAP-03V
-S(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
B31
B-CSRK(L)(SN)
SPEAKER
1SP–
2SP+
5DG
6RHS–
TOHANDSET
(JAPAN
ONLY)
2RX+
4TX–
3RX–
1TX+
4 36 2
L2
12
TOEXTEL
1L1
2
8 19 516 14 1013 715 1117 18204
TEL2
193
L22
L11
TEL1
2123
TOLINE
27 25 2224
2L2
2630
TELLIUPWB
FAXMAINPWB
HDD
USB
USBconnectorPWB
TO2ndFAX
(OPTION)
MFPCPWB
KEYBOARD
PWB
SATASIGNAL&
POWER
31CSR-8PK
CN43
CN1
CN2
2829
CN3
CN1
(EX)
(JAPAN)
L11
CN1
BoardtoBoard
+3.3V
N+3.3V
NnC
NCT_F
AX
FAX_T
XD_D
_NFAX_T
XD_D
_P
+5V
LDGND
nRTS_F
AX_D
DGND
nCTS_F
AX_D
+3.3V
N
+5V
O
+3.3V
N+24
V1
+3.3V
NDGND
PGND
FAX_R
XD_C
S_P
FAX_R
XD_D
_PFAX_R
XD_D
_N
+5V
L
DGND
DGND
DGND
FAX_T
XD_C
S_N
FAX_T
XD_C
S_P
nRES_F
AX
FAX_R
XD_C
S_N
nCTS_F
AX_C
S
nRTS_F
AX_C
S
+3.3V
_F
D-GND
+3.3V
_F
P-GND
+24V
D-GND
FAX_R
TS(D)–
FLV
PP
+5V
SFAX_R
TS(CS)–
+5V
D-GND
FAX_T
XD(CS)+
FAX_C
TS(D)–
FAX_W
UP-
FAX_T
XD(D)–
FAX_R
XD(CS)+
FAX_R
XD(CS)–
D-GND
nRES_F
AX
+5V
FAX_R
XD(D)–
FAX_R
XD(D)+
+3.3V
CNCT_F
AX–
+3.3V
D-GND
FAX_C
TS(CS)–
FAX_T
XD(CS)–
FAX_T
XD(D)+
4037BTXD
38HDMUTE–
39RHS–
36BRXD
MDM_C
LKAFERES–
RGDT–
32 35
MDM_A
RXD
29 3130 33 34
MDM_A
TXD
2827SI3_R
ES–
26DG
255V
S24
+3.3V
22DG
23
NC
18 21
CI2–
17
TELID2
19NC
20
TELID
16
DG
MRON
15ECON
14SON2
13SON1
12EXHS–
117MSGMUTE
HS1–
8
CI–
109HS2–
CION
6
+24V
AG
2 3
+24V
1
BSPCLK
BBITCLK
MDM_A
SPCLK
MDM_A
BITCLK
SPK
5415
0VON
AG
38 39HDMUTE–
40
BRXD
RHS–
BTXD
35 3736
ARXD
32RGDT–
313029 33 34AFERES–
28ATXD
27
MDMGND
26SI3_R
ES–
2422
NC
21MDMGND
23 25+5V
S
MDM3.3V
MDMGND
TELID2
CI2–
18NC
17 19 2016TELID
15MRON
13 14ECON
11EXHS–
SON2
12SON1
7MSGMUTE
CI–
HS1–
HS2–
8 109
CION
324
V2
PGND
6124
V
BSPCLK
BBITCLK
AFE_C
LK
ASPCLK
ABITCLK
SPK
150V
ON
PGND
54
1PGND
312
DGND
303
+3.3V
N29
4+3.3V
N28
5CNCT_F
AX
276
FAX_T
XD_D
_N26
7FAX_T
XD_D
_P25
8+5V
L24
9nR
ES_F
AX
2310
2211
2112
DGND
2013
FAX_R
XD_D
_N19
14FAX_R
XD_D
_P18
15DGND
1716
1617
1518
+5V
L14
19DGND
1320
nRTS_F
AX_D
1221
DGND
1122
nCTS_F
AX_D
1023
+3.3V
N9
24nR
TS_F
AX_C
S8
25+5V
O7
26nC
TS_F
AX_C
S6
27+24
V1
528
+3.3V
N4
29+3.3V
N3
30DGND
231
PGND
1
FAX_R
XD_C
S_N
FAX_R
XD_C
S_P
FAX_T
XD_C
S_N
FAX_T
XD_C
S_P
1PGND
2DGND
3+3.3V
N4
+3.3V
N5
CNCT_F
AX
6FAX_T
XD_D
_N7
FAX_T
XD_D
_P8
+5V
L9
nRES_F
AX
10FAX_T
XD_C
S_P
11FAX_T
XD_C
S_N
12DGND
13FAX_R
XD_D
_N14
FAX_R
XD_D
_P15
DGND
16FAX_R
XD_C
S_P
17FAX_R
XD_C
S_N
18+5V
L19
DGND
20nR
TS_F
AX_D
21DGND
22nC
TS_F
AX_D
23+3.3V
N24
nRTS_F
AX_C
S25
+5V
O26
nCTS_F
AX_C
S27
+24
V1
28+3.3V
N29
+3.3V
N30
DGND
31PGND
DGND
1SATA_T
XP
2SATA_T
XN
3DGND
4SATA_R
XN
5SATA_R
XP
6DGND
7
DGND
1
+5V
HD
2
DGND
3
SHIELD
415
DGND4
14D4+
13D4–
12VBUS4
11SHIELD
310
DGND3
9D3+
8D3–
7VBUS3
6SHIELD
15
DGND1
4D1+
3D1–
2VBUS1
1
10 13+12
V
12
DGND
+12
V
DGND
5 8 15
DGND
6
+5V
HD
DGND
7+5V
HD
11
+5V
HD
3.3V
3.3V
33.3V
4 149
SATA_T
XN
4GND
5SATA_R
XN
SATA_R
XP
GND
3 6 27 1
GND
SATA_T
XP
1 2
+12
VDGND
DGND
3
VBUS3
124
14Shield3
2D3+
D3–
6
3DGND3
56F-GND
5
D1+
3D1–
2VBUS1
1
DGND1
4Shield1
–
4D1+
3D1–
2 5VBUS1
DGND1
1Shield1
1VBUS3
1
4DGND3
4
2D3–
23
D3+
3
Shield3
556
F-GND
6
(NC)
1Shield4
2DGND4
VBUS4
5 6
D4–
D4+
3 4
VBUS3
D3–
DGND3
D3+
F-GND
Shield3
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 20
4. Signal list
Signal name Name [Type] Function/OperationConnector level Connector
No.Pin No.
PWB name NOTE
"L" "H"+5VHD HDD power source HDD power source Power shutoff Power supply CN50 2 MFPC
PWB5VO_DUTY 5VO power signal 5VO power signal 5VO power
supply OFF– CN6 2 PCU
ADUMA ADU motor Motor drive signal Motor ON (phase
excitation ON)
Motor OFF CN24 2 PCU
ADUMB ADU motor Motor drive signal Motor ON (phase
excitation ON)
Motor OFF CN24 3 PCU
ADUMXA ADU motor Motor drive signal Motor ON (phase
excitation ON)
Motor OFF CN24 4 PCU
ADUMXB ADU motor Motor drive signal Motor ON (phase
excitation ON)
Motor OFF CN24 5 PCU
/APPD1 DUP2 sensor Paper transport detection – Paper provided
CN21 19 PCU
BD_HSYNC HSYNC signal of BD HSYNC signal of BD – – CN10 3 PCUC1LUD Paper upper limit
detection_1CSPaper upper limit detection – Upper limit
detectionCN18 15 PCU
/C1LUM Lift motor 1CS Motor drive signal – Motor rotation CN21 9 PCUC1PED Paper empty detection_1CS Paper empty detection Paper empty Paper
providedCN18 11 PCU
C1PFD Paper entry detection_1CS Paper transport detection Paper provided
– CN18 7 PCU
/C1PUC 1CS clutch Clutch drive signal Clutch ON – CN19 11 PCU/C1PUS Paper feed solenoid 1CS Solenoid drive signal Solenoid ON – CN18 3 PCU/C1SS 1CS sensor Paper transport detection 1CS not
provided1CS provided CN21 11 PCU
C2LUM Lift motor 2CS Motor drive signal – Motor rotation CN14 6 PCUC2PUC Paper feed clutch 2CS Clutch drive signal Clutch OFF Clutch ON CN14 8 PCUC2PUS Paper feed solenoid 2CS Solenoid drive signal Solenoid OFF Solenoid ON CN14 5 PCUC3LUM Lift motor 3CS (OP) Motor drive signal – Motor rotation CN14 13 PCUC3PUC Paper feed clutch 3CS (OP) Clutch drive signal Clutch OFF Clutch ON CN14 20 PCUC3PUS Paper feed solenoid 3CS
(OP)Solenoid drive signal Solenoid OFF Solenoid ON CN14 18 PCU
C4LUM Lift motor 4CS (OP) Motor drive signal – Motor rotation CN14 10 PCUC4PUC Paper feed clutch 4CS (OP) Clutch drive signal Clutch OFF Clutch ON CN14 11 PCUC4PUS Paper feed solenoid 4CS
(OP)Solenoid drive signal Solenoid OFF Solenoid ON CN14 9 PCU
CASSELA OP_DESK selector signal A OP_DESK selector signal A – – CN14 15 PCUCASSELB OP_DESK selector signal B OP_DESK selector signal B – – CN14 17 PCUCASSELC OP_DESK selector signal C OP_DESK selector signal C – – CN14 19 PCUCCFT LCD backlight [CCFT cool
cathode ray tube]LCD backlight ON OFF CN4 21 SCNcnt
CL_ON Scanner lamp Radiates lights to the document for the CCD to scan the document images.
ON OFF CN8 3 SCNcnt
CPFM_A Desk motor Motor drive signal Motor OFF Motor ON (phase
excitation ON)
CN14 21 PCU
CPFM_B Desk motor Motor drive signal Motor OFF Motor ON (phase
excitation ON)
CN14 22 PCU
CPFM_XA Desk motor Motor drive signal Motor OFF Motor ON (phase
excitation ON)
CN14 23 PCU
CPFM_XB Desk motor Motor drive signal Motor OFF Motor ON (phase
excitation ON)
CN14 24 PCU
CRM_CLK CRUM_CLK CRUM communication signal
– – CN18 14 PCU
CRM_DT CRUM input/output CRUM communication signal
– – CN18 16 PCU
CTS RIC, PCI (main) send enable input
RIC, PCI (main) send enable input
Negative Active CN12 8 MFPC PWB
CTS_PCI PCI (sub) send enable input PCI (sub) send enable input Active Negative CN5 4 MFPC PWB
CTS_PCU ICU communication ICU-PCU communication signal
– – CN10 22 PCU
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 21
D+ USB Device differential data +
USB Device differential data +
– – CN17 3 MFPC PWB
D+ USB Host (Rear) differential data +
USB Host (Rear) differential data +
– – CN18 3 MFPC PWB
D1+ USB Host1 differential data +
USB Host1 differential data +
– – CN43 3 MFPC PWB
D1– USB Host1 differential data – USB Host1 differential data – – – CN43 2 MFPC PWB
D3+ USB Host3 differential data +
USB Host3 differential data +
– – CN43 8 MFPC PWB
D3– USB Host3 differential data – USB Host3 differential data – – – CN43 7 MFPC PWB
D4+ USB Host4 differential data +
USB Host4 differential data +
– – CN43 13 MFPC PWB
D4– USB Host4 differential data – USB Host4 differential data – – – CN43 12 MFPC PWB
DHVREM/ DHV remote output Separation bias ON signal – High voltage output ON
CN13 8 PCU
DSR RIC, PCI (main) Data Set Ready
RIC, PCI (main) Data Set Ready
Negative Active CN12 6 MFPC PWB
/DSR_FIN Finisher communication Finisher communication signal
– – CN7 7 PCU
DSR_PCI PCI (sub) Data Set Ready PCI (sub) Data Set Ready Active Negative CN5 2 MFPC PWB
DSW-R(INT24) Interlock 24V detection Interlock 24V detection Front door/Side door
open
Front door/Side door
close
CN22 3 PCU
DSW_POC Paper exit cover open/close detection
Cover open/close detection Paper exit cover Open
Paper exit cover Close
CN3 10 PCU
DTR RIC, PCI (main) Data Terminal Ready
RIC, PCI (main) Data Terminal Ready
Negative Active CN12 4 MFPC PWB
/DTR_FIN Finisher communication Finisher communication signal
– – CN7 5 PCU
DTR_PCI PCI (sub) Data Terminal Ready
PCI (sub) Data Terminal Ready
Active Negative CN5 7 MFPC PWB
DVBSPWM/ DV bias PWM Developing bias PWM signal – – CN13 12 PCUDVBSREM/ DVBS remote output Developing bias ON signal – High voltage
output ONCN13 20 PCU
DVSET Developer empty detection Developing unit installation detection
DV unit detection
DV unit not installed
CN18 4 PCU
D– USB Device differential data –
USB Device differential data –
– – CN17 2 MFPC PWB
D– USB Host (Rear) differential data –
USB Host (Rear) differential data –
– – CN18 2 MFPC PWB
FAXCS_RXD_N Option FAXdata differential input +
Option FAXdata differential input +
– – CN29 17 MFPC PWB
FAXCS_RXD_P Option FAXdata differential input –
Option FAXdata differential input –
– – CN29 16 MFPC PWB
FAXCS_TXD_N Option FAX data differential output +
Option FAX data differential output +
– – CN29 11 MFPC PWB
FAXCS_TXD_P Option FAX data differential output –
Option FAX data differential output –
– – CN29 10 MFPC PWB
FAXD_RXD_N Option FAX data differential input –
Option FAX data differential input –
– – CN29 13 MFPC PWB
FAXD_RXD_P Option FAX data differential input +
Option FAX data differential input +
– – CN29 14 MFPC PWB
FAXD_TXD_N Option FAX data differential output –
Option FAX data differential output –
– – CN29 6 MFPC PWB
FAXD_TXD_P Option FAX data differential output +
Option FAX data differential output +
– – CN29 7 MFPC PWB
FUFM_LD1 Fusing FAN1_LD signal FAN lock detection signal Normal rotation state
– CN28 14 PCU
FUFM_LD2 Fusing FAN2_LD signal FAN lock detection signal Normal rotation state
– CN28 16 PCU
FUFM_V Fusing FAN_ON (24V drive) FAN ON signal – FAN motor ON
CN28 10 PCU
FUFM_V Fusing FAN_ON (24V drive) FAN ON signal – FAN motor ON
CN28 12 PCU
FW FW signal Power frequency monitor signal
– – CN13 11 PCU
GBPWM/ Grid bias PWM Grid bias PWM signal – – CN13 18 PCUHL_PR Fusing relay control Fusing relay ON signal Fusing relay
OFFFusing relay
ONCN13 19 PCU
Signal name Name [Type] Function/OperationConnector level Connector
No.Pin No.
PWB name NOTE
"L" "H"
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 22
HL_UM_out Fusing HL1_ON signal Fusing lamp ON signal Heater lamp OFF
Heater lamp ON
CN13 13 PCU
HL_US_out Fusing HL2_ON signal Fusing lamp ON signal Heater lamp OFF
Heater lamp ON
CN13 15 PCU
HUD_RA Humidity analog sensor signal input
Humidity detection signal – – CN19 5 PCU Analog
LAN_CNT – LAN power supply signal FAX nighttime – CN10 10 PCULD_DA LD strength adjustment
analog outputLD strength adjustment analog output
– – CN12 4 PCU Analog
MDI_0+ LAN send/receive data 0 + LAN send/receive data 0 + – – CN15 1 MFPC PWB
MDI_0– LAN send/receive data 0 – LAN send/receive data 0 – – – CN15 2 MFPC PWB
MDI_1+ LAN send/receive data 1 + LAN send/receive data 1 + – – CN15 3 MFPC PWB
MDI_1– LAN send/receive data 1 – LAN send/receive data 1 – – – CN15 4 MFPC PWB
MDI_2+ LAN send/receive data 2 + LAN send/receive data 2 + – – CN15 5 MFPC PWB
MDI_2– LAN send/receive data 2 – LAN send/receive data 2 – – – CN15 6 MFPC PWB
MDI_3+ LAN send/receive data 3 + LAN send/receive data 3 + – – CN15 7 MFPC PWB
MDI_3– LAN send/receive data 3 – LAN send/receive data 3 – – – CN15 8 MFPC PWB
MHPS Scanner home position sensor [Transmission type]
Detects the scanner home position.
– Home CN10 1 SCNcnt
MHVREM/ MHV remote output Main charger ON signal – High voltage output ON
CN13 14 PCU
MIM_* Scanner motor [Stepping motor]
Scanner (reading) section – – CN7 1, 2, 3, 4
SCNcnt
/MM_CLK Main motor CLK (frequency dividing output)
Polygon motor CLK signal – – CN19 10 PCU
/MM_D Main motor ON signal Polygon motor ON signal Motor ON Motor OFF CN19 6 PCUMM_LD Main M_LD signal Polygon motor lock detection
signalNormal
rotation state– CN19 8 PCU
/MPED Manual feed empty sensor Paper empty detection – Paper provided
CN21 14 PCU
/MPFS Manual feed solenoid Solenoid drive signal Solenoid ON – CN20 14 PCU/MPLD1 Manual feed length sensor 1 Manual feed paper length
sensor 1– Paper
providedCN20 9 PCU
/MPLD2 Manual feed length sensor 2 Manual feed paper length sensor 2
– Paper provided
CN20 6 PCU
MPU_INTRO_N ICU (for LSU) communication
ICU (for LSU)-PCU communication signal
– – CN10 6 PCU
MPU_PRINTS_N ICU (for LSU) communication
ICU (for LSU)-PCU communication signal
– – CN10 8 PCU
MPU_SIF_CLK ICU (for LSU) communication
ICU (for LSU)-PCU communication signal
– – CN10 18 PCU
MPU_SIF_RST ICU (for LSU) communication
ICU (for LSU)-PCU communication signal
– – CN10 20 PCU
MPU_SIF_RXD ICU (for LSU) communication
ICU (for LSU)-PCU communication signal
– – CN10 14 PCU
MPU_SIF_TXD ICU (for LSU) communication
ICU (for LSU)-PCU communication signal
– – CN10 16 PCU
MPWD Manual feed paper width detection
Manual feed paper width detection
– – CN20 2 PCU Analog
/MTOP1 Manual feed tray sensor 1 (reduction detection)
Manual feed tray detection 1 (reduction detection)
– Manual feed tray reduction
position
CN20 13 PCU
/MTOP2 Manual feed tray sensor 2 (extension detection)
Manual feed tray detection 2 (extension detection)
– Manual feed tray extension
position
CN20 11 PCU
nCLR_PIC ICU-PIC communication ICU-PIC communication signal
– – CN10 17 PCU
nCNCT_FAX Option FAX installation detection
Option FAX installation detection signal
Installed Not installed CN29 5 MFPC PWB
nFAX_WUP Option FAX wakeup Option FAX wakeup interruption
Active Negative CN29 15 MFPC PWB
nFAXCS_CTS Option FAX send enable input
Option FAX send enable input
Active Negative CN29 26 MFPC PWB
nFAXCS_RTS Option FAX send request Option FAX send request Active Negative CN29 24 MFPC PWB
Signal name Name [Type] Function/OperationConnector level Connector
No.Pin No.
PWB name NOTE
"L" "H"
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 23
nFAXD_CTS Option FAX send enable input
Option FAX send enable input
Active Negative CN29 22 MFPC PWB
nFAXD_RTS Option FAX send request Option FAX send request Active Negative CN29 20 MFPC PWB
nINFO_FAX_LED FAX notice LCD signal FAX notice LCD signal LED lighting – CN6 10 PCUnOFF_CNT 5VL power relay signal 5VL power relay signal 5VL power
OFF– CN13 9 PCU
nPOF_MFPC Power interruption detection signal
Power interruption detection signal
AC power OFF
– CN10 9 PCU
nPOF_SCN Power interruption detection signal
Power interruption detection signal
AC power OFF
– CN6 1 PCU
nPOW_LED Power LED signal Power LED signal LED lighting – CN6 8 PCUnPWR_SW Power SW detection signal Power SW detection signal SW_ON state – CN6 5 PCUnREQ_PIC ICU-PIC communication ICU-PIC communication
signal– – CN10 19 PCU
nREQ_PIC_INT ICU-PIC communication ICU-PIC communication signal
– – CN10 5 PCU
nRES_FAX Option FAX reset Option FAX reset Active Negative CN29 9 MFPC PWB
nRES_PIC ICU-PIC communication ICU-PIC communication signal
– – CN10 7 PCU
nRY_CNT Main power relay signal Main power relay signal Main power OFF
– CN13 7 PCU
nSPED Document detection WU signal
Document detection WU signal
WU detection – CN6 3 PCU
nWU_FAX WU signal (Start request) FAX_WU signal (Start request)
WU (Start request)
– CN10 12 PCU
nWU_KEY Energy-saving key detection signal
Energy-saving key detection signal
Start request detection
– CN6 6 PCU
nWU_LED Reset key LED signal Reset key LED signal LED lighting – CN6 9 PCUOCSW Light emitting UN open/close
detection Light emitting UN open/close detection
Close Open CN17 3 SCNcnt
/OPCASSEL Desk motor Enable Desk motor Enable signal – Motor rotation Enable
CN14 26 PCU
OSMA Shift motor Motor drive signal Motor ON (phase
excitation ON)
Motor OFF CN2 3 PCU
OSMB Shift motor Motor drive signal Motor ON (phase
excitation ON)
Motor OFF CN2 4 PCU
OSMXA Shift motor Motor drive signal Motor ON (phase
excitation ON)
Motor OFF CN2 5 PCU
OSMXB Shift motor Motor drive signal Motor ON (phase
excitation ON)
Motor OFF CN2 6 PCU
PICVPPON For PIC program PIC program writing signal – – CN10 11 PCU/PM_CLK Polygon motor CLK
(frequency dividing output)Polygon motor CLK signal – – CN12 6 PCU
/PM_D Polygon motor ON signal Polygon motor ON signal Motor ON Motor OFF CN12 8 PCUPM_LD Polygon M_LD signal Polygon motor lock detection
signalNormal
rotation state– CN12 5 PCU
POD1 Paper exit sensor Paper transport detection – Paper provided
CN28 6 PCU
POD2 Second paper exit discharge Paper transport detection Paper provided
– CN3 2 PCU
POD3 Right paper exit discharge sensor
Paper transport detection Paper provided
– CN1 2 PCU
POFM_LD1 Paper exit cooing FAN1_LD signal
FAN ON signal Normal rotation state
– CN23 2 PCU
POFM_LD2 Paper exit cooing FAN2_LD signal
FAN ON signal Normal rotation state
– CN23 5 PCU
POFM_V Paper exit cooling FAN_ON signal
FAN lock detection signal – FAN motor ON
CN23 1 PCU
POFM_V Paper exit cooling FAN_ON signal
FAN lock detection signal – FAN motor ON
CN23 4 PCU
/POGS1a Paper exit gate solenoid Gate select Solenoid ON (Normal paper exit direction)
– CN25 2 PCU
/POGS1b Paper exit gate solenoid Gate select Solenoid ON (Second
paper exit direction)
– CN25 3 PCU
Signal name Name [Type] Function/OperationConnector level Connector
No.Pin No.
PWB name NOTE
"L" "H"
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 24
/POGS2a Right paper exit keep solenoid
Gate select Solenoid ON (Left paper
exit direction)
– CN1 8 PCU
/POGS2b Right paper exit keep solenoid
Gate select Solenoid ON (Right paper exit direction)
– CN1 9 PCU
/POMA Paper exit motor Motor drive signal Motor ON (phase
excitation ON)
Motor OFF CN26 4 PCU
POMA Paper exit motor Motor drive signal Motor ON (phase
excitation ON)
Motor OFF CN26 2 PCU
/POMB Paper exit motor Motor drive signal Motor ON (phase
excitation ON)
Motor OFF CN26 5 PCU
POMB Paper exit motor Motor drive signal Motor ON (phase
excitation ON)
Motor OFF CN26 3 PCU
POSD PaperOutputSect sensor Paper transport detection (Paper exit reverse section)
Paper provided
– CN21 3 PCU
POUT2A_DET Right paper exit UN detection
UN installation detection Wight paper exit UN
connection detection
Right paper exit UN not connected
CN1 10 PCU
POUT2B_DET Second paper exit UN installation detection
UN installation detection Second paper exit UN
connection detection
Second paper exit UN not connected
CN3 6 PCU
/PPD1 Manual paper feed entry sensor
Paper transport detection Paper provided
– CN21 17 PCU
PSFM_LD1 Power FAN1_LD signal FAN lock detection signal Normal rotation state
– CN17 5 PCU
PSFM_LD2 Power FAN2_LD signal FAN lock detection signal Normal rotation state
– CN17 2 PCU
PSFM_V Power FAN_ON signal FAN ON signal – FAN motor ON
CN17 3 PCU
PSFM_V Power FAN_ON signal FAN ON signal – FAN motor ON
CN17 6 PCU
/PSPS Process separation pawl solenoid
Separation pawl drive Solenoid ON Solenoid OFF CN23 8 PCU
PTRC1 Vertical transport clutch 3CS Clutch drive signal Clutch OFF Clutch ON CN14 16 PCUPTRC2 Vertical transport clutch 2CS Clutch drive signal Clutch OFF Clutch ON CN14 7 PCUPWM(PGC) For PIC program PIC program writing signal – – CN10 21 PCURES_FIN Finisher communication Finisher communication
signal– – CN7 9 PCU
RES_FINin Finisher installation detection signal
Finisher installation detection
FIN connection detection
FIN not connected
CN7 13 PCU
RES_PCU ICU communication ICU-PCU communication signal
– – CN10 26 PCU
/RRC PS clutch Clutch drive signal Clutch ON – CN19 12 PCURTS RIC, PCI (main) send
requestRIC, PCI (main) send request
Negative Active CN12 7 MFPC PWB
RTS_PCI PCI (sub) send request PCI (sub) send request Active Negative CN5 5 MFPC PWB
RTS_PCU ICU communication ICU-PCU communication signal
– – CN10 24 PCU
RXD RIC,PCI (main) reception data
RIC,PCI (main) reception data
– – CN12 2 MFPC PWB
RxD_FIN Finisher communication Finisher communication signal
– – CN7 3 PCU
RXD_PCI PCI (sub) reception data PCI (sub) reception data – – CN5 3 MFPC PWB
RXD_PCU ICU communication ICU-PCU communication signal
– – CN10 23 PCU
RXD_PIC ICU-PIC communication ICU-PIC communication signal
– – CN10 13 PCU
SATA_RXN HDD differential data input + HDD differential data input + – – CN22 5 MFPC PWB
SATA_RXP HDD differential data input – HDD differential data input – – – CN22 6 MFPC PWB
SATA_TXN HDD differential data output –
HDD differential data output –
– – CN22 3 MFPC PWB
Signal name Name [Type] Function/OperationConnector level Connector
No.Pin No.
PWB name NOTE
"L" "H"
MX-M264U ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 25
SATA_TXP HDD differential data output +
HDD differential data output +
– – CN22 2 MFPC PWB
SHPOS Shifter HP sensor Shifter HP detection HP detection – CN28 5 PCUSOCD SPF open/close detection SPF open/close detection Close – CN14 28 SCNcnt SPED Document sensor Document detection Detection – CN14 27 SCNcnt SPFM* SFP transport motor SPF transport motor drive – – CN14 3, 4, 5,
6, 7SCNcnt
SPM* SPF paper feed motor SPF paper feed motor drive – – CN14 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
SCNcnt
SPPD1 SPF transport sensor 1 Detects paper pass. Detection – CN14 1 SCNcnt SPPD2 SPF transport sensor 2 Detects paper pass. Detection – CN14 2 SCNcnt SPPD3 SPF transport sensor 3 Detects paper pass. Detection – CN14 24 SCNcnt SPPD4 SPF transport sensor 4 Detects paper pass. Detection – CN14 22 SCNcnt SPRS Pressure release solenoid Controls the pressure
release solenoid.OFF ON CN14 13 SCNcnt
SPWS Document width sensor Detects document width. – – CN14 17 SCNcnt SRRC PS clutch Controls the PS clutch. OFF ON CN14 15 SCNcnt STMPS Stamp solenoid Controls the stamp solenoid. – Stamp CN14 14 SCNcnt TC_DA Transfer output adjustment
analog outputTransfer output adjustment analog output signal
– – CN13 6 PCU Analog
TCS Toner sensor density detection
Toner sensor density detection
– – CN18 6 PCU Analog
TFD1 Paper exit tray paper sensor Paper detection signal – Paper provided
CN12 9 PCU
TFD2 Second paper exit full Paper full detection – Full detection CN3 5 PCUTFD3 Right paper exit full sensor Paper full detection Full detection – CN1 5 PCUTH_RA Temperature analog sensor
signal inputTemperature detection signal
– – CN19 9 PCU Analog
TH_UM Fusing thermistor temperature detection (upper main)
Fusing thermistor signal – – CN21 4 PCU Analog
TH_US Fusing thermistor temperature detection (upper sub)
Fusing thermistor signal – – CN21 6 PCU Analog
THV-REM/ THV(–) remote output Transfer bias (–) ON signal – High voltage output ON
CN13 10 PCU
THVREM/ THV(+) remote output Transfer bias (+) ON signal – High voltage output ON
CN13 16 PCU
TNMA Toner motor A Motor drive signal – – CN15 1 PCUTNMB Toner motor B Motor drive signal – – CN15 2 PCU/TRC_FIN Finisher communication Finisher communication
signal– – CN7 11 PCU
TXD RIC, PCI (main) send data RIC, PCI (main) send data – – CN12 3 MFPC PWB
TxD_FIN Finisher communication Finisher communication signal
– – CN7 1 PCU
TXD_PCI PCI (sub) send data PCI (sub) send data – – CN5 6 MFPC PWB
TXD_PCU ICU communication ICU-PCU communication signal
– – CN10 25 PCU
TXD_PIC ICU-PIC communication ICU-PIC communication signal
– – CN10 15 PCU
VBUS USB Device VBUS USB Device power supply Power shutoff Power supply CN17 1 MFPC PWB
VBUS USB Host (Rear) VBUS USB Host (Rear) power supply
Power shutoff Power supply CN18 1 MFPC PWB
VBUS1 USB Host1 VBUS USB Host1 power supply Power shutoff Power supply CN43 1 MFPC PWB
VBUS3 USB Host3 VBUS USB Host3 power supply Power shutoff Power supply CN43 6 MFPC PWB
VBUS4 USB Host4 VBUS USB Host4 power supply Power shutoff Power supply CN43 11 MFPC PWB
/WH_CNT Dehumidifying heater OFF signal
Dehumidifying heater OFF signal
Dehumidifying relay OFF
Dehumidifying relay ON
CN13 5 PCU
Y1A 151 selector output signal_2CS
151 selector output signal_2CS
– – CN14 25 PCU
Y1B 151 selector output signal_3CS (Op)
151 selector output signal_3CS (Op)
– – CN14 12 PCU
Y2 151 selector output signal_4CS (Op)
151 selector output signal_4CS (Op)
– – CN14 14 PCU
Signal name Name [Type] Function/OperationConnector level Connector
No.Pin No.
PWB name NOTE
"L" "H"
MX-M264U TOOL LIST 14 – 1
MX-M264U[14] TOOL LISTName Part code Note
Color copy test chart UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11SIT chart UKOG-0280FCZZ/UKOG-0280FCZ1Gray test chart UKOG-0162FCZZColor image density sensor calibration jig UKOG-0318FCZZKynar powder UKOG-0123FCZZ For transfer beltGrease (HANARL FL-955R) UKOG-0299FCZZConduction grease (FLOIL GE-676) UKOG-0012QSZZ Other shaftGrease (FLOIL G-313S) UKOG-0307FCZZGrease (JFE552) UKOG-0235FCZZStearic acid powder UKOG-0312FCZZ OPC drumGrease (FLOIL GP-501MR) UKOG-0013QSZZ RSPF paper feed roller shaftGrease (MOLYKOTE X5-6020) UKOG-0158FCZZGrease (MOLYKOTE BR-2 Plus) UKOG-0097FCZZ
No part of this publication may be reproduced,stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted inany form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,photocopying, recording, or otherwise, withoutprior written permission of the publisher.
COPYRIGHT © XXXX BYSHARP CORPORATION
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD
When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of theexclusive-use soldering iron is recommended.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder is about 220°C, which is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its solderingcapacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause landseparation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature of components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB whencompletion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering irontip after completion of soldering work.
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
Example:
5mm
Lead-Free
Solder compositioncode (Refer to thetable at the right.)
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition
Sn-Ag-Cu
Sn-Ag-BiSn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi
Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
Bi-Sn-Ag-PBi-Sn-Ag
a
b
z
i
n
s
p
Solder composition code
a
(Danish) ADVARSEL !Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteriaf samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUSParisto voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaantyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTIONIl y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrectde la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie dumême type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNINGExplosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalenttyp som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) AchtungExplosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ odervom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
(For USA, CANADA)“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERYTHAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THEBATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOURLOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DEMÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LAPILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTREAGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ETDE TRAITEMENT.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL
All rights reserved.Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution
No part of this publication may be reproduced,stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements• Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0,
Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® 7,Windows® Server 2003, Windows® Server 2008 and Internet Explorer®are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.and other countries.
• PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Laser Writer, and Safari are registeredtrademarks or trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• IBM, PC/AT, and Power PC are trademarks of International Business MachinesCorporation.
• Acrobat® Reader Copyright® 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rightsreserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks ofAdobe Systems Incorporated.
• PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
COPYRIGHT © 2012 BY SHARP CORPORATION
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATIONBusiness Solutions Promotion GroupBusiness Solutions CS Promotion CenterYamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2012 October Published in Japan for electronic Distribution